Contents
Setting Up
Basic Operations
Copying
Faxing
Printing
- Printing from a Computer
  - Canceling Prints
  - Checking the Printing Status and Log
- Various Printing Methods
  - Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
    - Printing via Secure Print
  - Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
Scanning
Linking with Mobile Devices
Managing the Machine
Setting Menu List
Maintenance
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
Appendix
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

Canon X C1127i User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for X C1127i by Canon which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon X320 Manual

Canon G9 X Manual

Canon X310ST Manual

Canon G7 X Mark II Manual

Canon X420 Manual

Canon XA40 Manual

Canon X350 Manual

Canon X320 Manual

C1127iF / C1127i

User's Guide

USRMA-5172-00 2020-05 en Copyright CANON INC. 2020

Contents

Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................ 3

Main Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4

Preparations Required Before Use ............................................................................................................................. 6

Preventing Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................................................ 8

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ............................................................................................................................ 10

Setting the Date/Time ............................................................................................................................................. 13

Setting Up the Network Environment ...................................................................................................................... 15

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 17

Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 18

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 19

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ....................................................................................... 21

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ........................................................................................... 23

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ....................................................................................... 25

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ...................................................................................... 28

Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................... 31

Setting IP Addresses ........................................................................................................................................... 32

Setting IPv4 Address ..................................................................................................................................... 33

Setting IPv6 Addresses .................................................................................................................................. 36

Viewing Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 39

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ...................................................................................... 41

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ........................................................................................... 42

Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................... 45

Setting Up Print Server .................................................................................................................................. 49

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ......................................................................................... 52

Conguring Ethernet Settings ........................................................................................................................ 53

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ...................................................................................................... 55

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .............................................................................................. 56

Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 57

Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 61

Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 63

Registering LDAP Servers .............................................................................................................................. 65

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ......................................................................................... 70

Other Network Settings ................................................................................................................................. 74

Installing Drivers .................................................................................................................................................... 78

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ........................................................................................................... 79

Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use .............................................................................................................. 80

Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name .......................................................................................................... 81

Selecting the Receive Mode .................................................................................................................................. 82

Connecting the Telephone Line ............................................................................................................................ 83

Conguring Scan Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 84

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ........................................................................................................... 85

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax ................................................................................... 86

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings .................................................................................................................... 87

Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings ............................................................................................ 90

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location ........................................................................................ 94

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location ....................................................................................................... 95

Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location ............................................................................................. 98

Basic Operations ........................................................................................................................................ 101

Parts and Their Functions ...................................................................................................................................... 105

Front Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 106

Back Side ......................................................................................................................................................... 108

Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 109

Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 110

Multi-Purpose Tray ........................................................................................................................................... 111

Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................... 112

Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 113

Turning ON the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 115

Turning OFF the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 116

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation ............................................................................................. 117

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ...................................................................................................................... 118

Restarting the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 120

Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................... 122

Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................... 123

Home Screen ............................................................................................................................................. 124

<Status Monitor> Screen ............................................................................................................................. 127

Message Display ......................................................................................................................................... 129

Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 130

Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................... 133

Logging in to the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 135

Placing Originals ................................................................................................................................................... 137

Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................................... 141

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .................................................................................................................... 143

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................. 149

Loading Envelopes ............................................................................................................................................ 152

Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................. 154

Specifying Paper Size and Type .......................................................................................................................... 156

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ....................................................................................... 157

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ................................................................................ 159

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................... 161

Registering a Custom Paper Size .................................................................................................................. 163

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ................................................................................................................ 165

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................................ 166

Customizing the Display ........................................................................................................................................ 167

Customizing the Home Screen ........................................................................................................................... 168

Registering Frequently Used Settings .................................................................................................................. 171

Changing the Default Settings for Functions .......................................................................................................... 173

Setting Sounds ...................................................................................................................................................... 175

Entering Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 177

Registering Destinations ....................................................................................................................................... 179

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ...................................................................................................... 181

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group ................................................................................................. 184

Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................. 186

Using a USB Memory Device .................................................................................................................................. 187

Copying .............................................................................................................................................................. 190

Copy Basic Features Screen ................................................................................................................................... 192

Basic Copy Operations ........................................................................................................................................... 194

Canceling Copies .............................................................................................................................................. 199

Checking the Copying Status and Log ................................................................................................................. 200

Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ................................................................................................................... 202

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ........................................................................................................... 203

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) ...................................................................................................... 204

Erasing Dark Borders When Copying (Erase Frame) ............................................................................................... 205

Adjusting the Color ........................................................................................................................................... 206

Useful Copy Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 207

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) .......................................................................................... 208

Collating Copies by Page ................................................................................................................................... 209

Making ID Card Copies ...................................................................................................................................... 210

Making Passport Copies .................................................................................................................................... 211

Faxing .................................................................................................................................................................. 214

Fax Basic Features Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 217

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes ....................................................................................................................... 218

Canceling Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................... 226

Receiving Faxes .................................................................................................................................................... 227

Useful Functions When Sending ............................................................................................................................. 231

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings) ............................................................................. 232

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending) ............................................................................................... 235

Saving a Copy of a Sent Original ......................................................................................................................... 237

Various Receiving Methods .................................................................................................................................... 239

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception) ........................................................................ 240

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically ............................................................................................... 242

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents .................................................................................... 245

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .......................................................................................................... 247

Sending PC Faxes ............................................................................................................................................. 248

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax) ...................................................................................................................................... 250

Sending I-Faxes ................................................................................................................................................ 251

Receiving I-Faxes .............................................................................................................................................. 258

Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 260

Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 261

III

Canceling Prints ............................................................................................................................................... 263

Checking the Printing Status and Log .................................................................................................................. 265

Various Printing Methods ...................................................................................................................................... 267

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ............................................................................................ 268

Printing via Secure Print .............................................................................................................................. 269

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) .................................................................................... 272

Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................... 281

Scan Basic Features Screen .................................................................................................................................... 283

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ................................................................................................................ 286

Scanning and Saving to a Computer .................................................................................................................... 287

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device .................................................................................................................. 289

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server ..................................................................... 293

Canceling Sending Documents ........................................................................................................................... 303

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals .................................................................................................... 304

Scanning Clearly ................................................................................................................................................... 306

Adjusting Image Quality .................................................................................................................................... 307

Adjusting Density ............................................................................................................................................. 308

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness) ................................................................................................. 309

Useful Scanning Functions .................................................................................................................................... 311

Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files ............................................................................................................ 312

Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size) ......................................................................... 315

Conguring a File Name .................................................................................................................................... 316

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings) ................................................................... 317

Specifying E-Mail Settings .................................................................................................................................. 320

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .......................................................................................................... 323

Scanning Documents from an Application ........................................................................................................... 324

Using ScanGear MF ........................................................................................................................................... 326

Using WSD ....................................................................................................................................................... 327

Scanning Originals Using WSD (WSD Scan) .................................................................................................... 329

Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 333

Connecting with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................................ 334

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ........................................................................................ 335

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ............................................................................................................. 337

Utilizing the Machine through Applications ........................................................................................................... 341

Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 343

Printing with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................................ 348

Scanning with AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................... 351

Faxing with AirPrint .......................................................................................................................................... 353

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ................................................................................................................................. 355

Using Google Cloud Print ....................................................................................................................................... 356

Printing with Default Print Service (Android) .......................................................................................................... 358

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 359

Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 362

Setting Access Privileges ....................................................................................................................................... 364

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN .............................................................................................................. 365

Setting the Department ID Management ............................................................................................................. 367

Setting a Remote UI PIN .................................................................................................................................... 373

LDAP Server Authentication ............................................................................................................................... 375

Conguring the Network Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 379

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 381

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings .................................................................................................. 382

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings .............................................................................................. 385

Changing Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 388

Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 389

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .......................................................................................................... 391

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 394

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ................................................................................... 397

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 400

Conguring IPSec Settings ................................................................................................................................. 402

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings .................................................................................................. 409

Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 413

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions .................................................................................... 415

Restricting Use of the Address Book ............................................................................................................. 416

Limiting Available Destinations ..................................................................................................................... 418

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions ........................................................................................................... 420

Restricting Printing from a Computer .................................................................................................................. 422

Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 423

Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 425

Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 426

Increasing the Security of Documents .................................................................................................................... 427

Generating a Device Signature Key ..................................................................................................................... 428

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 429

Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 430

Checking the Status and Logs ............................................................................................................................ 433

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ........................................................................................................... 439

Registering Destinations from Remote UI ............................................................................................................ 442

Security Policy .................................................................................................................................................. 446

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data ................................................................................................................. 452

Updating the Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 455

Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 457

Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 460

<Preferences> ....................................................................................................................................................... 461

<Display Settings> ............................................................................................................................................ 462

<English Keyboard Layout> ................................................................................................................................ 467

<Timer/Energy Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 468

<Network> ....................................................................................................................................................... 473

<External Interface> .......................................................................................................................................... 488

<Accessibility> .................................................................................................................................................. 489

<Adjustment/Maintenance> .................................................................................................................................. 490

<Adjust Image Quality> ..................................................................................................................................... 491

<Maintenance> ................................................................................................................................................ 504

<Function Settings> .............................................................................................................................................. 506

<Common> ...................................................................................................................................................... 507

<Copy> ............................................................................................................................................................ 513

<Printer> ......................................................................................................................................................... 515

<Send> ............................................................................................................................................................ 559

<Receive/Forward> ........................................................................................................................................... 572

<Store/Access Files> .......................................................................................................................................... 579

<Secure Print> .................................................................................................................................................. 587

<Set Destination> .................................................................................................................................................. 588

<Management Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 589

<User Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 590

<Device Management> ...................................................................................................................................... 591

<License/Other> ............................................................................................................................................... 594

<Data Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 596

<Security Settings> ........................................................................................................................................... 598

Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 601

Regular Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................. 603

Cleaning the Exterior ........................................................................................................................................ 604

Cleaning the Platen Glass .................................................................................................................................. 605

Cleaning the Feeder .......................................................................................................................................... 606

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 609

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB) .......................................................................................................................... 611

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 612

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables .................................................................................................. 617

Adjusting Image Quality ....................................................................................................................................... 618

Adjusting Gradation .......................................................................................................................................... 619

Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" ...................................................................................................................... 624

Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility ..................................................................................................... 625

Adjusting Print Position ..................................................................................................................................... 627

Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 629

Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 630

Replacement Parts ................................................................................................................................................ 635

Troubleshooting (FAQ) .......................................................................................................................... 638

Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 640

Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 642

Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 643

Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 644

Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 646

Going Digital .................................................................................................................................................... 648

So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 650

Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 652

Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 653

Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 656

Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 657

Cassette Feeding Module-AF .............................................................................................................................. 660

Copy Card Reader-F .......................................................................................................................................... 661

Fax Function .................................................................................................................................................... 662

Scan Function .................................................................................................................................................. 663

Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 664

Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 666

System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 668

Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 670

Options ................................................................................................................................................................ 671

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 672

System Options ................................................................................................................................................ 674

Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 676

Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 677

Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 678

Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 681

Basic Windows Operations .................................................................................................................................... 682

Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 690

VII

Setting Up

Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................... 3

Main Functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 4

Preparations Required Before Use ....................................................................................................................... 6

Preventing Unauthorized Access .......................................................................................................................... 8

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................... 10

Setting the Date/Time ......................................................................................................................................... 13

Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 15

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 17

Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 18

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 19

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 21

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 23

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 25

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 28

Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 31

Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 32

Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 33

Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 36

Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 39

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 41

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 42

Conguring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 45

Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 49

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 52

Conguring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 53

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 55

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 56

Conguring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 57

Conguring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 61

Conguring WINS .................................................................................................................................... 63

Registering LDAP Servers ......................................................................................................................... 65

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 70

Other Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 74

Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 78

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ................................................................................................... 79

Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use ....................................................................................................... 80

Setting Up

Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name .................................................................................................. 81

Selecting the Receive Mode ............................................................................................................................ 82

Connecting the Telephone Line ...................................................................................................................... 83

Conguring Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................... 84

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ................................................................................................... 85

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax ......................................................................... 86

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings ............................................................................................................ 87

Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings ................................................................................... 90

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location .............................................................................. 94

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location .............................................................................................. 95

Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location ................................................................................... 98

Setting Up

6FR9-000

Before using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check

the sequences of ow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings. Preparations Required

Before Use(P. 6)

●The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you purchased. Before using the

machine, see Main Functions(P. 4) and check the available functions.

Conguring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)

●You can easily congure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network

settings, by following the on-screen guidance. Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 10)

Setting Up

Main Functions

6FR9-001

This manual covers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions

are available on the model you purchased.

: With function : Without function

Function C1127iF C1127i

Copy

Fax

Scan

2-sided printing

Forward received faxes

Send scanned data (e-Mail/SMB/FTP)

Wired LAN connection

Wireless LAN connection

USB connection

Remote UI

Keys and Certicates

Linking with Mobile Devices

NFC

Display Touch panel Touch panel

Feeder Feeder (2-sided scanning) Feeder (2-sided scanning)

Default System Manager ID 7654321 7654321

Default System Manager PIN 7654321 7654321

Department ID Management

Application Library

Cassette Feeding Module-AF Optional Optional

TELEPHONE 6 KIT Optional

Setting Up

Function C1127iF C1127i

HANDSET KIT 3 * Optional

Copy Card Reader-F Optional Optional

Barcode Printing Kit Optional Optional

Send PDF Security Feature Set Optional Optional

*This optional item may not be available, depending on your country or region.

●For the available driver types, see the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see

the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

LINKS

Viewing User's Guide(P. 681)

Setting Up

Preparations Required Before Use

6FR9-002

Set up the machine following steps 1 to 5 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go

to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check Preventing Unauthorized

Access(P. 8) .

Step 1 Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 10)

Step 2 Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15)

●Congure the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need

to use the Setup Guide, congure the network settings from here.

Step 3 Installing Drivers(P. 78)

Step 4 Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 79)

Step 5 Conguring Scan Settings(P. 84)

Setting Up

Setting from the Remote UI

●When the network environment settings are complete, you can eciently set the machine from a computer

using Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

Importing data from another machine to save time

●As long as the model is the same, you can save setting data registered on another Canon printer/

multifunction machine to a computer (export) and load the setting data to this machine (import).

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 452)

Setting Up

Preventing Unauthorized Access

6FR9-003

This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is

a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines

connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a

variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,

and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to

reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to

threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary

settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected

to the network.

Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network

Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 8)

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 9)

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 9)

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 9)

Assigning a Private IP Address

An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is

used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication

within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/

multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage

due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,

your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local

area network, such as a LAN in the company.

Global IP Address

Can be accessed from the external network

Private IP Address

Can be accessed from the users within a local area network

Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,

assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is

found in one of the following ranges.

Ranges for Private IP addresses

●From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

●From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

●From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

For information on how to conrm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33) .

●If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment

to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents

Setting Up

access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/

multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission

A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/

intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the

external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the

external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP

address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall

Settings(P. 382) .

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication

For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Conguring the Network Security Settings(P. 379) ,

and on the procedures to specify, see Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391) .

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine

If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to

information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines

enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.

Setting PIN to Each Function

●Setting PIN for Using Remote UI

For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 373) .

●Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings

For more information, see Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 365) .

●Address Book PIN

For more information on setting a PIN, see Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416) .

Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on

the other security measures, see Managing the Machine(P. 362) and take necessary security measures for

preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.

Setting Up

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide

6FR9-004

1660-009

When the machine is turned on ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 115) ) for the rst time, the Setup Guide starts up to

assist you to congure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the

setting screens are displayed in the following order.

Step 1 Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region

Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the

country or region where the machine will be used.

1Select a language.

2Select <Yes>.

3Select a country or region.

Step 2 Setting the Date and Time

Adjust the machine's date/time.

1Select a time zone.

What is UTC?

●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the

world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required

for Internet communications.

2Enter the date and time, and select <Apply>.

●Tap the entry eld, and enter the date and time.

Step 3 Setting the Access Security Measures

Set a PIN to access the Remote UI. Because the Remote UI can be used to change the machine

settings from a computer, setting of a PIN is recommended.

1Select <Yes>.

●If you select <No>, PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.

●You can also set the access security measure of the Remote UI later. Setting

a Remote UI PIN(P. 373)

2Enter a PIN, and then select <Apply>.

3Enter the same PIN, and then select <Apply>.

Step 4 Performing the Color Adjustment

To achieve good copy quality, adjust the gradation.

1Select <Yes>.

●If you select <No>, color adjustment is not performed, and the Setup Guide

proceeds to step 5.

Setting Up

2Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <OK>.

3Conrm the procedure, and select <Start>.

➠An adjustment image is printed.

4Open the feeder after the screen displayed during printing is closed.

5Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.

●Place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black

stripe toward the back side of the machine.

6Gently close the feeder.

7Select <Start Scanning>.

➠Adjustment starts.

●When adjustment is complete, remove the adjustment image from the platen

glass.

Step 5 Conguring Automatic Cleaning of the Fixing Assembly

Congure to automatically clean the xing assembly.

1Check the message displayed on the screen, and select <Yes>.

●If you select <No>, automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds

to step 6.

●You can set automatic cleaning of the xing assembly later. <Auto Clean

Fixing Assembly>(P. 498)

2Select <On>.

●If you select <Off>, automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds

to step 6.

3Set available paper sources to <On>.

●When cleaning is performed, paper is fed from the paper source for which you

set <On>.

●You can use the following paper for cleaning.

- Paper sizes: A4/Letter

- Paper types: Plain 1 to 3/Recycled 1 or 2

4Select <Apply>.

Step 6 Setting the Wireless LAN

Congure the settings to connect to the network using the wireless LAN.

Setting Up

1Select <Yes>.

●If you select <No>, wireless LAN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to

step 7.

2Select <OK>.

3Select the setting method.

●For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see Connecting to a

Wireless LAN(P. 19) .

Step 7 Viewing Application Library

The one-touch button referred to as "Application Library" is provided in the Home screen. You

can read the description of each function.

1To nish the Setup Guide, select <End>.

➠When the Setup Guide is complete, the Home screen appears.

Setting Up

Setting the Date/Time

6FR9-005

Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time are used as the reference for the functions specifying the

time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.

Setting the Time Zone(P. 13)

Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 13)

Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 14)

Setting the Time Zone

If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time

Zone>.

3Select the time zone.

What is UTC?

●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and

time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC

time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

Setting the Current Date and Time

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings>.

3Enter the date and time.

●Tap the entry eld, and enter the date and time.

Setting Up

4Select <Apply>.

●Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the

current date and time are also changed accordingly.

●The display format of the date and time can be changed, respectively.

<Date Format>(P. 469)

<Time Format>(P. 469)

Setting the Daylight Saving Time

If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight

Saving Time Settings>.

3Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.

●When you select <On>, select <Start Date> and <End Date>, and set the month and day for each item. To set

the day, specify "what day of which week."

4Select <Apply>.

Setting Up

Setting Up the Network Environment

6FR9-006

When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to

the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking

devices. For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third

party.

●The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.

●The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.

●For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact

your manufacturer.

◼Before You Start

Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.

Check your computer settings.

●Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more

information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the

device manufacturers.

●Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the

network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the

network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.

●Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication

method or the Ethernet type ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53) ). For more

information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●To check the MAC address of the machine.

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 39)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 40)

Setting Up

●To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Conguring IEEE 802.1X

Authentication Settings(P. 409) .

Select wired or wireless LAN.

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 17)

Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.

●Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 18)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Set the IP address as necessary.

●At the time of purchase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.

Change this setting if you want to use a specic IP address. Setting IP

Addresses(P. 32)

LINKS

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 41)

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 52)

Setting Up

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN

6FR9-007

After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN

using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you

will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the

manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.

4Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 18)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wired LAN

6FR9-008

Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.

1Connect a LAN cable.

●Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.

●Push the connector in until it clicks into place.

2Wait for several minutes.

➠The IP address is set automatically.

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 32)

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN

6FR9-009

Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is

equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking

devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in

detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the

network.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 19)

Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 20)

Risk of information leak

●Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an

unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in

wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.

Wireless LAN security

●The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security

compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact

your manufacturer.

Required devices for wireless LAN connection

●The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS

When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.

◼Push Button Mode

Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on

your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 21)

Setting Up

◼PIN Code Mode

Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in

the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 23)

●If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.

Manually Setting Up Connection

When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required

information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID

and network key. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 31)

◼Selecting a Wireless Router

Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as

possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 25)

◼Manually Entering the Setup Information

If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the

SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 28)

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15)

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 17)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode

6FR9-00A

1660-00J

If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.

●How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your

networking device for help.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.

6Select <Yes>.

7Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.

●The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.

●Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.

See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close> and return to step 5.

Setting Up

8Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

9Select <Close>.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 32)

●While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 123)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 474)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode

6FR9-00C

If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to

the networking device.

●How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your

networking device for help.

From a Computer

1Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a

WPS PIN code.

●For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.

From the Operation Panel

2Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

3Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

4Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

5Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

6Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.

7Select <Yes>.

➠The PIN code is generated and shown on the display.

From a Computer

8Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.

●Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.

Setting Up

●The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close> and return to step 6.

From the Operation Panel

9Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.

10 Select <Close>.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 32)

●While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 123)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 474)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router

6FR9-00E

You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the

machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the

required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 31) ).

Security settings

●If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to

<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to

select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up

the connection using <Enter Manually>. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 28)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <SSID Settings>.

6Select <Select Access Point>.

➠The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.

●If a message is displayed telling that no access point can be found, check the network settings. For more

information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

7Select a wireless LAN router.

●Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down, and select <Next> <OK>.

Setting Up

To view details of security settings

●Select the wireless LAN router, and select <Details>. To return to the original screen, select .

If your wireless router is not found

●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. For more

information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

8Enter the network key that you have written down.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

9Select <Yes>.

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close>, check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.

10 Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

11 Select <Close>.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 32)

●While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 123)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 474)

Setting Up

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings

6FR9-00F

If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other

procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed

settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security

protocols. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 31)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <SSID Settings> <Enter Manually>.

6Enter the SSID that you have written down.

●Enter the SSID, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

7Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.

●If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.

Using WEP

1Select <WEP>.

2Select an authentication method.

Setting Up

Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."

Uses the WEP key as a password.

When <Open System> is selected

●When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key

authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the

setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.

3Select the WEP key you want to edit.

●Select the WEP key (1 to 4), and select <Edit>.

●Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

4Enter the network key that you have written down.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

5Select the desired WEP key.

●Select the WEP key you have edited, and select <Register>.

Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK

1Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.

2Select an encryption method.

<Auto>

Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.

<AES-CCMP>

Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.

3Enter the network key that you have written down.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

Setting Up

8Select <Yes>.

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close>, check whether the specied settings are correct, and return to step 5.

9Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

10 Select <Close>.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 32)

●While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 123)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 474)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Setting Up

Checking the SSID and Network Key

6FR9-00H

When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.

The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the

necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your

networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

SSID A name given for identifying a specic wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include

"access point name" and "network name."

Network Key A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other

terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"

and "preshared key (PSK)."

Wireless Security Protocols

(Authentication/Encryption)

When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to

specify security settings. Check the following information:

●Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)

●Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)

●Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 25)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 28)

Setting Up

Setting IP Addresses

6FR9-00J

Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are

available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you

need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 36)

Setting Up

Setting IPv4 Address

6FR9-00K

1660-00W

The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP

addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the

machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly

inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 18) ). You can test the

network connection if necessary.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Testing the Network Connection(P. 34)

Setting IPv4 Address

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.

4Congure IP address settings.

Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic

addressing is enabled.

Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,

the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.

Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.

Automatically assigning an IP address

1Select <Auto Acquire>.

2Select <On> in <Auto Acquire>, and select <Select Protocol>.

3Select <DHCP>.

Setting Up

If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address

●Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time

and communications resources searching the network for these services.

4Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.

●If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.

5Select <Apply>.

●IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.

Manually entering an IP address

1Select <Auto Acquire>, and select <Off> in <Auto Acquire> <Apply> <OK>.

2Select <Manually Acquire>.

3Enter <IP Address>, <Subnet Mask>, and <Gateway Address>, and select <Apply>.

5Select <OK>.

6Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Checking whether the settings are correct

●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote

UI(P. 430) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (

Testing the Network Connection(P. 34) ).

When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver

●When the MFNP port is used, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong

to the same subnet; therefore, you do not need to add a new port. When the standard TCP/IP port is used,

you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

*If you do not know which port is used, see Checking the Printer Port(P. 687) .

Testing the Network Connection

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

Setting Up

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.

4Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and select <Apply>.

➠If a proper connection has been established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed.

LINKS

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 36)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

Conguring WINS(P. 63)

Setting Up

Setting IPv6 Addresses

6FR9-00L

The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congured via the Remote UI. Before

setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4

Settings(P. 39) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.

Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not

available in an IPv6 environment. The machine can use the following multiple IPv6

addresses:

Type Description

Link-local address An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with

devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the

machine is enabled.

Manual address An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex length and default

router address.

Stateless address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network

prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is

restarted (or turned ON).

Stateful address An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [IPv6 Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congure the required settings.

Setting Up

[Use IPv6]

Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.

[Stateless Address 1]

Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.

[Use Manual Address]

When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex

length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.

[IP Address]

Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Prex Length]

Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.

[Default Router Address]

Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use DHCPv6]

Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.

6Click [OK].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Checking whether the settings are correct

●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the

machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

Setting Up

Selecting settings from the operation panel

●IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen. <IPv6 Settings>(P. 478)

When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver

●You need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

Setting Up

Viewing Network Settings

6FR9-00R

Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 39)

Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 39)

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 39)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 40)

●The IP address is not correctly congured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".

●Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP

address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine

starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

●You can print a list of the current network settings. User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 633)

Viewing IPv4 Settings

<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check the

settings

Viewing IPv6 Settings

<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check the

settings

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.

➠The MAC address is displayed.

Setting Up

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <Connection Information>.

6Select the setting to view.

Viewing security information

●To view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, select <Security Settings>.

Viewing from the <Status Monitor> screen

●<Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from <Status Monitor>.

<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <Network Connection Type> Select the setting to view

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 36)

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

Setting Up

Conguring Settings for Communication with a

Computer

6FR9-00S

Specify the protocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before conguring the

machine for printing or faxing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the

manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Setting Up Print Server(P. 49)

●Protocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and

can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.

●Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the

network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.

Setting Up

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions

6FR9-00U

Congure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Click [Network Settings].

4Congure printing protocols.

Conguring LPD or RAW

1Select [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings] [Edit].

2Congure the settings as necessary.

[Use LPD Printing]

Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.

[Use RAW Printing]

Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.

[RX Timeout]

Set a value as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does not resume within the set

time, printing is canceled.

3Click [OK].

Setting Up

Conguring WSD

1Select [WSD Settings] [Edit].

2Congure the settings as necessary.

[Use WSD Printing]

Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.

[Use WSD Browsing]

Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is

automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.

[Use WSD Scanning]

WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without installing the scanner driver. Select

the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD scanning, clear the check box.

[Use Computer Scanning]

Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check

box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, select

<Scan> in the Home screen and specify a WSD-connected computer as a scan destination ( Scanning

and Saving to a Computer(P. 287) ).

[Use Multicast Discovery]

Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is

cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the

network.

3Click [OK].

5Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Selecting settings from the operation panel

●LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<LPD Settings>(P. 480)

<RAW Settings>(P. 480)

<WSD Settings>(P. 480)

Setting up WSD network devices

●The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the

Printer Folder(P. 682) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For

Setting Up

more information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant

drivers on the online manual website.

To change the port number

●The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Changing Port Numbers(P. 388)

LINKS

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Setting Up

Conguring Printer Ports

6FR9-00W

Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via

the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an

incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the

document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the

computer.

●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682)

2Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3Click the [Ports] tab and congure the required settings.

Adding a port

If you have changed the IP address of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing

drivers from the Windows printer folder, add a new port. There are two types of port: "MFNP Port" and

"Standard TCP/IP Port." Select the port type according to your environment.

MFNP Port

(only for IPv4 environment)

This is a port that allows the IP address of the machine to be detected automatically.

Even if the IP address of the machine is changed, the connection is maintained,

provided that the machine and the computer are in the same subnet. You do not need

to add a new port every time the IP address is changed. If you are using the machine

in an IPv4 environment, you should normally select this type of port.

●You can add an MFNP port only when you installed the driver from the provided

CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, or when you downloaded and installed the printer driver or

the fax driver from the Canon website.

Setting Up

Standard TCP/IP Port This is a standard Windows port. When you use this type of port, you need to add a

new port every time that the IP address of the machine is changed. Select this type of

port when you are using the machine in an IPv6 environment and when you cannot

add an MFNP port.

Adding an MFNP port

1Click [Add Port].

2Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].

3Select [Auto Detect] and select the machine when it is detected, and then click [Next].

If the machine is not detected

●Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, select [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or

MAC address of the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 39) ) and then click [Next].

4Click [Add] [Finish].

5Click [Close].

Adding a standard TCP/IP port

1Click [Add Port].

2Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].

3Click [Next].

4Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].

●The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.

Setting Up

●When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.

*When you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].

5Click [Finish].

6Click [Close].

Changing the port type or number

If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side ( Conguring Printing

Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42) ) or the port number has been changed ( Changing Port

Numbers(P. 388) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This operation is

not needed for WSD ports.

MFNP port

1Click [Congure Port].

2Under [Protocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the [Port Number].

3Click [OK].

Standard TCP/IP port

1Click [Congure Port].

2Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].

Setting Up

●If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].

●If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].

3Click [OK].

Deleting ports

1Select the port you want to delete, and click [Delete Port].

●You cannot delete a port currently congured as the printer port. To delete this port, select a different

port and click [Apply] to congure it as the new printer port, and then delete the original port.

2Click [OK].

4Click [Close].

LINKS

Setting Up Print Server(P. 49)

Setting Up

Setting Up Print Server

6FR9-00X

With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it

possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers

on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server,

congure the settings for sharing the printer.

●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

●You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit

architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.

●When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.

To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server

●"Canon Driver Information Assist Service" must be added during the printer driver installation. For more

information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the

machine.

●Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.

4Install additional drivers as necessary.

●This operation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit

architecture via the print server.

Setting Up

1Click [Additional Drivers].

2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].

●Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.

Print server Select the check box for

32-bit operating systems [x64]

64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]

●If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see

Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 685) .

3Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder

that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].

●If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [uk_eng] [x64]

[Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

●If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [uk_eng] [32BIT]

[Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

4Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.

5Click [OK].

◼Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server

1Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the

Print Server(P. 683)

2Double-click the shared printer.

Setting Up

3Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.

LINKS

Printing from a Computer(P. 261)

Setting Up

Conguring the Machine for Your Network

Environment

6FR9-00Y

The conguration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to

be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.

Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 55)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

Conguring SMB(P. 61)

Conguring WINS(P. 63)

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 70)

Other Network Settings(P. 74)

Setting Up

Conguring Ethernet Settings

6FR9-010

Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can

set the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be

used without changing the defaults ( <Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 484) ), but

you can change these settings to suit your network environment.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.

4Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.

●If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode

and the type that can be used.

Conguring Ethernet settings automatically

Select <On> in <Auto Detect>.

Conguring Ethernet settings manually

1Select <Off> in <Auto Detect>.

2<Communication Mode> select the communication mode.

Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a

networking device using half duplex.

Setting Up

Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.

3<Ethernet Type> select the Ethernet type.

4Select <Apply>.

5Select <OK>.

6Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

LINKS

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 55)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

Setting Up

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit

6FR9-011

In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of

data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each

network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.

4Select the MTU.

5Select <OK>.

6Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

Setting Up

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network

6FR9-012

When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a

mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,

communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network

devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the

network.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>.

4Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and

select <Apply>.

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 55)

Setting Up

Conguring DNS

6FR9-013

DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP

address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring

DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Click [Network Settings].

4Congure DNS settings.

Conguring IPv4 DNS

1Select [IPv4 Settings] [Edit].

2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.

Setting Up

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire Host Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP

server.

[Acquire DNS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire Domain Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.

[Acquire WINS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire SMTP Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 69 to obtain an SMTP server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire POP Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

"example.com."

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS

Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

Setting Up

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the

[mDNS Name] text box.

3Click [OK].

Conguring IPv6 DNS

1Select [IPv6 Settings] [Edit].

2Congure IPv6 DNS settings.

●The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to congure the settings. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 36)

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire DNS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire Domain Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be

entered.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Setting Up

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

"example.com."

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the

check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless

Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic

Update Interval] text box.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.

[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the

check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

3Click [OK].

5Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Selecting settings from the operation panel

●DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen. <DNS Settings>(P. 478)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 36)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

Setting Up

Conguring SMB

6FR9-014

Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and

printers, with more than one device in a network. The machine uses SMB to store

scanned documents into a shared folder. Depending on your network, you may have

to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.

NetBIOS Name

In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected

computers as well as for le sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as

the NetBIOS name.

Workgroup Name

Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as le

sharing, become available in a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the

machine belongs to.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [SMB Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Specify the required settings.

Setting Up

[NetBIOS Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.

[Workgroup Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.

●NetBIOS names or workgroup names that start with an asterisk (*) cannot be registered to a WINS server.

6Click [OK].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

LINKS

Conguring WINS(P. 63)

Setting Up

Conguring WINS

6FR9-015

Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or

printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specied.

●In order to specify WINS server settings, NetBIOS name and workgroup name are required to be set.

Conguring SMB(P. 61)

●The function is not available in an IPv6 network.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [WINS Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and specify the required settings.

[WINS Resolution]

Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.

[WINS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of the WINS server.

Setting Up

●If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the

IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.

6Click [OK].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Selecting settings from the operation panel

●WINS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen. <WINS Settings>(P. 480)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Setting Up

Registering LDAP Servers

6FR9-016

If an LDAP server is implemented in the network, you can search the server for fax

numbers or e-mail addresses, and then specify them as destinations or register

them in the Address Book. Note also that if send function authentication ( LDAP

Server Authentication(P. 375) ) is enabled, you must register the server used for

authentication. You can register a maximum of ve LDAP servers each for searching

and for authentication to the machine. Register LDAP servers via the Remote UI.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Click [LDAP Server Settings].

4Click [Register New Server] for [LDAP Server (For Search)] or [LDAP Server (For

Authentication)].

●LDAP server registration needs to be performed separately either for searching or for authentication. To use

an LDAP server for searching for fax and e-mail destinations, register it for searching, and to use it for

authenticating sending of e-mail or faxes, register it for authenticating.

To edit registered server information

●Click a text link under [Server Name] for the edit screen.

To delete registered server information

●Click [Delete] on the right of the server name you want to delete click [OK].

5Register the LDAP server.

Setting Up

[Server Name]

Enter the name to be assigned to the LDAP server.

[Server Address]

Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server

(example: ldap.example.com).

[Server Address] and DNS

●To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the following:

- If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network.

- If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward

lookup. If the server supports only forward lookup, select [Do Not Use] or [Use] for [Login Information]. If

you select [Use (Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.

[Position to Start Search]

Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box

blank sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.

●When specifying the node, enter "DC=," followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the

Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is

"john.example.com," for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com."

[Use TLS]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.

●This is enabled only when [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information].

[Port Number]

Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.

[Search Timeout]

Specify how long the machine searches.

Setting Up

[Login Information]

Select [Do Not Use], [Use], or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication

implemented by the LDAP server. When [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, the user name and

password must be specied.

[Do Not Use] Select not to authenticate the machine using the login information.

[Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the login information.

[Use (Security Authentication)]

Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the

authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be

synchronized with that of the LDAP server.

[Display Authentication Screen When Searching]

Select the check box to require the user to enter the user name and password when a search is requested. If the

[Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started] check box is selected, the user name

and password used for authentication when sending faxes or scans are also used here. If the check box is

cleared, authentication is carried out using the information entered in [User Name] and [Password].

[Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started]

Set whether the authentication information when the fax or scan function was used is also used when

searching. This check box is normally displayed selected; however, it is only valid when the [Display

Authentication Screen When Searching] check box is selected.

[User Name]

Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server.

●When [Use] is selected for [Login Information], enter the user name in the form "(domain name)\(user

name)" (example: domain1\user1).

●When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, enter the user name only (example: user1).

[Set/Change Password]

To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password]

text box.

[Domain Name]

When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter alphanumeric characters for the

directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).

[Conrm TLS Certicate for LDAP Server Access]

Select the check box to verify the certicate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS.

Also, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] check box as necessary.

Registering the authentication server

If the use of the fax and scan functions is restricted, register the server used for authentication.

Setting Up

[Server Name]

Enter the name to be assigned to the LDAP server.

[Server Address]

Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server

(example: ldap.example.com).

[Server Address] and DNS

●To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the following:

- If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network.

- If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward

lookup. If the server supports only forward lookup, select [Use] for [Login Information]. If you select [Use

(Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.

[Position to Start Search]

Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box

blank sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.

●When specifying the node, enter "DC=," followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the

Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is

"john.example.com," for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com."

[Use TLS]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.

●This is enabled only when [Use] is selected in [Login Information].

[Port Number]

Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.

[Authentication/Attribute Acquisition Timeout]

Specify how long authentication and attribute acquisition can continue.

Setting Up

[User Name Attribute]

Enter the attribute name, to be compared with a user name entered during authentication, consisting of

alphanumeric characters (Example: "sAMAccountName").

●Not required if [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information].

[E-Mail Address Attribute]

Enter the attribute name, to be used for obtaining an e-mail address from the authentication server, consisting

of alphanumeric characters (Example: "mail").

[Login Information]

Select [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by the

LDAP server.

[Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the System Manager ID.

[Use (Security Authentication)]

Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the

authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be

synchronized with that of the LDAP server.

[Use System Manager ID]

If [Use] is selected in [Login Information], this species whether authentication using the system manager ID is

used. To use the system manager ID, select the check box and specify the user name and password used for

authentication. If you deselect the check box, logins are anonymous (no user name).

[User Name]

Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server in the form "(domain name)\(user

name)" (example: domain1\user1).

[Set/Change Password]

To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password]

text box.

[Domain Name]

When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter alphanumeric characters for the

directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).

[Conrm TLS Certicate for LDAP Server Access]

Select the check box to verify the certicate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS.

Also, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] check box as necessary.

6Click [OK].

LINKS

Conguring SNTP(P. 74)

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

LDAP Server Authentication(P. 375)

Setting Up

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP

6FR9-017

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a

network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced

SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.

You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your

network environment and the purpose of use.

SNMPv1

SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this

information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to

ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.

SNMPv3

With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.

Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Conguring the Key and

Certicate for TLS(P. 391) ).

●The machine does not support the trap notication feature of SNMP.

●To change the port number of SNMP, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 388) .

●SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,

monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction

manuals for your management software.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].

4Click [Edit].

Setting Up

5Specify SNMPv1 settings.

●If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.

[Use SNMPv1]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]

Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear

the check box.

[Community Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.

[MIB Access Permission]

For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Use Dedicated Community]

Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software,

such as iW Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access

Permission]. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.

6Specify SNMPv3 settings.

●If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.

Setting Up

[Use SNMPv3]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Enable User]

Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,

clear the corresponding check box.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[MIB Access Permission]

Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Security Settings]

Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/

Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.

[Authentication Algorithm]

If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] in [Security

Settings], select the appropriate authentication algorithm for your network environment.

[Encryption Algorithm]

If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate

encryption algorithm for your network environment.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in

the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password

in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.

7Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.

Setting Up

●With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be

monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.

[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]

Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.

To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.

8Click [OK].

9Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Disabling SNMPv1

●If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine

information via the printer driver.

Using the operation panel

●You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Menu>. <SNMP Settings>(P. 482)

Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3

●If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to

[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in

SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features

that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

Setting Up

Other Network Settings

6FR9-018

Congure the following items according to your network environment.

Conguring FTP PASV Mode(P. 74)

Conguring SNTP(P. 74)

Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 75)

Conguring FTP PASV Mode

PASV is an FTP communication mode used for le transfer. To connect to an FTP server through a rewall, you must

use PASV mode. First check that the PASV mode is set on the FTP server.

●Whether PASV mode is used for FTP depends on your network environment and the settings on the FTP

server to which data is being sent. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.

<OK> Restart the machine

Conguring SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.

If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specied intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be

maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before

conguring SNTP ( Setting the Date/Time(P. 13) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.

●The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [SNTP Settings].

4Click [Edit].

Setting Up

5Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use SNTP]

Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.

[NTP Server Name]

Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host

name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).

[Polling Interval]

Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.

6Click [OK].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server

●You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network

Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been established, the result is

displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock.

Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems

You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing

device management software, such as iW Management Console*, into the network. Information such as device

settings and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a

network, iW Management Console searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location

Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine, such as power supply status information. SLP settings can be

specied via the Remote UI. This section also describes the procedure to congure settings for communication

between the machine and plug-ins for iW Management Console.

Setting Up

*For more information about iW Management Console, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

To use iW Management Console plug-ins

●You need to enable the settings of the dedicated port and the SNMP settings. As for the SNMP settings, set

[MIB Access Permission] to [Read/Write] for both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3.

<Use Dedicated Port>(P. 483)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 70)

Remote UI Operations

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

◼Conguring SLP Communication with Device Management Software

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Click [Network Settings].

4Specify SLP settings.

Specifying multicast device discovery

1Select [Multicast Discovery Settings] [Edit].

2Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.

[Respond to Discovery]

Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery

packets and enable monitoring by device management software.

●To change the port number for multicast discovery, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 388) .

Setting Up

[Scope Name]

To include the machine into a specic scope, enter alphanumeric characters for the scope name.

3Click [OK].

Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine

1Select [Sleep Mode Notication Settings] [Edit].

2Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.

[Notify]

Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When

[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode

and reduce the total power consumption.

[Port Number]

Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.

[Number of Routers to Traverse]

Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass through.

[Notication Interval]

Specify how often the machine noties a device management software of its power status.

3Click [OK].

5Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

◼Conguring Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins

You can specify the settings to enable communication between the machine and iW Management Console plug-ins.

Use of plug-ins allows you to manage the machine's settings from iW Management Console.

Setting Up

Installing Drivers

6FR9-019

Install the various drivers and associated software on your computer.

1Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.

●Install the optional devices on the main unit in advance. Optional Equipment(P. 672)

●If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the

computer.

●You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

●When new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.

You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.

●Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.

●Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported

status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.

2Proceed with the installation.

●For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are

going to use.

●Installation of drivers is impossible if sending and receiving of the IP address are not permitted in [Firewall

Settings]. For more information, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 382) .

●If sending and receiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by

[Firewall Settings], it is no longer possible to perform printing or send faxes from that computer.

Setting Up

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions

6FR9-01A

1660-01J

Follow steps 1 to 4 described below to congure the fax settings. First, determine which receive mode best suits your

intended use, and then follow the on-screen instructions to congure the settings. For more information about a

particular step, click on the link to go to the corresponding section.

Step 1 Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use(P. 80)

Step 2 Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 81)

Step 3 Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 82)

Step 4 Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)

Setting Up

Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use

6FR9-01C

Before conguring the fax settings, determine which receive mode best suits your intended use.

Intended use Receive mode

Use fax only/Never use telephone <Auto>

This setting is for when you want to use the machine exclusively for receiving faxes,

and you do not want to use the telephone or optional handset.

Mostly use telephone/Almost never use fax <Manual>

Connect your telephone or handset to the machine. This setting is for when you

mostly want to use the telephone. You can receive incoming faxes manually.

Use both fax and telephone Use answering machine <Answering Machine>

Connect your answering machine. Callers can

record a message if they call while you are away

from the telephone. The machine automatically

receives incoming faxes.

Use standard telephone or

handset

Connect your telephone or handset. The machine

automatically receives incoming faxes, and the

telephone rings for incoming calls.

●Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes

properly.

●You may be able to manually set receive modes other than those described above, depending on your

country or region.

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

»Continue to Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 81)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Setting Up

Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name

6FR9-01E

the machine.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Fax Setup Guide>.

3Select <Set Up Now>.

4Select <Next>.

5Enter the fax number, and select <Apply>.

6Select <Next>.

7Enter the unit name (such as a user name or company name), and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

➠When the unit name has been registered, the RX mode setting screen is displayed.

»Continue to Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 82)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Setting Up

Selecting the Receive Mode

6FR9-01F

Select the receive mode that suits your intended use beforehand ( Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to

Use(P. 80) ).

1Select <Next>.

2Select the receive mode.

●Select <Yes> or <No> to select the receive mode for the operations you intend to carry out.

●You may be able to manually set receive modes other than those described below, depending on your

country or region. Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

To set the receive mode to <Auto>

Select <No>.

To set the receive mode to <Answering Machine>

Select <Yes> <Yes>.

To set the receive mode to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>

Select <Yes> <No> <Yes>.

To set the receive mode to <Manual>

Select <Yes> <No> <No>.

3Select <Apply>.

➠When the RX mode has been set, the telephone line connection method is displayed.

»Continue to Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Setting Up

Connecting the Telephone Line

6FR9-01H

1660-01S

Connect the telephone line to the machine.

1Connect the telephone line to the machine.

●Connect the included telephone cable to the telephone line jack on the machine ( ) and the telephone line

jack on the wall.

●If you are using a telephone or answering machine, connect it to the external telephone jack ( ).

●If you are using an optional handset, connect it to the handset jack ( ).

●If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set up the telephone to receive faxes

manually.

2Select <End> after the telephone line has been connected.

3Select <Yes>.

If the machine does not automatically set the type of telephone line

Follow the procedure below to set the type of telephone line. If you are not sure of the type of phone line you

are using, contact your local telephone company. <Select Line Type> may not be available depending on the

country where you are using the machine.

Select the type of telephone line

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Setting Up

Conguring Scan Settings

6FR9-01J

To send scanned originals directly by e-mail or I-Fax or save them to shared folders or FTP server, you need to

congure the network. The Send Function Setting Tool, an application that is included with the machine, will assist you

with the required setup. Set the necessary conguration depending on your purpose and network environment.

Saving to a Computer

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 85)

Scanning to E-mail or I-Fax

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)

Scanning to Shared Folders

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 94)

Saving to FTP Server

Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location(P. 98)

LINKS

System Environment(P. 668)

Scan Function(P. 663)

Setting Up

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner

6FR9-01K

To use this machine with a computer, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to

the computer. To connect this machine in Windows via a network, you need to register this machine in "MF Network

Scanner Selector". When the machine and your computer are connected via USB, you only need to install the software

(step 1 below).

●The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer are connected in an IPv6 environment.

Use IPv4 or a USB connection.

1Install the scanner driver and software. Installing Drivers(P. 78)

2Click in the system tray.

3Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].

Setting Up

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive

I-Fax

6FR9-01L

Before conguring the machine for scanning to e-mail, check the setup ow shown below.

Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 18)

Make sure that you have the following information:

●The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

●An e-mail address to be registered as a destination.

●Information about the e-mail server, including the SMTP server name, port

numbers, whether authentication is required, and the user name and password

for authentication.

●For more information about the e-mail server settings, contact your Internet

service provider or Network Administrator.

Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send

Function Setting Tool (sending e-mail).

●System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool System

Environment(P. 668)

●Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 425)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 426)

Set the machine conguration.

●Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 87)

●Conguring I-Fax Receiving Settings Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax

Communication Settings(P. 90)

●Conguring Detailed E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings (Authentication,

Encryption, etc.) Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings(P. 90)

Setting Up

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings

6FR9-01R

This section describes how to congure the e-mail settings by using the Send Function Setting Tool. With the Send

Function Setting Tool, you can also register e-mail addresses to the Address Book.

●The Send Function Setting Tool helps you congure the basic settings for sending e-mails. Instead of the

Send Function Setting Tool, you can use the Remote UI to congure more detailed settings such as the

settings for POP authentication before sending or for encrypted communication. Conguring E-Mail/I-

Fax Communication Settings(P. 90)

1Start the Send Function Setting Tool.

Using a Web browser

Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,

and press the [ENTER] key.

Using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM

1Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.

●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.

2Click [Start Software Programs].

●If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software

Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 684) .

●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].

3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].

4Click [Next].

●If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].

●If the screen that cancels the Windows rewall is displayed, click [Yes].

5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].

Setting Up

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]

●Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the

machine, and then click [OK].

6Conrm the settings and click [OK].

2Click [Start].

●If the login screen is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then

click [Logon].

3Click [Send to E-mail Settings].

●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,

and click [OK]. Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

4Specify the required settings.

[Registration]

[Favorites Number]

Setting Up

With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register an e-mail address into <Favorites> in the Address

Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.

[Name for Favorites Number]

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to

nd later in the Address Book.

[Send Destination Settings]

[Destination E-mail Address]

Enter the e-mail address that you want to send your scanned originals to.

[SMTP Server Settings]

[SMTP Server]

Enter the SMTP server name.

[SMTP Authentication]

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the authentication settings of the SMTP server. When

[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [User Name] text box and password in the [Password] text

box.

Authentication methods for sending e-mails

●To prevent e-mail transmissions by unauthorized users, the machine supports SMTP authentication (SMTP

AUTH) and POP before SMTP. For more information about the required authentication method, contact

your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●POP before SMTP authentication can only be congured by using the Remote UI. Conguring E-Mail/I-

Fax Communication Settings(P. 90)

5Click [Next].

6Conrm the settings and click [Register].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Additional settings may be required depending on the network you are using. For more information, contact

your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●To enable TLS for e-mailing, see Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings(P. 90) .

●To change port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 388) .

LINKS

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)

Specifying E-Mail Settings(P. 320)

Registering Destinations(P. 179)

Setting Up

Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings

6FR9-01S

Use the Remote UI to congure the detailed send and receive settings, such as the settings for using the machine to

send and receive I-Faxes and the settings for POP authentication and encryption of communication before you send e-

mail or I-Faxes. Contact your provider or network administrator for the required settings.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [TX Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Specify the required settings.

[SMTP Server]

Enter alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name (or IP address) for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.

[E-Mail Address]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the e-mail address that you want to use for the machine.

[POP Server]

Enter alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name or IP address for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specied e-mail account when a POP3 server is used.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password when a POP3 server is used, select the check box and enter alphanumeric

characters in [Password].

Setting Up

Specify the settings required for I-Fax reception

[POP RX]

Select the check box to receive I-Faxes.

[POP Interval]

This sets the interval (in minutes) used for automatically connecting to the POP3 server. If there are any I-Fax

documents on the server, they are automatically received and printed.

To disable automatic reception

●Set [POP Interval] to [0]. When [0] is set, you receive I-Faxes manually. Receiving I-Faxes

Manually(P. 258)

Conguring Pop Authentication before Sending

POP before SMTP authentication prevents unauthorized users from using e-mail and I-Faxes by performing

user authentication on the POP3 server.

[Use POP Authentication Before Sending]

To use the POP3 server for authentication before you send e-mail or I-Faxes, select the check box.

[Use APOP Authentication]

Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.

Conguring SMTP authentication

If you congure SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH), user identication by user name and password is

performed at the time of sending e-mail or I-Fax.

Setting Up

[Use SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)]

To enable authentication on the SMTP server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the

[User Name] text box.

[Set/Change Password]

To specify or change the password, enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.

Conguring encrypted communication

You can congure encryption of communication with an SMTP or POP3 server.

[Use TLS for SMTP]

Select the check box to use TLS for encrypting communication with the SMTP server. Select the check box for

[Verify Certicate] or [Add CN to Verication Items] depending on your needs.

[Use TLS for POP]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the [Verify Certicate]

and [Add CN to Verication Items] check boxes as required.

6Click [OK].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

●Depending on the network you are using, you may need to change the SMTP or POP3 port setting (

Changing Port Numbers(P. 388) ). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network

Administrator.

Setting Up

LINKS

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 87)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)(P. 250)

Setting Up

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save

Location

6FR9-01U

Before conguring the machine for scanning to shared folders, check the setup ow shown below.

Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 18)

Make sure that you have the following information:

●The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

●The name of the computer where the shared folder is located. Checking the

Computer Name(P. 686)

●Path to and the name of the shared folder (If access restrictions are set to the

folder, the user name and password information is also needed).

●For instructions on how to create a new shared folder, see "Send Setting Guide."

Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send

Function Setting Tool.

●System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool System

Environment(P. 668)

●Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 425)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 426)

Set the machine conguration. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save

Location(P. 95)

Setting Up

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location

6FR9-01W

The feature of scanning to shared folders is also called "Scan to SMB" because the feature uses Server Message Block

(SMB), a Windows-specic technology. SMB is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and printers, with more

than one device in a network ( Conguring SMB(P. 61) ). To congure the machine for saving your scanned

documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB, specify the location of the shared folder from a computer in

advance. This section describes how to specify the save location by using the Send Function Setting Tool.

●You can also use the Remote UI to specify the location of the shared folder as save destination by registering

the folder to the Address Book. Registering Destinations in the Address Book from Remote UI.

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

1Start the Send Function Setting Tool.

Using a Web browser

Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,

and press the [ENTER] key.

Using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM

1Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.

●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.

2Click [Start Software Programs].

●If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software

Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 684) .

●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].

3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].

4Click [Next].

●If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].

●If the screen that cancels the Windows rewall is displayed, click [Yes].

5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].

Setting Up

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]

●Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the

machine, and then click [OK].

6Conrm the settings and click [OK].

2Click [Start].

●If the login screen is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then

click [Logon].

3Click [Store to Shared Folder Settings].

●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,

and click [OK]. Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

4Specify the required settings.

[Registration]

Setting Up

[Favorites Number]

With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register a shared folder for saving scanned documents

into <Favorites> in the Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.

[Name for Favorites Number]

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to

nd later in the Address Book.

[Store Destination Settings]

[Protocol]

The protocol that is used for sending scanned documents to a shared folder is displayed.

[Computer Name of Store Destination]

Enter the name or the IP address of the computer where the shared folder is located.

[Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer]

Enter the name of (or path to) the shared folder. For example, if the shared folder is a subfolder named

"share" and is contained in the [Public] folder in drive C (path: C:\users\public\share), enter

"users\public\share."

[Status of Settings for Shared Folder]

[Access Restriction to Shared Folder]

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the access restrictions set to the shared folder. When

[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [Registered User Name] text box and password in the

[Password to Access] text box.

5Click [Next].

6Conrm the settings and click [Register].

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

LINKS

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 94)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Setting Up

Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location

6FR9-01X

Before conguring the machine for scanning to FTP Server, check the setup ow shown below.

Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 18)

Make sure that you have the following information:

●The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

●FTP server name.

●Path to the FTP server and folder name.

●User name, password (only if set).

●If the path, folder name, user name, password, etc. for the FTP server are

unknown, contact you Network Administrator.

●To change the FTP port number. Changing Port Numbers(P. 388)

Check whether you need to use PASV mode.

●If a rewall is installed between the machine and the FTP server, you must set

PASV mode. Conguring FTP PASV Mode(P. 74)

●Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 425)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 426)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

Setting Up

Basic Operations

Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................ 101

Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................. 105

Front Side ..................................................................................................................................................... 106

Back Side ...................................................................................................................................................... 108

Interior ......................................................................................................................................................... 109

Feeder .......................................................................................................................................................... 110

Multi-Purpose Tray ....................................................................................................................................... 111

Paper Drawer ............................................................................................................................................... 112

Operation Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 113

Turning ON the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 115

Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................. 116

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation .................................................................................... 117

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ................................................................................................................ 118

Restarting the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 120

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................... 122

Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 123

Home Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 124

<Status Monitor> Screen ........................................................................................................................ 127

Message Display .................................................................................................................................... 129

Basic Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 130

Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................ 133

Logging in to the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 135

Placing Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 137

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 141

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .............................................................................................................. 143

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 149

Loading Envelopes ....................................................................................................................................... 152

Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................ 154

Specifying Paper Size and Type .................................................................................................................... 156

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................. 157

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ..................................................................... 159

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................. 161

Registering a Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 163

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ........................................................................................................ 165

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................... 166

Basic Operations

Customizing the Display ................................................................................................................................... 167

Customizing the Home Screen ..................................................................................................................... 168

Registering Frequently Used Settings ........................................................................................................... 171

Changing the Default Settings for Functions .................................................................................................. 173

Setting Sounds ................................................................................................................................................... 175

Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 177

Registering Destinations .................................................................................................................................. 179

Registering Destinations in the Address Book .............................................................................................. 181

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group ........................................................................................ 184

Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book ...................................................................... 186

Using a USB Memory Device ............................................................................................................................. 187

Basic Operations

100

Basic Operations

6FR9-01Y

This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are

frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.

◼Parts and Their Functions

This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys

on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 105)

◼Turning ON the Machine

This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF. Turning ON the Machine(P. 115)

◼Using the Operation Panel

This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes

how to enter characters and numbers. Using the Operation Panel(P. 122)

◼Logging in to the Machine

This section describes how to log in when a login screen is displayed. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

Basic Operations

101

◼Placing Originals

This section describes how to place originals on the platen glass and in the feeder. Placing Originals(P. 137)

◼Loading Paper

This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 141)

◼Customizing the Display

This section describes how to rearrange buttons or create shortcut buttons in order to make it easier to use screens

shown in the display. Customizing the Display(P. 167)

◼Changing the Default Settings for Functions

This section describes how to change the setting that is displayed initially when a function is selected. Changing the

Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

Basic Operations

102

◼Setting Sounds

This section describes how to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when fax sending

is complete or when an error occurs. Setting Sounds(P. 175)

◼Entering Sleep Mode

This section describes how to set the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 177)

◼Registering Destinations

This section describes how to register destinations for sending faxes or scanned documents. Registering

Destinations(P. 179)

◼Using a USB Memory Device

This section describes about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device.

Using a USB Memory Device(P. 187)

Basic Operations

103

Basic Operations

104

Parts and Their Functions

6FR9-020

This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In

addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the

toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on

how to use the machine properly.

Front Side(P. 106)

Back Side(P. 108)

Interior(P. 109)

Feeder(P. 110)

Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 111)

Paper Drawer(P. 112)

Operation Panel(P. 113)

Basic Operations

105

Front Side

6FR9-021

Feeder

Automatically feeds originals into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets of original are loaded

in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously. Feeder(P. 110)

USB port (for USB device connection)

Use this port to connect a third-party USB memory device or USB keyboard. Connecting a USB memory

device allows you to print data from the memory device or store scanned originals on the memory device.

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 272)

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server(P. 293)

Paper stopper

Open the paper stopper when you want to prevent paper from falling out of the output tray.

Speaker

Emits sounds produced by the machine, such as fax tones and warning tones.

Basic Operations

106

Lift handles

Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. When relocating the machine, do not attempt to move it

yourself. Instead, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Operation panel

The operation panel consists of keys such as Home key, Stop key, a display, and status indicators. You can

perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.

Operation Panel(P. 113)

Basic Screens(P. 123)

Output tray

Printed paper is output to the output tray.

Power switch

Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and

turn it back ON.

Front cover

Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 614)

Paper drawer

Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper

Drawer(P. 143)

Multi-purpose tray

Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from

that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)

Platen glass

When scanning books, originals of heavy or thin paper and other originals that cannot be scanned using the

feeder, place them on the platen glass. Placing Originals(P. 137)

Ventilation slots

Air inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in front

of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.

Basic Operations

107

Back Side

6FR9-022

Rear cover

Open the rear cover when clearing paper jams. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

Rating label

The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.

Power socket

Connect the power cord.

USB port (for USB device connection)

Use this port to connect devices such as a third-party USB keyboard.

USB port (for computer connection)

Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.

LAN port

Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. Connecting to a Wired

LAN(P. 18)

Handset jack

Connect an optional handset.

External telephone jack

Connect your telephone or answering machine. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)

Telephone line jack

Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line. Connecting the Telephone

Line(P. 83)

Basic Operations

108

Interior

6FR9-023

Toner cartridge tray

Install the toner cartridges. Load the Y (yellow), M (magenta), C (cyan), and K (black) toner cartridges in the

slots from the rear to the front respectively. Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 614)

LINKS

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 612)

Basic Operations

109

Feeder

6FR9-024

Feeder cover

Open when clearing paper jams. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual

website.

Slide guides

Adjust these guides to match the width of original.

Original supply tray

Automatically feeds originals into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets of original are loaded

in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously. Placing Originals(P. 137)

Original output tray

Scanned originals are output here.

Document feed scanning area

Originals loaded in the feeder are automatically fed to the scanning area to be scanned.

●Do not place any objects in the original output area. Doing so may cause damage to the originals.

●Regularly clean the feeder and platen glass in order to obtain proper print results. Regular

Cleaning(P. 603)

Basic Operations

110

Multi-Purpose Tray

6FR9-025

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine. Press the lock release lever that is indicated with an arrow in the illustration to release the lock and

slide the paper guides.

Paper tray

Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)

Basic Operations

111

Paper Drawer

6FR9-026

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine. Press the lock release levers that are indicated with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks

and slide the paper guides.

Lock release lever (for extending the paper drawer)

When loading Legal size paper, the paper drawer needs to be extended. Press this lever to release the lock

and extend the length of the paper drawer.

When loading Legal size paper

●When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143)

Basic Operations

112

Operation Panel

6FR9-027

●The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted. Adjust it to an angle that is most comfortable for

viewing the panel. Adjusting the Angle(P. 114)

Display

You can view the progress of the machine and error statuses. The display is also a touch panel, so you can

specify settings by touching the screen directly.

Basic Screens(P. 123)

Basic Operation(P. 130)

Sound Volume key

Press to adjust volume. Setting Sounds(P. 175)

Energy Saver key

Press to put the machine into the sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in the sleep

mode. Press the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 177)

Data indicator

Blinks while an operation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there

are documents waiting to be processed.

Error indicator

Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.

Home key

Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as copy and

scan.

Home Screen(P. 124)

Basic Operations

113

Customizing the Home Screen(P. 168)

Stop key

Press to cancel printing and other operations.

NFC (Near Field Communication) mark (C1127iF)

You can also use functions such as printing by waving a mobile device with Canon PRINT Business installed

over this mark. Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 334)

Adjusting the Angle

When it is dicult to view the touch panel display, adjust the angle of the operation panel.

LINKS

Basic Operation(P. 130)

Basic Operations

114

Turning ON the Machine

6FR9-028

This section describes how to turn ON the machine.

1Make sure that the power plug is rmly inserted into a power outlet.

2Press the power switch.

➠The Start screen appears. Operation Panel(P. 113)

●You can select the screen that is displayed rst after the machine is turned ON. <Default Screen After

Startup/Restoration>(P. 462)

LINKS

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 116)

Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Basic Operations

115

Turning OFF the Machine

6FR9-029

This section describes how to turn OFF the machine.

1Press the power switch.

●It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the

display turns off.

●To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.

●You can also turn OFF the machine from a computer. Turning OFF the Machine by Remote

Operation(P. 117)

●You can specify the time for each day of the week and congure a setting to automatically turn OFF the

machine. Powering OFF at a Fixed Time(P. 118)

Basic Operations

116

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation

6FR9-02A

You can turn OFF the machine from a computer on the same network without going to where the machine is installed.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Device Management] [Remote Shutdown].

4Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click

[Execute].

5Click [OK].

Restarting the machine by remote operation

●You can restart the machine by clicking [Restart Device] on the [Settings/Registration] screen of the Remote

UI. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Basic Operations

117

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time

6FR9-02C

You can make a setting so that the power is automatically tuned OFF at a specied time on each day of the week. This

allows you to avoid useless power consumption that may occur due to failure to turn OFF the power. By default, this

function is disabled.

●For information about the basic operation to set up the machine from Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu

Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Timer Settings] [Edit].

4Select the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer], and set the time to turn

OFF the power.

[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]

Selecting the check box allows you to set the time to turn OFF the power on each day of the week.

Basic Operations

118

[Sunday] to [Saturday]

Enter the desired time to turn OFF the power. For any day of the week, leaving the time eld blank means

that the auto shutdown function is disabled for that day.

5Click [OK].

If the power is not turned OFF automatically at the specied time*

●When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking

●When the menu screen or Check Counter screen is displayed

●When settings data is being imported/exported

●When the rmware is being updated

*If the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specied time, a retry will be performed up to ten times at intervals

of one minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be impossible for that day.

Basic Operations

119

Restarting the Machine

6FR9-02E

Depending on the setting items that have been changed, you may need to make the changes effective by restarting

the machine. This section describes how to restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine by an Operation on the Main Unit(P. 120)

Restarting the Machine by Remote Operation(P. 120)

Restarting the Machine by an Operation on the Main Unit

1Press the power switch.

●It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down.

➠When the machine shuts down, the display or Energy Saver key of the operation panel turns off.

2Wait at least 10 seconds after the shutdown, then press the power switch again.

➠The machine starts.

Restarting the Machine by Remote Operation

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Click [Restart Device] in the menu on the left side of the screen.

Basic Operations

120

4Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click

[Execute].

5Click [OK].

➠A restart process begins. Communication remains disconnected until the main unit has restarted.

Basic Operations

121

Using the Operation Panel

6FR9-02F

You can use the display and keys of the operation panel to congure machine settings or operate functions. This

section describes basic usage of the display and keys.

Basic Screens(P. 123)

Basic Operation(P. 130)

Entering Text(P. 133)

●If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display: <Invert Screen Colors>(P. 489)

●If you want to adjust the brightness of the display: <Brightness>(P. 489)

LINKS

Operation Panel(P. 113)

Basic Operations

122

Basic Screens

6FR9-02H

The Home screen or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as copy and scan.

You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's operation status. The

screen is also a touch panel, so you can perform operations by touching the screen directly.

Home Screen(P. 124)

<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 127)

Message Display(P. 129)

●You can customize the Home screen by rearranging frequently used buttons for easier access to the

respective functions. Customizing the Display(P. 167)

To Know How to Operate

●On some screens, the <?> button allows you to view the descriptions of functions or how to operate.

Basic Operations

123

Home Screen

6FR9-02J

The Home screen is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing on the operation panel. Use this screen

to specify settings for and register functions.

Change page

Use this to view another page in the Home screen. You can also

ick sideways to change pages.

Displays the total volume of printouts. Viewing the Counter

Value(P. 629)

Use this button to log out from the machine.

Press to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or

to view the network settings such as the IP address of the

machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as

the remaining amount of paper and the amount remaining in

the toner cartridges, or whether any errors that occurred.

<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 127)

Wi-Fi icon

Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

User name/ID

The name or ID of the logged in user is displayed.

<Copy>

Use this button to start copying. Copying(P. 190)

<Fax>

Use this button to send a fax from the machine.

Faxing(P. 214)

<Scan>

Scans an original and converts it into an electronic le. You can

save scanned les on your computer or send them via e-mail.

Scanning(P. 281)

Basic Operations

124

Prints les stored in a USB memory device. Printing from a

USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 272)

Use this function to print a secure document. Printing a

Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 268)

<Menu>

<Function Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other machine

settings start from this button. Setting Menu List(P. 460)

Use this to register or edit the destinations for e-mails and

faxes. You can also display a registered destination when

sending an e-mail or fax. Registering Destinations(P. 179)

Displays a description of Application Library.

This button is used for specifying the size and type of paper

loaded in the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 156)

Use this to establish a connection to a mobile device.

Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 334)

Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons are

displayed in. Customizing the Home Screen(P. 168)

Allows you to update the rmware via the Internet. Updating

the Firmware(P. 455)

Use this function to copy the front and back sides of a driver's

license or other card onto the same side of one sheet of paper.

Making ID Card Copies(P. 210)

Allows you to copy multiple passports onto one sheet.

Making Passport Copies(P. 211)

Basic Operations

125

Press to view operation guidance and error causes/solutions.

Application Library button

You can use these buttons to perform convenient functions by a

one-touch operation. For more information, see the manual for

Application Library on the online manual website.

You can check the usage status of the device and the user by

linking to cloud service. For more information, see the Canon

website.

Shortcut buttons

Display "Favorite Settings" that are registered to Copy, Fax, and

Scan. Adding Buttons to the Home Screen(P. 168)

LINKS

Customizing the Home Screen(P. 168)

Basic Operations

126

<Status Monitor> Screen

6FR9-02K

When you select <Status Monitor>, a screen appears in which you can check the progress of documents as well as the

status of the machine and network setting information.

Displays the details of any errors that occurred. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

Displays the status of the machine.

Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.

Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of

their lifetime before the toner runs out.

Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data. Printing a

Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 268)

Displays rmware version information.

Displays the serial number of the machine.

Basic Operations

127

Status and logs of copied, printed, and sent/received documents

Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Copy/Print Job> screen is shown below as an example.

Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of

wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

IP Address

Displays the IPv4 address of the machine.

●You can specify whether to display the IP address on the <Status Monitor> screen by setting <Display IP

Address>. <Display IP Address>(P. 466)

<Rmv. Mem. Media>

Used to safely remove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is connected

to the machine. Remove the USB Memory Device(P. 187)

Basic Operations

128

Message Display

6FR9-02L

Messages are displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner

cartridge lifetime is reached. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

When an Error Occurs

In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-

screen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an

example.

Basic Operations

129

Basic Operation

6FR9-02R

The display is a touch panel, allowing you to operate directly on the screen.

Avoid the following actions.

●The display may malfunction or be damaged.

-Pressing forcefully

- Pressing with pointed objects (ngernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)

- Operating with wet/soiled hands

- Operating the display while an object is placed on it

●Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective lm from the display.

Tap

Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or nalizing items.

Flick

Flick with the nger on the display. The effect of icking varies depending on the screen. For instance, icking in

the Home screen moves you one page in the direction of the ick.

◼Selecting Items

Tap an item name or button to make a selection.

Basic Operations

130

If an item is mistakenly touched

●Slide your nger away then release it from the screen to cancel the selection.

To return to the previous screen

●Tap to return to the previous screen.

◼Scrolling the Screen

The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed. If the scroll bar is displayed,

ick the screen to scroll in the direction of the ick. Note that the scroll bar only appears while the screen is being

touched.

◼Changing the Setting Value

Tap <+>/<-> to adjust the setting on the scale. You can also adjust a setting by icking the slider left or right.

Basic Operations

131

●You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language: <Display

Settings>(P. 462)

●You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied

length of time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 470)

●You can change various settings about the operability such as screen brightness: <Accessibility>(P. 489)

Basic Operations

132

Entering Text

6FR9-02S

20FY-02R

When entering text or a number, use the keyboard displayed on the screen. The numeric keys are displayed on the

screen to enter only numbers.

Switching the Type of Character

Tap <a> or <1/#> to switch the type of character that is entered.

●To enter upper case characters, tap .

Deleting Text

One character is deleted each time is tapped. Holding down allows you to delete successive

characters.

Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)

Tap or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap .

When the Numeric Keys are Displayed

When you are supposed to enter only a numeric value, the numeric keys are displayed on the screen. Tap

numeric keys to enter the numeric value.

Value range

●The values in ( ) displayed the entry box are the enterable value range.

Basic Operations

133

When buttons other than the numeric keys are displayed

●When <+>/<-> or / are displayed, you can tap the buttons to increase or decrease the numeric

value or move the cursor.

Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard

You can connect a keyboard to the USB port for USB devices on the Front Side(P. 106) or Back Side(P. 108) and

enter text from the keyboard. Even while the keyboard is connected, you can enter text from the operation panel.

●Some keys on the USB keyboard, such as the [Backspace], [Home] and [End] keys, cannot be used. When

keys that cannot be used are pressed, nothing is entered or changed.

●To delete text, press the [Delete] key.

●Pressing the [RETURN/ENTER] key completes text entry in the same way as selecting <Apply>.

●You can specify the type of keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout). <English Keyboard Layout>(P. 467)

●You can disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine at any time. No special operation is required to

disconnect it.

●Depending on the display language, you may not be able to enter some characters correctly.

●The USB keyboard may not operate correctly depending on its type.

Basic Operations

134

Logging in to the Machine

6FR9-02U

If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs are enabled, you must log in before using the

machine. You also need to log in if use of the fax and scan functions is restricted.

Department ID Management Login(P. 135)

Logging in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

Department ID Management Login

When the login screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.

●When <Insert the card.> is displayed, see Copy Card Reader-F(P. 672) .

1Enter the ID.

1Select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.

2Enter the ID.

●If no PIN is registered, proceed to step 3.

2Enter the PIN.

1Select <PIN>.

2Enter the PIN.

3Select <Log In>.

➠The login screen will be changed to the Home screen.

●After you nish using the machine, select <Log Out> to display the login screen.

Logging in to Authorized Send

If the Send function authorization setting ( LDAP Server Authentication(P. 375) ) is enabled, the Authorized Send

Basic Operations

135

1Enter your user name.

1Select <User Name>.

2Enter your user name.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

2Enter the password.

1Select <Password>.

2Enter the password.

3Select <Server Name>, and select the server for your authentication.

●Select the LDAP server where your user name and password are registered.

4Select <Log In>.

➠The login screen switches to the fax or scan function Home screen.

●After you nish using the machine, select <Log Out> to display the login screen.

If the <Select Logout Type> screen appears

●If you are logged in to both Authorized Send and Department ID Management, a dialog box appears in

which you can select the items you want to log out of. In the case where you want to log out of Authorized

Send (fax or scan function) while remaining logged in to Department ID Management, select <Log Out

from Authenticated Sending>. In any other cases, select <Log Out from All Authenticated Functions>.

LINKS

Setting the Department ID Management(P. 367)

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 365)

Basic Operations

136

Placing Originals

6FR9-02W

Place originals on the platen glass or in the feeder. Use the platen glass when scanning thick or bound documents

such as books. You can load two or more sheets of originals in the feeder so that they can be scanned continuously.

For information on loadable sizes, etc., see Main Unit(P. 653) or Feeder(P. 656) .

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass(P. 138)

Placing Originals in the Feeder(P. 138)

Use originals that are completely dry

●When placing originals, make sure that any glue, ink, or correction uid on the originals has completely

dried.

To avoid paper jams

●Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder as this may cause paper jams:

- Wrinkled or creased paper

-Carbon paper

- Curled or rolled paper

- Coated paper

- Torn paper

- Onion skin or thin paper

- Stapled or clipped originals

- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Transparencies

To scan originals more accurately

●Originals placed in the feeder are scanned while being fed into the machine. On the other hand, originals

placed on the platen glass remain in a xed position while they are scanned. To ensure more accurate

scanning results, placing originals on the platen glass is recommended.

To scan tracing paper or transparencies

●To scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), place them on the platen glass.

Basic Operations

137

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass

1Open the feeder.

2Place the original face down on the platen glass.

●Align the corner of the original with the top-left corner of the platen glass.

●To scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white

paper.

3Gently close the feeder.

➠The machine is ready to scan the document.

When scanning is complete

●Remove the original from the platen glass.

Placing Originals in the Feeder

1Open the original supply tray.

Basic Operations

138

2Spread the slide guides apart.

●Slide the slide guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the actual original width.

3Fan the original stack and align the edges.

●Fan the original stack in small batches, and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a at surface a few

times.

4Place the original(s) face up in the feeder.

●Place the original(s) in the landscape orientation.

●Make sure that the original stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ).

●Do not load originals of various sizes at the same time.

●If originals are loaded so that they exceed the load limit line, scanning may stop or a paper jam may occur.

5Align the slide guides against the edges of the original.

●Slide the slide guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the original.

Basic Operations

139

➠The machine is ready to scan the original.

Align the slide guides securely against the edges of the original

●Slide guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jam.

While originals are being scanned

●Do not add or remove originals.

When scanning is complete

●Remove the scanned originals from beneath the feeder to prevent paper jams.

Basic Operations

140

Loading Paper

6FR9-02X

You can load the paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper

drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you

temporarily use a size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Available Paper(P. 657) for

available paper sizes and types.

About Paper

Precautions for Paper(P. 141)

Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 142)

How to Load Paper

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143)

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)

Loading Envelopes(P. 152)

Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 154)

Conguring the Settings for the Loaded Paper

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 156)

Precautions for Paper

Do not use the following types of paper:

●A paper jam or printing error may occur.

- Wrinkled or creased paper

- Curled or rolled paper

- Torn paper

- Damp paper

- Very thin paper

- Thin coarse paper

- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Highly textured paper

- Glossy paper

Notes on use of paper

●Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper

that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in

poor print quality.

Basic Operations

141

Paper handling and storage

●It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused

should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a at surface.

●Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.

●Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.

●Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.

●Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes

in temperature or humidity.

When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture

●Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.

There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing

toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room

temperatures).

Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine

When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.

◼How to Store the Printed Paper

●Store on a at surface.

●Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting

in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.

●Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.

●To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.

●When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have

undergone a change of color.

●Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.

◼Precautions When Applying Adhesive

●Always use insoluble adhesive.

●Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.

●When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.

LINKS

Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 163)

Basic Operations

142

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer

6FR9-02Y

1660-02Y

Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the

paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)

Loading Regular Size Paper(P. 143)

Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 145)

●When using A5 size paper, see Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 145) and load it in the landscape

orientation. When loading paper in the portrait orientation, follow the steps shown in Loading Regular

Size Paper(P. 143) .

Landscape orientation Portrait orientation

●Follow the procedure below when loading paper into the optional cassette feeding module.

Loading Regular Size Paper

To load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For

paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 145) .

1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.

2Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.

●While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guide to align the projection to the appropriate paper

size marking.

Basic Operations

143

When loading Legal size paper

●Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.

3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide

on the front side of the paper drawer.

●Load the paper with the print side face up.

●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.

Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper

●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

Basic Operations

144

●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 154) .

4Insert the paper drawer into the machine.

●When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen

is displayed. <Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 593)

When loading Legal size paper

●When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 157)

When changing the paper size or type

●The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a

different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change

the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

paper drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) ), with the side to

print face up (previously printed side face down).

- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.

<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 493)

- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

Loading Custom Size Paper

To load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use

the following procedure.

Basic Operations

145

1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.

2Spread the paper guides apart.

●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.

When loading longer paper than A4 size

●Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.

3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the rear side of

the paper drawer.

●Load the paper with the print side face up.

●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.

Basic Operations

146

Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper

●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

●When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 154) .

4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the

edges of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

5Insert the paper drawer into the machine.

●When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen

is displayed. <Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 593)

Basic Operations

147

When loading longer paper than A4 size

●When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 157)

When changing the paper size or type

●The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a

different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change

the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

paper drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) ), with the side to

print face up (previously printed side face down).

- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.

<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 493)

-If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

LINKS

Available Paper(P. 657)

Basic Operations

148

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray

6FR9-030

1660-030

When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.

Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143)

Make sure to insert the paper drawer

●The machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the multi-purpose

tray. An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.

When loading A5 size paper

●When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation. Specifying Paper Size and Type in

the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 159)

Landscape orientation Portrait orientation

1Open the cover.

●Hold the both sides of the cover to open it.

2Pull out the paper tray.

Basic Operations

149

3Spread the paper guides apart.

●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.

4Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.

●Load the paper with the print side face up.

●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.

Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper

●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

Basic Operations

150

●When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes(P. 152) or Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 154) .

5Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

●Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 159)

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

paper drawer ( Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143) ) or multi-purpose tray, with the side to print

face up (previously printed side face down).

- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.

<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 493)

-If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

LINKS

Available Paper(P. 657)

Basic Operations

151

Loading Envelopes

6FR9-031

Make sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes

and which side is face up.

Before Loading Envelopes(P. 152)

In the Paper Drawer(P. 153)

In the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 153)

●This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you

need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading

envelopes in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143) or

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) .

Before Loading Envelopes

Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.

1Close the ap of each envelope.

2Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed

tightly.

3Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.

Basic Operations

152

4Align the edges of the envelopes on a at surface.

In the Paper Drawer

Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the long edges on either side), with

the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.

●Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.

In the Multi-Purpose Tray

Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine),

with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.

●Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.

Basic Operations

153

Loading Preprinted Paper

6FR9-032

When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.

Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.

Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 154)

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 154)

●This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a

description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143) or Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) .

Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos

Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos

Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.

Basic Operations

154

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting

●When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you

perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>,

the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be

used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided

printing. <Switch Paper Feed Method>(P. 508)

Basic Operations

155

Specifying Paper Size and Type

6FR9-033

You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper

settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 157)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 159)

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 161)

Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 163)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 165)

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 166)

●If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.

Basic Operations

156

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer

6FR9-034

1Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select the target paper drawer.

●When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

3Select the paper size.

●If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

When loading custom size paper

1Select <Custom>.

2Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

●Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.

●If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with

one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 163)

3Select <Apply>.

When loading A5 size paper

Basic Operations

157

●In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.

Landscape orientation Portrait orientation

4Select the paper type.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 165)

Available Paper(P. 657)

<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 593)

Basic Operations

158

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose

Tray

6FR9-035

The screen shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the on-screen instructions

to specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.

If the screen shown above is not displayed when paper is loaded

●If you always load the same paper in the multi-purpose tray, you can skip the paper setting operations by

registering the paper size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however,

the screen shown above is not displayed. To display the screen, select <Specify When Loading Paper> (

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 161) ).

1Select the paper size.

●If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

When loading custom size paper

1Select <Custom>.

2Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

●Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.

●If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with

one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 163)

Basic Operations

159

3Select <Apply>.

When loading A5 size paper

●In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.

Landscape orientation Portrait orientation

2Select the paper type.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 165)

Available Paper(P. 657)

Basic Operations

160

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-

Purpose Tray

6FR9-036

You can register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray. Registering default settings can save yourself the

effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the multi-purpose tray.

●After the default paper setting is registered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded,

and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper

settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in

step 3, and then load the paper.

1Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select multi-purpose tray.

3Select the paper size.

●If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

Registering a custom paper size

1Select <Custom>.

2Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

●Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.

Basic Operations

161

●If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with

one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 163)

3Select <Apply>.

When loading A5 size paper

●In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.

Landscape orientation Portrait orientation

4Select the paper type.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 165)

Available Paper(P. 657)

Basic Operations

162

Registering a Custom Paper Size

6FR9-037

You can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.

1Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Register Custom Paper>.

3Select the registration number.

Deleting a setting

●Select the registered number, and then select <Delete> <Yes>.

4Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

●Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.

Changing the display name of a registration number

●Select <Name>, enter the display name, and then select <Apply>.

5Select <Apply>.

Setting to the registered custom size

The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above can be called when <Custom> is selected on the

paper size selection screen for the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.

LINKS

Basic Operations

163

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143)

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)

Basic Operations

164

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed

6FR9-038

You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.

1Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.

3Select the paper source you want to limit the paper sizes to be displayed for.

●When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

4Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.

●Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.

●Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting

selection screen.

5Select <Apply>.

LINKS

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 157)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 159)

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 161)

Basic Operations

165

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source

for Each Function

6FR9-039

Enable or disable the automatic paper source selection feature for each paper source. If this feature is set to <On>, the

machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with paper of the appropriate size for each print job. Also,

when the paper in the selected paper source runs out, this feature enables continuous printing by switching from that

paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings>.

3Select <Paper Source Auto Selection>.

4Select the target function.

●When the target function is report/list printing or memory media print, select <Other>.

5For each paper source to which you want to apply the automatic paper source

selection feature, select <On>.

●When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

●Always specify <On> for at least one of the paper drawers. If you select <Off> for all the drawers, then you

cannot nish the setting procedure.

6Select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

166

Customizing the Display

6FR9-03A

In order to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it. In addition, you can work more eciently by

registering your favorite settings to the Basic Features screen for each function.

Customizing the Home Screen

You can rearrange buttons that are displayed in the Home screen. In addition, you can customize the Home

screen to make it easier to select functions by adding shortcut buttons. Customizing the Home

Screen(P. 168)

Registering "Favorite Settings"

To make it possible to quickly call up the same settings for Copy, Fax, and Scan, you can register them as your

favorite settings. You can add registered setting combinations to the Home screen as shortcut buttons.

Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 171)

Basic Operations

167

Customizing the Home Screen

6FR9-03C

You can add/delete shortcut buttons displayed in the Home screen according to your application or a preferred

arrangement. You can also change the order that they are displayed in.

Adding Buttons to the Home Screen(P. 168)

Changing the Arrangement of Buttons(P. 169)

Adding Buttons to the Home Screen

You can add shortcut buttons to the Home screen for frequently used functions such as <Copy>, <Fax>, and <Scan>.

For example, you can carry out tasks more quickly and eciently by assigning a sequence of settings (e.g. "Scan both

sides of an original, save it as a highly compressed PDF le and send it via e-mail") to a single button.

●The settings to be added as a shortcut button must be registered beforehand as Favorite Settings.

Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 171)

1Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

2Select <Select Button to Display>.

3Select the function with the Favorite Settings you want to add as a button.

4Select the check box for all settings to be displayed in the Home screen and select

<Apply>.

Removing registered buttons

Basic Operations

168

●Clear the check box for the name of the button you want to remove and then select <Apply>. Once you

remove a registered button, a space appears where the button was displayed in the Home screen. If

necessary, delete the space.

5Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

➠A button for the newly selected settings is added to the Home screen.

●If the Home screen is full and no more settings can be registered, delete registered buttons and spaces

in <Home Screen Settings>.

Changing the Arrangement of Buttons

To make the buttons easier to use, you can rearrange the buttons however you like. For instance, you can put the most

frequently used functions rst, or arrange the function buttons together with shortcut buttons for Favorite Settings.

You can also insert a blank (space) instead of a button to make it easier to view the Home screen.

1Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

2Select <Set Display Order>.

3Select the button to move.

●The selected button is highlighted. Tap the selected button again to deselect it.

4Select <Move Left> or <Move Right>.

●The button moves as many times as you tapped.

●A long touch on <Move Left> or <Move Right> moves the selected button continuously.

Inserting a blank

●When <Insert Blank> is selected, a blank is inserted on the left side of the selected button.

●If the button at the end is selected, a blank is inserted even if <Move Right> is selected.

Deleting a blank

●Select the blank to be deleted, and select <Del. Blank>.

Basic Operations

169

5Select <Apply>.

LINKS

Basic Operation(P. 130)

Basic Operations

170

Registering Frequently Used Settings

6FR9-03E

If you register your frequently used settings as "favorite settings," you can quickly call up the same settings every time

you make copies, send a fax, or scan. In addition, if you register complicated settings as "favorite settings," you can

quickly call them up for ease of operation. You can also assign registered setting combinations to a shortcut button

displayed in the Home screen. This section describes how to register frequently used settings and how to call them up

when making a copy.

Registering Settings(P. 171)

Recalling Registered Settings(P. 172)

●You can also register a fax or scan destination in the frequently used settings, however, it cannot be

changed once it is registered. To change a registered destination, delete the settings and then register them

again.

Registering Settings

1Select <Copy> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Change the values for the settings you want to register. Basic Copy

Operations(P. 194)

3Select <Other Settings> <Favorite Settings>.

4Select unregistered settings, and select <Register>.

●To change the content of a registered setting, select that setting and select <Edit>.

5Check the details of the settings to be registered, and select <Register>.

●To change the value of a setting to be registered, select the setting.

●To rename the setting, select <Name>. On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

Basic Operations

171

6Select whether to register the settings as a shortcut button.

●If you select <Yes>, a message appears. Check the message and then select <OK>. The registered setting

combination is added to the Home screen as a shortcut button.

●If the Home screen is full and the shortcut button cannot be added, use <Home Screen Settings> to delete

registered buttons or blanks. Customizing the Home Screen(P. 168)

●Registered settings are retained even when the machine is turned OFF.

●If you want to delete a registered setting, select <Copy> <Other Settings> <Favorite Settings> select

the settings, and select <Delete> <Yes>.

Recalling Registered Settings

Simply select the setting combination that suits your purpose from the favorite settings.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Favorite Settings> Select the setting combination to be recalled,

and select <Apply>

●Once you have recalled the setting combination, you can also change the copy settings as needed.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Basic Operations

172

Changing the Default Settings for Functions

6FR9-03F

The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you select

<Reset>. If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate

the need to specify the same settings every time you perform an action.

◼Copy

For information about changeable setting items, see <Change Default Settings (Copy)>(P. 513) .

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Copy> <Change Default Settings (Copy)> Select the setting

Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>

◼FAX

For information about changeable setting items, see <Fax Settings>(P. 565) .

Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>

◼Memory Media Print

For information about changeable setting items, see <Access Stored Files Settings>(P. 580) .

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored

Files Settings> <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)> Select the setting Change

the default value of the selected item <Apply>

◼USB Memory

For information about changeable setting items, see <USB Memory Settings>(P. 579) .

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Scan and Store

Settings> <USB Memory Settings> <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)> Select the

setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>

◼E-Mail

For information about changeable setting items, see <E-Mail Settings>(P. 560) .

Basic Operations

173

<Change Default Settings (E-Mail)> Select the setting Change the default value of the

selected item <Apply>

◼I-Fax

For information about changeable setting items, see <I-Fax Settings>(P. 562) .

<Change Default Settings (I-Fax)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected

item <Apply>

◼Shared Folder/FTP Server

For information about changeable setting items, see <File Settings>(P. 563) .

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <File Settings> <Change

Default Settings (File)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item

<Apply>

●If you select <Initialize> on each setting screen, you can restore the default settings.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 272)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Basic Operations

174

Setting Sounds

6FR9-03H

The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when fax sending is complete or when a paper jam or

error occurs. You can set the volume of each of these sounds individually.

◼Adjusting <Fax Volume>

1Press the ( ) key.

2Adjust the volume, and select <Apply>.

●To mute the sound, move the cursor all the way to the left.

◼Adjusting <Other Volume Set.>

1Press the ( ) key.

●For the model without fax functionality, proceed to step 3.

2Select <Other Volume Set.>.

3Select a setting.

Setting Description Action

<Ring Tone> Sound produced when an incoming fax

is received

Go to step 4.

<TX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax sending is

complete

<RX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax receiving is

complete

<Scanning Done Tone> Sound produced when fax original

scanning is complete

Basic Operations

175

Setting Description Action

<Entry Tone> Conrmation sound each time a key on

the operation panel or button on the

display is pressed

Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off>

(not produce a tone), and then go to

step 5.

<Invalid Entry Tone> Sound produced when an invalid key

operation is performed, such as when

you enter a number outside the valid

setting range

<Restock Supplies Tone> Sound produced when a toner

cartridge is almost empty

<Warning Tone> Sound produced when a paper jam or

other error occurs

<Job Done Tone> Sound produced when an operation

such as copying or scanning is

complete

<Energy Saver Alert> Sound produced when the machine

enters or exits sleep mode

<Original in Feeder Detection Tone> Sound produced when an original is

loaded in the feeder

4Adjust the volume, and select <Apply>.

●To mute the sound, move the cursor all the way to the left.

End sound only for error

In <Sound Only When Error Occurs>, select <On>, and select <Apply>.

5Select <Apply> <Apply>.

Basic Operations

176

Entering Sleep Mode

6FR9-03J

The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the

operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can

save power simply by pressing on the operation panel.

When in sleep mode

●When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up yellow green.

Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode

●When the machine is in operation

●When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking

●When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning

●When a paper jam occurs

●When the receiver of the external telephone or the optional handset is off the hook

●When the machine is set such that the fax incoming ring will not sound

●When the menu screen is displayed

●When a job is waiting to be scanned to a USB memory device or to a computer

●When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes

enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)

●When the machine is communicating with an LDAP server, etc.

●When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed

●When settings are being imported or exported

Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value

Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a

specied length of time. We recommend using the factory default settings ( <Timer/Energy

Settings>(P. 468) ) to reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the

machine enters the auto sleep mode, perform the procedure below.

Basic Operations

177

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of

time that elapses before the machine automatically enters sleep mode <Apply>

Changing the Sleep Mode Setting to the Specied Time

You can congure a setting so that the machine is placed into the sleep mode at the specied time. You can also

congure a setting so that the sleep mode is released at the specied time.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep

Mode Exit Time Settings> Select <On> in <Set This Function>, and enter the time <Apply>

Exiting Sleep Mode

You can press or any other key on the operation panel to exit the sleep mode.

●You can also tap the display to exit sleep mode.

●If an external telephone or the optional handset is connected, the machine exits sleep mode when

you take the receiver off the hook.

Basic Operations

178

Registering Destinations

6FR9-03K

1660-03J

You can register frequently used fax/scan destinations in the Address Book and

easily select them when needed ( Registering Destinations in the Address

Book(P. 181) ). Destinations can be searched alphabetically, from lists in the Address

Book, or by entering three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers). You can also specify

destinations more quickly by using the following features.

◼Favorites

Registering a lot of addresses in the Address Book makes it dicult to nd the destination you need. To avoid this

situation, register frequently used destinations as Favorites. Destinations registered in Favorites can be searched from

the < > in the Address Book.

◼Group Dial

You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. You can

send faxes or e-mails to multiple destinations at the same time. Groups can also be registered in Favorites.

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group(P. 184)

◼Index

The registered destinations are classied into indexes depending on the initial character or the type of address.

Changing indexes allows you to perform a destination search quickly. Tap / or ick the target index sideways to

change the display.

<All>

Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.

< >

Displays a list of destinations registered in Favorites.

< >

Displays destinations for faxes.

< >

Displays destinations for e-mails.

< >

Displays destinations for I-Faxes.

Basic Operations

179

< >

Displays destinations for shared folders and FTP servers. Registration of destinations is performed from the

computer.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

< >

Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial.

<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>

Displays destinations with recipient names whose rst characters correspond to the characters of the selected

index.

●Use the computer to register a shared folder or FTP server as the destination for scans.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

●You can save the Address Book as a le on your computer (although you cannot use the computer to edit

the Address Book). You can also import a saved Address Book from the computer to the machine.

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 452)

●You can print a list of destinations registered in the Address Book. Address Book List(P. 632)

●If your oce has an LDAP server installed, you can make search to nd user information on the server and

beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

Basic Operations

180

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

6FR9-03L

This section describes how to register destinations from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to

1Select <Address Book> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Register Dest.>

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

3Select the type of address to register.

Registering destinations with the LDAP server

If your oce has an LDAP server installed, you can make search to nd user information on the server and

●To make registration from the LDAP server, you need to specify the settings for connecting to the LDAP

server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

1Select <LDAP Server>.

2Select the LDAP server you are using.

3Select conditions for user information to be searched.

●Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria

for searching destinations.

4Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

●To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5Select <Search Method>.

Basic Operations

181

6Select conditions to display the search result.

Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.

If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.

7Select <Start Search>.

➠The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.

●If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the

machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>. Registering LDAP

Servers(P. 65)

8Select a user you want to register in the Address Book.

9Select <Apply>.

➠The user name and the fax number or e-mail address registered on the LDAP server of the selected

user are registered in the Address Book.

Registering destinations from recall settings

If recall settings are provided, you can select <Recall Settings> and register the destinations.

4Select <Name>.

●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.

5Enter the name, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

6Select <Fax Number>, <E-Mail Address>, or <I-Fax Address>.

7Enter the destination, and select <Apply>.

Making detailed settings (only when registered for fax)

After selecting <Set Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.

Basic Operations

182

If an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper

image from being sent when setting <On>.

If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the

transmission start speed downward.

Specify <International (1)> to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering

overseas fax numbers.

●You can also specify <ECM TX> and <TX Speed> from <Menu> <Function Settings> <Send>

<Fax Settings>. However, settings made from <Address Book> are enabled for the detailed settings

of destinations registered in the Address Book.

8Select <Register As>.

9Select <Favorites> or <Coded Dial>.

●If you select <Coded Dial>, select the destination number, or select <Use Numeric Keys> and enter the

destination number.

10 Select <Apply>.

●You can make a group of destinations already registered in the Address Book and register it as one

destination. For more information, see Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group(P. 184) .

●When you want to change or delete items of information about destinations registered in the Address Book,

see Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book(P. 186) .

Basic Operations

183

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group

6FR9-03R

You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. This

section describes how to register a group from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to register a

group. Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

●Only destinations of the same type of address can be registered in the same group.

●Shared folders or FTP servers cannot be registered in a group as destinations.

1Select <Address Book> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Register Dest.> <Group>.

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

3Select <Name>.

●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.

4Enter the name, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

5Select <Destination>.

6Select <Add>.

7Select the index containing the destination you want to register. Index(P. 179)

8Select the destination, and then select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

184

9Repeat steps 6 to 8 until you have registered all of the destinations that you want to

To view information about the destination

●Select the target destination, and select <Details>.

To remove a destination from the group

●Select the destination that you want to remove from the group, and select <Delete> <Yes>.

10 Select <Register As>.

11 Select <Favorites> or <Coded Dial>.

●If you select <Coded Dial>, select the destination number, or select <Use Numeric Keys> and enter the

destination number.

12 Select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

185

Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address

Book

6FR9-03S

You can change your settings, such as changing a registered fax number or name, changing the type of destination

registered as a fax number to an e-mail destination, changing a coded dial number, and adding or deleting group

destinations. You can also delete destinations or groups.

●If you delete a destination from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the favorite settings. Registering

Frequently Used Settings(P. 171)

1Select <Address Book> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select the index containing the destination you want to edit. Index(P. 179)

3Select the destination, and select <Edit>.

●To clear selection of a destination, select again the destination with a check mark. When multiple destinations

are selected, you can deselect all of them in batch by <Clear All>.

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

To check destination details

●Select a destination of which the details you want to check, and select <Details>.

To delete destinations

●Select the destination you want to delete, and then select <Delete> <Yes>.

4After editing the necessary items, select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

186

Using a USB Memory Device

6FR9-03U

When using a USB memory, insert it into the USB port on the machine.

Before using a USB memory device

●The supported formats of USB memory device are FAT16 and FAT32.

The following devices and uses are not supported:

●USB memory devices that have security functions installed

●USB memory devices that do not meet the USB standards

●Memory card readers connected via USB

●USB memory devices that are used with extension cables

●USB memory devices used via a USB hub

Handling of USB memory devices

●Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it. If you attempt to insert it in

incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be damaged.

●Do not remove, bump or otherwise move the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported.

Also, do not turn OFF the machine while processing is in progress.

●You may not be able to save data properly on some USB memory devices.

◼Remove the USB Memory Device

●Always use the following procedure when removing USB memory devices. Using other methods to remove

USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the machine.

1Select <Status Monitor>.

2Select <Rmv. Mem. Media>.

➠Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.

3Disconnect the USB memory device.

LINKS

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 272)

Basic Operations

187

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device(P. 289)

Basic Operations

188

Copying

Copying ................................................................................................................................................................ 190

Copy Basic Features Screen .............................................................................................................................. 192

Basic Copy Operations ...................................................................................................................................... 194

Canceling Copies .......................................................................................................................................... 199

Checking the Copying Status and Log .......................................................................................................... 200

Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ............................................................................................................ 202

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ................................................................................................... 203

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) .............................................................................................. 204

Erasing Dark Borders When Copying (Erase Frame) ..................................................................................... 205

Adjusting the Color ....................................................................................................................................... 206

Useful Copy Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 207

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) ................................................................................. 208

Collating Copies by Page .............................................................................................................................. 209

Making ID Card Copies ................................................................................................................................. 210

Making Passport Copies ............................................................................................................................... 211

Copying

189

Copying

6FR9-03W

1660-03S

This chapter describes basic copy operations and various useful copy functions.

◼Using Basic Operations

Copy Basic Features Screen(P. 192)

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Canceling Copies(P. 199)

Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 200)

◼Enhancing Quality Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P. 202)

Selecting the Type of Original for

Copying(P. 203)

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying

(Sharpness)(P. 204)

Erasing Dark Borders When

Copying (Erase Frame)(P. 205)

Adjusting the Color(P. 206)

Copying

190

◼Using Useful Copy Functions Useful Copy Functions(P. 207)

Copying Multiple Documents onto

One Sheet (N on 1)(P. 208)

Collating Copies by Page(P. 209) Making ID Card Copies(P. 210)

Making Passport Copies(P. 211)

Copying

191

Copy Basic Features Screen

6FR9-03X

When you select <Copy> in the Home screen, the Copy Basic Features screen appears.

Current setting status and setting buttons

The setting status, such as copy ratio, copy paper, and number of copies, are displayed. To copy correctly, be

sure to check the settings displayed here. When you want to change a setting, select the desired setting item.

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

<2-Sided>

You can select a combination of 1-sided copying and 2-sided copying for the original and printout paper.

Specify the detailed settings from <Other Settings>. Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Scans one side of an original and prints the scanned data on one side of the paper.

Scans one side of an original and prints the scanned data on both sides of the paper.

Scans both sides of an original and prints the scanned data on both sides of the paper.

Scans both sides of an original and prints the scanned data on one side of the paper.

You can select an "N on 1" pattern to arrange multi-page originals on the same side of one sheet. Specify the

detailed settings from <Other Settings>. Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)

(P. 208)

Does not apply N on 1.

Prints data for two consecutive pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

Prints data for four consecutive pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

You can call the detailed settings or favorite settings that are not displayed in the Copy Basic Features screen.

Copying

192

<Reset>

You can collectively restore the default settings.

<Start>

Use this button to start copying. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white copying. Selecting <Color> starts

color copying.

Copying

193

Basic Copy Operations

6FR9-03Y

This section describes the basic operation procedure used to copy an original.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Copy> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

3Select <Number of Copies> in the Copy Basic Features screen. Copy Basic Features

Screen(P. 192)

4Enter the number of copies, and select <Close>.

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

5Specify the copy settings as necessary.

Adjusting Density

2-Sided Copying

Enlarging or Reducing

Selecting Copy Paper

Adjusting Density

Adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in an original are excessively light

or dark. For example, you can sharpen text and lines written using a pencil.

Adjusting Entire Density(P. 194)

Adjust the background density. You can make a clear copy of originals with colored

backgrounds, or originals such as a newspaper that is printed on thin paper on

which text or images on the other side are visible through the paper. Adjusting

the Background Density(P. 195)

◼Adjusting Entire Density

<Density> Adjust the density <Close>

Copying

194

◼Adjusting the Background Density

<Density> <Adjust Background Density> <Adjust (Manual)> Adjust the background

density <Apply> <Close>

●Depending on the original color, portions other than the background may be affected.

●If you select <Density by Color>, you can adjust the background density for each color.

2-Sided Copying

You can copy two pages of an original on both sides of the paper. You can also copy

a 2-sided original on both sides of the paper, or on two sheets of paper.

●<2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Available

Paper(P. 657)

<Other Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select the type of 2-sided copying <Apply>

Types of 2-sided copying

The illustration below shows the types of 2-sided copying.

<1-Sided->2-Sided> <2-Sided->2-Sided> <2-Sided->1-Sided>

Copying

195

<Orig./Fin. Type>

Specify the original orientation, opening type, and nishing type.

Enlarging or Reducing

You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio, or by setting a custom

copy ratio in increments of 1 %.

●If you make a setting for <N on 1> after setting the copy ratio, the setting of reduction ratio in <N on

1> takes priority.

<Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio

<100% 1:1>

Makes copies at copy ratio 100 %.

<Auto>

Makes copies by automatically enlarging/reducing the original image to t the specied paper size.

Preset copy ratio

Select a copy ratio.

Numeric keys

You can set any copy ratio from 25 % to 400 % in 1 % increments.

Selecting Copy Paper

Specify the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing out copies.

Copying

196

●You must rst specify the size and type of paper that is loaded in the paper source.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 156)

Loading Paper(P. 141)

<Paper> Select the paper source <Close>

Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to make copies.

Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to make copies.

●When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

●For information about other copy settings, see Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P. 202) or

Useful Copy Functions(P. 207) .

6Select <Start>.

➠Copying starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Copies(P. 199)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

The original is automatically scanned.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

For 2-sided copying or N on 1 copying, the screen prompting you to load the next original is displayed.

1Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.

●You can also specify <Density>, <Original Type>, and <Color Balance> separately for each original.

Copying

197

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning the entire original.

2Select <Start Printing>.

●When the <Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch> or <The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled.

Do you want to print?> message is shown in the display, there is a possibility that copying cannot be

performed properly. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

When copying originals with text or images that extend to the edges of the page

●The edges of the original might not be copied. For more information about the scan margins, see Main

Unit(P. 653) .

●If you always want to make copies with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for

Functions(P. 173)

●If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used

Settings(P. 171)

LINKS

Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 200)

Copying

198

Canceling Copies

6FR9-040

If you want to cancel copying immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the screen or press on the

operation panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status.

◼Select <Cancel> on the Screen That is Displayed While Copying

◼Press to Cancel

If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed

Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be printed. Select a copy document to be canceled, and select

<Cancel> <Yes>.

◼Check the copy job status before canceling

<Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job> Select the copy document in the <Copy/Print Job Status>

tab <Cancel> <Yes>

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

199

Checking the Copying Status and Log

6FR9-041

You can check the current copy statuses and the logs for copied documents.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the copy job log. <Display Job Log>(P. 592)

Useful in the Following Cases

●When some long time has already passed after scanning of your original to be copied but printing of the

document has not started yet, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed.

●When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been copied, you may want to see whether an

error has occurred.

1Select <Status Monitor>.

2Select <Copy/Print Job>.

3Check the copy statuses and logs.

To check the copy statuses

1Select the document whose status you want to check in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

To check the copy logs

1Select the document whose log you want to check in the <Copy Job Log> tab.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was copied successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a

document failed to be copied because it was canceled or there was some error.

Copying

200

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>

●This number represents an error code. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Canceling Copies(P. 199)

Copying

201

Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality

6FR9-042

You can improve the copy quality by specifying more detailed settings, such as selecting the optimum image quality,

erasing unnecessary shadows, etc.

Selecting the Type of Original for

Copying(P. 203)

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying

(Sharpness)(P. 204)

Erasing Dark Borders When

Copying (Erase Frame)(P. 205)

Adjusting the Color(P. 206)

Copying

202

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying

6FR9-043

You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the original type,

such as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine

photos.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Original Type> Select the original type

<Text/Photo/Map (Speed)> Priority is given to speed over image quality. This setting is only effective when selected for

color copying.

<Text/Photo/Map> Suitable when copying originals that contain both text and photos, or originals that include

detailed lines, such as maps.

<Text/Photo/Map (Quality)> Priority is given to image quality over speed. You can also adjust the level of priority given to

the quality of the text or photos. Adjust the setting on the scale, and select <Apply>.

<Printed Image> Suitable when making a clear copy of originals that contain printed photos (photos made of

halftone dots), such as magazines or pamphlets.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

203

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness)

6FR9-044

You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred

text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>

Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Adjusting the Color(P. 206)

Copying

204

Erasing Dark Borders When Copying (Erase Frame)

6FR9-045

When copying originals that are smaller than the output paper size, frame lines may

appear around the edges in the copied image. When copying facing pages from

thick book, dark borders may appear. <Erase Frame> enables you to erase these

frame lines and dark borders.

●The width of the frame to erase is increased or decreased relative to the <Copy Ratio> setting.

●<Erase Frame> is not available when using <N on 1>.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Erase Frame> <On> Specify the width of the frame to erase

<Next> Select the original size on the <Scan Size> screen

Example: If you want to erase the dark borders and frame lines

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

205

Adjusting the Color

6FR9-046

Adjust the levels of yellow, magenta, cyan, or black.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Color Balance> Select the color, and adjust the color level

<Apply>

Example: If you want to make a copy with colors that more closely match the original

Example: If you want to make a copy with brighter colors than the original

●If you select <Fine Adjust>, you can adjust the levels of the three density areas for each color.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness)(P. 204)

Copying

206

Useful Copy Functions

6FR9-047

20FY-045

This section describes useful copy functions to save paper and improve copying operation eciency.

Copying Multiple Documents onto

One Sheet (N on 1)(P. 208)

Collating Copies by Page(P. 209) Making ID Card Copies(P. 210)

Making Passport Copies(P. 211)

Copying

207

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)

6FR9-048

You can reduce the size of a multiple-page original and arrange all pages on one side

of the paper. You can save the number of sheets as the document can be copied on

fewer pages than those of the original.

●Using <N on 1> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). If the

copying process has not started, you can further reduce the image size by lowering the numeric value that is

automatically displayed. But the edges of the original might not be copied if you increase it.

●<N on 1> is not available when using <Erase Frame>.

●When you copy multiple originals onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <N on 1> Select the number of pages to be combined, and select

<Next> Select the original size on the <Scan Size> screen On the <Output Size> screen, select

the paper source that contains the paper you want to use

Number of pages to be combined

Select the number of pages to be combined on one side of paper. For example, <4 on 1> means that "a four-

page original can be combined on a single sheet."

Specify how to arrange the originals on the page.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

208

Collating Copies by Page

6FR9-049

When preparing multiple copies of multi-page originals, set <Collate> to <On> to

collate copies in sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing

handouts for meetings or presentations.

<Off>

The copies are grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a ve-page

original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.

<On>

The copies are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three

copies of a ve-page original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

209

Making ID Card Copies

6FR9-04A

1660-048

You can use <ID Card Copy> to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same

side of a page. This function is useful when copying a driver's license or ID card.

●<Copy Ratio> is automatically set to <100% 1:1>.

Place the card on the platen glass <ID Card Copy> <Start> Turn the card over <Scan Next>

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

210

Making Passport Copies

6FR9-04C

You can copy multiple passports onto one sheet.

1Place the passport with the desired pages open on the platen glass. Placing

Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Passport Copy> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

3Select the layout.

<2 on 1 (2-Sided)>

Copies four facing pages of passports onto one side of paper in total. Copies eight facing pages of passports

onto both sides of paper in total.

<4 on 1 (2-Sided)>

Copies eight facing pages of passports onto one side of paper in total. Copies 16 facing pages of passports

onto both sides of paper in total.

<2 on 1>

Copies four facing pages of passports onto one side of paper in total.

<4 on 1>

Copies eight facing pages of passports onto one side of paper in total.

4Select the paper source that contains the paper you want to use.

5Congure the copy settings as necessary. Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

211

6Select <Start>.

➠The rst passport is scanned.

7Place the next passport on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.

●You can also specify <Density> and <Color Balance> separately for each passport.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the passports.

8Select <Start Printing>.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Copying

212

Faxing

Faxing ................................................................................................................................................................... 214

Fax Basic Features Screen ................................................................................................................................. 217

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................. 218

Canceling Sending Faxes .............................................................................................................................. 226

Receiving Faxes ................................................................................................................................................. 227

Useful Functions When Sending ....................................................................................................................... 231

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings) .................................................................. 232

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending) ...................................................................................... 235

Saving a Copy of a Sent Original ................................................................................................................... 237

Various Receiving Methods .............................................................................................................................. 239

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception) ............................................................. 240

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically ...................................................................................... 242

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents ......................................................................... 245

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .................................................................................................. 247

Sending PC Faxes ......................................................................................................................................... 248

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax) ................................................................................................................................. 250

Sending I-Faxes ............................................................................................................................................ 251

Receiving I-Faxes .......................................................................................................................................... 258

Faxing

213

Faxing

6FR9-04E

1660-049

This chapter describes fax settings, basic fax operations and various other useful functions to suit your needs, such as

PC Fax to send documents directly from computers, Address Book to specify destinations easily, and Forwarding to

receive faxes even when you are out of the oce.

●You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Conguring Initial Settings for Fax

Functions(P. 79)

●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering

Destinations(P. 179)

◼Using Basic Operations

Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 217)

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

◼Using Useful Functions When Sending Useful Functions When Sending(P. 231)

Recalling Previously Used

Settings for Sending (Recall

Settings)(P. 232)

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call

(Manual Sending)(P. 235)

Saving a Copy of a Sent

Original(P. 237)

Faxing

214

◼Receiving According to Your Purposes Various Receiving Methods(P. 239)

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 240)

◼Forwarding All the Received Documents

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically(P. 242)

◼Sending Faxes Directly from Your Computer

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 247)

Faxing

215

◼Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)(P. 250)

Faxing

216

Fax Basic Features Screen

6FR9-04F

Selecting <Fax> in the Home screen displays the FAX Basic Features screen that appears when you sending faxes.

<Enter Dest.> tab

Select this tab to directly enter a destination.

<Specify Destination> tab

Select this tab to search for an LDAP server, enter a coded dial, or specify a destination using the recall

settings.

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings)(P. 232)

<TX/RX Settings> tab

Select this tab to specify the scanning settings. You can change the RX mode ( Deciding Which Fax

Receive Mode to Use(P. 80) ) of the machine.

<Conrm Destination>

You can check the name and fax number of specied destinations as well as the number of specied

destinations. You can also change the fax number or cancel specication of destinations.

Specify destinations registered in the Address Book.

<Reset>

You can collectively restore the default settings.

<Start>

Use this button to start faxing.

Faxing

217

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes

6FR9-04H

This section describes the basic operation procedure used to fax an original.

●You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Conguring Initial Settings for Fax

Functions(P. 79)

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen. Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 217)

●If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset

the settings before sending.

4Specify the destination.

Specifying from Address Book

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Entering Destinations Directly

Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server

Specifying from Address Book

The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of

registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient

names.

●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering

Destinations(P. 179)

1Select <Address Book>.

2Select an index. Index(P. 179)

Faxing

218

3Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.

●If a destination is selected from <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Fax Basic Features screen can be

displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address

Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.

●To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.

Registering Destinations(P. 179)

1Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Enter a three-digit number.

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <Conrm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and

the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are

shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination,

select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying Destinations in

Address Book(P. 418)

Faxing

219

Entering Destinations Directly

For a destination that is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering a fax number.

1Enter the fax number in the <Enter Dest.> tab.

●If your machine is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), select <R> before entering the destination.

If <R> is not available, you need to register the R-key settings. <R-Key Setting>(P. 568)

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

Adding a destination

●To enter a second or subsequent destination, select <Next Dest.>.

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <Conrm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>, the input screen reappears so that you can

conrm the destination ( Conrming the Entered Fax Number(P. 420) ). Enter the destination

again.

Sending a fax abroad

●Enter the international access code, the country code, and the fax number to specify the destination.

If you are not able to successfully connect to a recipient, select <Pause> and insert a pause between

numbers.

Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server

If your oce has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user

information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the

appropriate user information and specify it as destination.

●You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP

Servers(P. 65)

1Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Select the LDAP server you are using.

3Select conditions for user information to be searched.

Faxing

220

●Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for

searching destinations.

4Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

●To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5Select <Search Method>.

6Select conditions to display the search result.

Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.

If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.

7Select <Start Search>.

➠The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.

●If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine

and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

8Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select

<Apply>.

Adding a destination

●To send a fax to multiple destinations at a time (sequential broadcast), repeat the appropriate steps to

enter all destinations.

●You can also recall previously used destinations. Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending

(Recall Settings)(P. 232)

Faxing

221

To delete destinations

If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Conrm Destination>.

2Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.

●If you select the Group Dial check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by

selecting <Details> <Destination>.

3Select <Yes>.

5Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

Adjusting Image Quality

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

Adjusting Image Quality

You can select the resolution suitable for your original type. The higher the

resolution is, the clearer the image becomes, but the longer it takes to send.

Selecting Resolution(P. 222)

You can adjust the density of the fax if the text or images in an original are too light

or dark. Adjusting Density(P. 222)

You can adjust the sharpness of the image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen

blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of

magazine photos. Adjusting Sharpness(P. 223)

◼Selecting Resolution

Select <Resolution> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Select the resolution

◼Adjusting Density

Select <Density> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Adjust the density <Apply>

Faxing

222

◼Adjusting Sharpness

Select <Sharpness> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Adjust the sharpness <Apply>

Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the

feeder.

●The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals are placed on the platen

glass or when the machine is set to Manual Sending.

Faxing

223

Select <2-Sided Original> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

6Select <Start>.

●If the <Conrm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select

<Start Scanning>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.

1Select the original size.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.

2Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

3Select <Start Sending>.

➠The faxes are sent.

●If you always want to send faxes with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for

Functions(P. 173)

●If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used

Settings(P. 171)

●If you want to sound an alarm when the handset is off the hook: <Off-Hook Alarm>(P. 565)

LINKS

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

Faxing

224

Useful Functions When Sending(P. 231)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Faxing

225

Canceling Sending Faxes

6FR9-04J

If you want to cancel sending faxes immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the display or press on

the operation panel. You can also cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status.

◼Select <Cancel> on the screen during fax transmission

◼Press to cancel

If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed

Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select

<Cancel> <Yes>.

◼Check the transmission status before canceling

<Status Monitor> <TX Job> Select the document in the <TX Job Status> tab <Cancel> <Yes>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Faxing

226

Receiving Faxes

6FR9-04K

This section describes the methods for receiving faxes and how to set up the machine to receive faxes. You need to

complete some procedures for using fax functions before specifying the receiving settings. Conguring Initial

Settings for Fax Functions(P. 79)

●The machine can print received fax documents on A4 or Letter size paper. If received fax documents are

printed on other paper sizes, a portion of the page may not be printed or a page may be printed on two

separate sheets of paper.

◼Methods for Receiving Faxes

The machine provides the following receiving methods. Select the method that best suits your needs and then set it up

by following the procedure in Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes(P. 229) .

<Auto>

Dedicated to receiving faxes

The machine receives faxes automatically. Even if someone makes a call to you, you cannot talk

to the caller.

<Fax/Tel (Auto

Switch)>

When the call is a fax

The machine receives the fax automatically.

When the call is a telephone call

An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call.

●You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.

When the call is a fax

An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you hear a beep, select <Fax> <Start

Receiving> to receive faxes.

When the call is a telephone call

An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you do not hear a beep, start your conversation.

●You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.

Faxing

227

●You can set the machine to automatically receive faxes when an incoming call rings within a

specied timeframe. <Switch to Auto RX>(P. 575)

<Answering

Machine>

When the call is a fax

After an incoming call rings, the machine receives the fax automatically.

When the call is a telephone call

The answering machine activates, enabling the caller to leave a message. If you pick up the

handset before the answering machine starts recording a message, you can talk with the caller.

●You need to connect your answering machine to the machine beforehand.

●Set the answering machine to answer after a few rings.

●We recommend that you add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the

message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds.

The machine distinguishes between fax and telephone calls. This mode is only available for

certain countries and requires a subscription to a network switch service.

●You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.

Telstra FaxStream. Duet (Only for Australia)

In Australia, Telstra offers the FaxStream. Duet capability. If you subscribe to this service, your

line is assigned two numbers: one for fax and one for phone. When the fax number is called,

the network sends a specic ringing tone which your machine recognizes and automatically

handles as a fax call. If the phone number is called, a different ringing tone is sent out from the

network so that the call is handled as a voice call. This means that there is no switching delay at

the caller's end. Contact Telstra for connection information.

●Triple ring (short-short-short) for fax receiving.

Three short rings, at regular intervals.

●Any ring except triple ring (depending on your switchboard) for telephone conversation.

●You need to subscribe to the FaxStream service beforehand.

Telecom FaxAbility (Only for New Zealand)

In New Zealand, Telecom N.Z. offers the FaxAbility capability. This service allows you to assign

two numbers to your line: one for fax and one for telephone. When the fax number is called,

the network sends a specic ring tone which your machine recognizes and automatically

handles as a fax call. If the telephone number is called, a different ring tone is sent out from

the network so that the call is handled as a voice call. This means that there is no switching

delay at the caller's end. Contact Telecom for connection information.

●You need to subscribe to the FaxAbilty service beforehand.

Faxing

228

●Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes

properly.

●If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set the telephone to not receive faxes

automatically.

●If you pick up the telephone handset and hear a beep, the call is a fax. You can receive the fax just by using

the telephone to enter a specic ID number. Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)

(P. 230)

◼Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes

1Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

2Select <RX Mode> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab of the Fax Basic Features screen. Fax

Basic Features Screen(P. 217)

3Select the receiving method.

When selecting <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>

Specify the following three settings as necessary. When the setting is complete, select <Apply>.

Enables you to specify the duration during which the machine determines whether an incoming call is a fax or a

telephone call.

Enables you to specify the duration during which an incoming call rings for a telephone call.

Enables you to specify how the machine operates if you do not pick up the handset while an incoming call is

ringing. Select <End> to disconnect the call or <Receive> to receive an incoming fax.

●If you want to print received documents on both sides of paper: <Print on Both Sides>(P. 574)

●If you want to print information, such as reception date and time, at the bottom of received documents:

<Print RX Page Footer>(P. 577)

●If you want to continue printing even when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low: <Continue

Print. When Cart. Low>(P. 573)

Faxing

229

◼Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)

When you pick up the telephone and get a fax signal, you do not need to go to the machine to receive the fax. Just

enter a specic ID number with the telephone, and you can start receiving the fax.

●When the telephone is not directly connected with the machine, the remote reception function is not

available.

1When an incoming call rings, pick up the telephone handset.

2If you hear a beep, enter the ID number for Remote Reception with the telephone.

●For more information about setting the ID number, see <Remote RX>(P. 575) .

3Hang up the handset.

LINKS

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Various Receiving Methods(P. 239)

Faxing

230

Useful Functions When Sending

6FR9-04L

This section describes how to forward a fax again to a previously specied destination, how to send a fax after a phone

call, and how to save a copy of a fax document.

Recalling Previously Used

Settings for Sending (Recall

Settings)(P. 232)

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call

(Manual Sending)(P. 235)

Saving a Copy of a Sent

Original(P. 237)

Faxing

231

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall

Settings)

6FR9-04R

You can recall the destinations specied in the past. When you specify a previously

used destination, the machine also sets the same fax settings such as density you

used the last time you sent documents to that destination.

●When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of

Previously Used Destinations(P. 418)

●Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and

disables this feature. Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 418)

●The destinations in Manual Sending are not available for this feature. Sending a Fax after a Phone Call

(Manual Sending)(P. 235)

●When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specied are

deleted.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen. Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 217)

●If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset

the settings before sending.

4Select <Recall Settings> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

5Select the destination.

●When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specied for the rst transmission is displayed

in the log, but all the destinations are specied.

Faxing

232

➠The selected destination and the fax settings used at the time are specied. You can also change the

settings before sending.

To delete destinations

When you transmitted to multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Conrm Destination>.

2Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.

●If you select the Group Dial check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by

selecting <Details> <Destination>.

3Select <Yes>.

6Specify the scanning settings as necessary. Basic Operations for Sending

Faxes(P. 218)

7Select <Start>.

●If the <Conrm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select

<Start Scanning>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.

1Select the original size.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.

2Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

Faxing

233

3Select <Start Sending>.

➠The faxes are sent.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Faxing

234

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending)

6FR9-04S

You can send faxes manually at the end of a phone conversation. When you hear a

beep over the phone, it means the recipient is trying to receive your faxes. Select

<Start> to send your faxes.

●You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

●The machine cannot automatically scan both sides of the originals in Manual Sending.

●When the original is placed on the platen glass, only one page can be sent.

2Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen. Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 217)

●If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset

the settings before sending.

4Specify the scanning settings as necessary. Basic Operations for Sending

Faxes(P. 218)

5Dial the recipient's fax number.

6Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive your faxes.

●If you hear a beep, proceed to step 7.

7Select <Start>.

●If you place the original on the platen glass, select the original size.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

8Hang up the handset.

Faxing

235

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Faxing

236

Saving a Copy of a Sent Original

6FR9-04U

In addition to the address specied when the fax is sent, you can also send faxed

documents to a preset storage address for archiving. This is useful for keeping a log

of what has been sent. You can specify a fax number, an e-mail address, a shared

folder on the computer, an FTP server or an I-Fax as the storage address.

●Only destinations in the Address Book can be specied as a storage address. To use the Address Book, the

destination must be registered beforehand. Registering Destinations(P. 179)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings>.

3Select <Archive TX Document>.

4Select <On> in <Archive TX Document>.

●When not using the function for archiving sent documents, select <Off>.

5Congure storage of sent documents.

Specify the storage destination of sent documents. In the Address Book, select the check box for the

destination to use as the storage location, and select <Apply>.

You can specify a character string to be used in the le name when sending a document by E-mail/I-fax or

when saving to a shared folder/FTP server. The le name is automatically assigned based on the following

format: arbitrary character string_communication management number (four digits)_sent date and

time_document number (three digits).le extension name.

●When not specifying <File Name>, you can use the following format for le name: communication

management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).le extension

name.

Faxing

237

6Select <Apply>.

Faxing

238

Various Receiving Methods

6FR9-04W

You can store received faxes in the machine's memory without printing them. You can reduce fax paper waste by

checking the detailed information of fax documents and only printing necessary documents.

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 240)

Faxing

239

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory

Reception)

6FR9-04X

You can store received faxes into memory of the machine, and then print them later.

This feature can prevent unauthorized persons from seeing condential documents

unintentionally.

Storing Documents into Memory(P. 240)

Printing Documents in Memory(P. 241)

Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 241)

Storing Documents into Memory

To store received documents into memory, set <Use Memory Lock> to <On>. You can congure a setting to enable you

to preview received documents using the Remote UI. You can also specify a setting to activate the Memory Reception

function only during a specied period of time of the day.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Set Fax/I-Fax

Inbox> <Fax Memory Lock Settings> Select <On> in <Use Memory Lock> Specify each setting

<Apply>

Specify whether to preview received documents stored in memory. Select <On> to preview the documents using

the Remote UI. Checking Current Status of Received Documents(P. 434)

Enables you to print RX Result reports every time documents are stored into memory. To print reports, select

<On>. You also need to set <RX Result Report> to <On>. RX Result Report(P. 632)

Specify whether to activate the Memory Reception function only during a specic time frame of the day. Select

<On> to activate the Memory Reception function only during a time frame specied in <Memory Lock Time>.

Set the time to start and end the Memory Reception function.

●You cannot specify <Use Fax Preview> and <Set Memory Lock Time> at the same time.

Faxing

240

Printing Documents in Memory

To print received documents in memory, set <Use Memory Lock> to <Off>. All the documents in memory are printed.

●You cannot select a specic document for printing.

●If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specied, the documents are automatically printed at the

specied time.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Set Fax/I-Fax

Inbox> <Fax Memory Lock Settings> Select <Off> in <Use Memory Lock> <Apply>

Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory

You can check an outline of each document stored in memory, including sender fax numbers and number of pages

sent. You can also select and forward a document stored in memory, and delete an unnecessary document, if any.

1Select <Status Monitor>.

2Select <RX Job>.

3In the <RX Job Status> tab, select the document you want to check/forward/delete.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●To forward the document, select <Forward>, and specify the appropriate destination.

●To delete the document, select <Delete> <Yes>.

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Faxing

241

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically

6FR9-04Y

The machine can forward all the received documents to specied destinations. Even if you are out of the oce, you

can receive fax information anytime, anywhere.

Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically(P. 242)

Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 243)

Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 243)

Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically

While the Forwarding feature is activated, all the documents to be received are automatically forwarded.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings>.

3Select <Forwarding Settings> <Forwarding Function>.

4Select <On> in <Use Forwarding Function>.

●When not using the forwarding function, select <Off>.

5Congure the forwarding settings.

Specify a forwarding destination. In the Address Book, select the check box for a destination to which to

forward, and select <Apply>.

You can specify a character string to be used in the le name when sending a document by E-mail/I-fax or

when saving to a shared folder/FTP server. The le name is automatically assigned based on the following

format: arbitrary character string_communication management number (four digits)_sent date and

time_document number (three digits).le extension name.

●When not specifying <File Name>, you can use the following format for le name: communication

management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).le extension

name.

Faxing

242

6Select <Apply>.

Printing Documents to be Forwarded

If you want to check the documents to be forwarded for yourself, you can set the machine to print the documents

whenever they are forwarded, or to print only the documents that failed to be forwarded.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding

Settings> <Print Images> Select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>

Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded

You can store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory, and print, resend, or delete them later.

◼Storing Documents that Failed to be Forwarded in Memory

◼Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents Stored in Memory

1Select <Status Monitor>.

2Select <Fax Forwarding Errors>.

3Select the document you want to print/resend/delete.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●To print the document, select <Print> <Yes>.

●To resend the document, select <Forward>, select the check box for the target destination, and then

select <Apply>.

●To delete the document, select <Delete> <Yes>.

Faxing

243

●You can use the Remote UI to preview the documents that failed to be forwarded. Checking Information

of Documents That Failed To Be Forwarded(P. 434)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Faxing

244

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received

Documents

6FR9-050

The statuses and communication logs for sent and received fax and I-Fax documents can be checked separately for

sending and receiving.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the communication logs. <Display Job

Log>(P. 592)

1Select <Status Monitor>.

2Select <TX Job> or <RX Job>.

3Check the statuses and communication logs for sent and received documents.

To check the statuses for sent and received documents

1Select the document whose status you want to check in the <TX Job Status> or <RX Job Status> tab.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●If you specied multiple destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the

screen. To check the details of specied multiple destinations, select <Destination>.

To check the communication logs for sent and received documents

1Select the document whose log you want to check in the <TX Job Log> or <RX Job Log> tab.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was sent or received successfully, and <Error> is displayed when

a document failed to be sent or received because it was canceled or there was some error.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

Faxing

245

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>

●This number represents an error code. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

Registering the destination of the sent document to the Address Book

●For a document sent to a destination not registered in the Address Book, you can register that

destination to the Address Book by selecting <Regst to Add Book> on the details screen.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

Receiving Faxes(P. 227)

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Receiving I-Faxes(P. 258)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 630)

Faxing

246

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)

6FR9-051

You can send fax documents created on your computer application directly from your computer. This feature

eliminates the need to print documents for faxing and saves paper. You need to specify the basic fax settings (

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 79) ) and install the fax driver on your computer. For more

information about how to install the fax driver, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

Sending PC Faxes(P. 248)

●Depending on the operating system and the version of the fax driver you are using, the fax driver screens in

this manual may differ from your screens.

About the Fax Driver Help

●Clicking [Help] on the fax driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen you can see information that

is not in the User's Guide, including information about driver features such as registering frequently used

settings and how to set up those features.

Faxing

247

Sending PC Faxes

6FR9-052

●When <Allow Fax Driver TX> is set to <Off> on the machine, you cannot send faxes from computers.

Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 420)

●You need to enable Department ID Management on the fax driver you are using if Department ID

Management is enabled on the machine. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.

Setting the Department ID Management(P. 367)

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

2Select the fax driver for this machine, and click [Print].

3Specify the destination.

To specify only one destination

1Click the [Enter Destination] tab.

2Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI).

To specify multiple destinations at once

1Click the [Select Destination] tab.

2Click [Add Destination].

3Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI), and click [OK].

Faxing

248

4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add concurrent destinations.

●You can also add a destination by clicking [Add Next Destination] in step 3.

●If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line, select [Detailed Settings] [Add Outside Dialing

Prex to G3/G4/IP Fax Number] and enter the number in [Outside Dialing Prex]. The specied number is

added to the beginning of the fax number when the machine dials.

●To make it easier to specify destinations using the Address Book.

●Selecting [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] enables you to store the logs for sending documents and

check detailed information of a sent document along with its image, including destinations and number of

pages. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.

●When the [Conrm Fax Number] or [Conrm URI] eld is active, also enter the appropriate number in the

eld. The setting of whether to conrm entered numbers can be changed in the fax driver screen. For

more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.

4Click [Send] to send the document.

LINKS

When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 689)

Faxing

249

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)

6FR9-053

The Internet Fax (I-Fax) function allows you to send and receive faxes over the Internet. Originals are sent attached as

TIFF images les to e-mail. Since a telephone connection is not used, you can send faxes to distant locations and send

documents with many pages without worrying about communications charges. Some advance preparation is required,

such as specifying the mail server settings. Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Receiving I-Faxes(P. 258)

Faxing

250

Sending I-Faxes

6FR9-054

To send a fax to a computer or another I-Fax-compatible device, specify an e-mail address instead of a fax number as

the destination. If you send an I-Fax to a computer, it is sent as an e-mail attachment in TIFF format. And in the same

way as when you send e-mail to a computer, you can specify multiple destinations and specify Cc and Bcc destinations.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <I-Fax> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan Basic Features Screen(P. 283)

4Specify the destination.

Specifying from Address Book

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Entering Destinations Directly

Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server

Specifying from Address Book

The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of

registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient

names.

●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering

Destinations(P. 179)

1Select <Address Book> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Select <To>.

3Select an index. Index(P. 179)

Faxing

251

4Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.

●If a destination is selected from <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Basic Features screen for I-Fax

sending can be displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address

Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.

●To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.

Registering Destinations(P. 179)

1Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Select <To>.

3Enter a three-digit number.

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

If a conrmation screen appears

Faxing

252

●When <Conrm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and

the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are

shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination,

select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying Destinations in

Address Book(P. 418)

Entering Destinations Directly

For a destination that is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering an I-Fax address.

1Select <Use Keyboard> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Enter the I-Fax address, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server

If your oce has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user

information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the

appropriate user information and specify it as destination.

●You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP

Servers(P. 65)

1Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Select the LDAP server you are using.

3Select conditions for user information to be searched.

●Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for

searching destinations.

Faxing

253

4Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

●To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5Select <Search Method>.

6Select conditions to display the search result.

Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.

If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.

7Select <Start Search>.

➠The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.

●If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine

and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

8Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select

<Apply>.

If a screen on which a destination is already specied appears

●You can only send to your own e-mail address. To send to other destinations, you must congure the send

function authentication settings so that e-mail transmission is not restricted. Contact your administrator

for details. LDAP Server Authentication(P. 375) .

Specifying destinations from the transmission records

●You can also recall previously used destinations. Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/

Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 317)

5Specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, as necessary.

●Select the method used to specify destinations in the <Specify Destination> tab, and then specify the

destination.

Faxing

254

●If you selected <LDAP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is specied in the <To>

eld.

●<Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Address Book> or <Coded Dial>.

To delete destinations

If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Conrm Destination>.

2Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.

●If you select the Group check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting

<Details> <Destination>.

3Select <Yes>.

6Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

●For more information about each setting, see Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or

FTP Server(P. 293) or Scanning Clearly(P. 306) .

7Specify the subject, message, and reply-to address for the e-mail as necessary.

To specify subject/message

1Select <Subject/Message> in the <Send Settings> tab.

2Select <Subject>

3Enter the subject, and select <Apply>.

4Select <Message>.

5Enter the message, and select <Apply>.

6Select <Apply>.

To specify reply-to address

Specify the reply-to address when you want to notify the recipient of an e-mail address different from that of

the machine as the reply-to address. Select the target reply-to address from the destinations registered in the

Faxing

255

Address Book, and specify it. If the destination has not been registered in the Address Book, see

Registering Destinations(P. 179) .

1Select <Reply To> in the <Send Settings> tab.

2Select <Specify from Address Book>.

3Select the check box for the desired reply-to address, and select <Apply>.

●The reply-to address that can be specied is always one of the e-mail addresses registered in the

Address Book.

8Select <Start>.

●If the <Conrm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select

<Start Scanning>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 226)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the I-Faxes are sent.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass,

and select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Start Sending>.

➠The I-Faxes are sent.

If the <SMTP Authentication> screen appears

●Enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.

File name of a sent document

●The le name of a sent document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication

management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).le extension

name. An arbitrary character string can be added in front of the le name. Conguring a File

Name(P. 316)

If a Send Error Occurs

Error notications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may

result in an insucient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that

you clear the mailbox periodically.

Faxing

256

To clear the mailbox

●When the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail

account that you use usually, you should rst check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [TX Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].

4Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].

5Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].

➠E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.

●If you always want to send with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

●If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used

Settings(P. 171)

●If you want to specify the I-Fax sender name: <Register Unit Name>(P. 560)

LINKS

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Faxing

257

Receiving I-Faxes

6FR9-055

◼When an I-Fax Arrives

When an I-Fax arrives, the Data indicator on the operation panel blinks. After the I-Fax is completely received, the

document is printed out automatically and the indicator goes out.

●To cancel reception, select <Status Monitor> <RX Job> select a document in the <RX Job Status> tab

<Delete> <Yes>.

◼Receiving I-Faxes Manually

If you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or if you want to congure the machine so

that it does not receive I-Faxes automatically, use the method below to receive I-Faxes manually. If there is a document

on the server, printing begins.

◼Printout Paper

Regardless of the received document size, incoming I-Faxes are printed at the size specied in <RX Print Size>. <RX

Print Size>(P. 573)

●If paper of the size specied in <RX Print Size> is not loaded in the paper drawer, the <No Paper> error

message is displayed. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

●If you want to print received documents on both sides of paper: <Print on Both Sides>(P. 573)

●If you want to continue printing even when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low: <Continue

Print. When Cart. Low>(P. 573)

LINKS

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 245)

Faxing

258

Printing

Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 260

Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 261

Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 263

Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 265

Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................. 267

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ................................................................................... 268

Printing via Secure Print ........................................................................................................................ 269

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) ......................................................................... 272

Printing

259

Printing

6FR9-056

There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer

driver or print image les from a USB memory device. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.

◼Printing from a Computer

You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.

Printing from a Computer(P. 261)

◼Useful Functions When Printing

You can assign a PIN to the print data to enhance security or directly print les stored in a USB memory device.

Various Printing Methods(P. 267)

Printing from Mobile Devices

●Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to

print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 333)

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

Printing

260

Printing from a Computer

6FR9-057

You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful

settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your

documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as

installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the

online manual website.

About the Printer Driver Help(P. 261)

To Use the Optional Items(P. 261)

Basic Printing Operations(P. 261)

About the Printer Driver Help

Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed

descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.

To Use the Optional Items

If the optional cassette feeding module is attached to the machine after installation of the printer driver, perform the

following operation on the printer driver.

●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682) ) Right-click the printer driver

icon for this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Paper

Source] Select the cassette feeding module from [1-Cassette Feeding Unit] in [Optional Drawer/

Cassette] [OK] [OK]

Basic Printing Operations

This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.

Paper settings on the machine

Printing

261

●Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before

proceeding to printing.

●By setting <Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing> to <On>, you can print from the paper source specied

in the printer driver, regardless of the paper settings on the machine. <Prioritize Driver Settings When

Printing>(P. 515)

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

3Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].

●Switch the tab according to the settings.

4Click [Print] or [OK].

➠Printing starts.

●If you want to cancel printing, see Canceling Prints(P. 263) .

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 265)

When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 689)

Printing

262

Canceling Prints

6FR9-058

You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.

From a Computer(P. 263)

From the Operation Panel(P. 264)

From a Computer

You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.

1Double-click the printer icon.

When the printer icon is not displayed

●Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682) ), right-click the printer driver icon for

this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).

2Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].

3Click [Yes].

➠Printing of the selected document is canceled.

●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

Canceling from the Remote UI

●You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print

Documents(P. 433)

Canceling from an application

●On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].

Printing

263

From the Operation Panel

Cancel printing using or <Status Monitor>.

◼Press to Cancel

If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed

Select the document you want to cancel, and select <Cancel> <Yes>.

◼Check the Print Job Status Before Canceling

<Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job> Select the document in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab

●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

LINKS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 261)

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 265)

Printing

264

Checking the Printing Status and Log

6FR9-059

You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs. <Display Job Log>(P. 592)

Useful in the Following Cases

●When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the

documents waiting to be printed.

●When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an

error has occurred.

1Select <Status Monitor>.

2Select <Copy/Print Job>.

3Check the print statuses and logs.

To check the print statuses

1Select the document whose status you want to check in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

To check the print logs

1Select the document whose log you want to check in the <Print Job Log> tab.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a

document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.

Printing

265

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●The displayed document name or user name may not reect the actual document or user name.

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>

●This number represents an error code. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

LINKS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 261)

Canceling Prints(P. 263)

Printing

266

Various Printing Methods

6FR9-05A

This section describes how to print a document by adding a PIN, and how to print a le stored on a USB memory

device without using the printer driver.

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure

Print)(P. 268)

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory

Media Print)(P. 272)

Printing

267

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)

6FR9-05C

By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine,

and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure

Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts

of condential documents from being left unattended.

Printing via Secure Print(P. 269)

Printing

268

Printing via Secure Print

6FR9-05E

This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured document. The rst part of this

section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how

to print the secured document on the machine.

Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 269)

Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 270)

Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 271)

Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

3Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].

➠The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].

4Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].

●Switch the tab according to the settings.

5Click [Print] or [OK].

➠After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be

printed.

Printing

269

Printing Out Secured Documents

Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for

Secured Documents(P. 271) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine

and can no longer be printed.

●If secured documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from

printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon

as you can.

●You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.

1Select <Secure Print> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●You cannot proceed to the next step if the <Remote Scanner> screen shown below is displayed. In this

case, select to close the screen, and select <Secure Print>.

2Select the check box for the secured document to print, and select <Start>.

●You can select multiple documents that have the same PIN.

If a screen for user selection is displayed

●If secured documents from two or more users are stored in memory, the screen for user selection is

displayed prior to the screen for le selection. Select your user name.

Deleting a secured document

●You can collectively delete multiple documents. Select the check box for the secured document to delete,

and select <Delete>.

3Enter the PIN, and select <Apply>.

●When you select multiple documents with different PINs in step 2, a message is displayed. Select <Close>,

and select the secured documents again in step 2.

➠Printing starts.

●If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

Printing

270

Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents

You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is

deleted within a certain period of time.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Function Settings>.

3Select <Secure Print>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

4Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.

When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected

●Set <Use Secure Print> to <On>.

Disabling Secure Print

●Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.

5Specify how long the machine holds secured documents, and select <Apply>.

●The secured document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time

specied here elapses.

6Select <Apply>.

7Select <OK>.

8Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 265)

Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 422)

Printing

271

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media

Print)

6FR9-05F

You can print les directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print

without using a computer. For more information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove

the USB memory device, see Using a USB Memory Device(P. 187) .

●It is necessary to set <Use Print Function> to <On>. <Memory Media Settings>(P. 586)

1Select <Memory Media Print> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select the check box for the le to print.

●You can select multiple les.

●To clear a selection, select the le you have selected ( ) again.

●Selecting a folder displays its contents. To return to the folder in the upper level, select .

●Folders and les in a level deeper than the fth directory are not displayed.

●When you move to another folder, the previous le selections will be cleared.

To select all les

1Select <Select All>.

●To clear all selections, select <Clear Selection>.

2If le types are mixed, select <JPEG/TIFF Files> or <PDF Files>.

To change the le display method

You can select the le display method from "Preview"/"Thumbnail"/"Details."

Printing

272

Preview Thumbnail Details

●You can specify the le display method used to display the <Memory Media Print> screen. <Default

Display Settings>(P. 584)

To change the le sort order

You can change the sort order of the les in a USB memory device.

●You can specify a sort setting such as <Name (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Ascending)> as the default

setting for the le sort order. <File Sort Default Settings>(P. 585)

1Select <Sort Files>.

2Select the criteria for le sorting.

●When you select <Date/Time (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Descending)>, les are sorted based on the

modication dates and time of the les.

3Select <Apply>.

4Specify the print settings as necessary.

●You can select <Reset> to restore all the default print settings.

<Paper>

Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.

Printing

273

Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to print les.

Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to print les.

●When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

●When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.

You can adjust the brightness of images.

●When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.

Enter the number of copies.

●When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.

<2-Sided Printing>

You can select 1-sided printing or 2-sided printing.

Prints on one side of paper.

Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally

when bound.

Printing

274

Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically

when bound.

●<2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper. Available Paper(P. 657)

●<N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF les.

You can select an "N on 1" pattern to print multiple pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.

Does not apply N on 1.

Prints two pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.

Prints four pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.

(PDF only)

Prints eight pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.

●For a PDF le, you can print 9 or 16 pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper by using <N on 1>

under <Set PDF Details>.

You can change the print settings for JPEG and TIFF images.

Printing

275

<2-Sided Printing>

You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.

<N on 1> (JPEG les only)

Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number

of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of

paper, select <4 on 1>.

You can select the type of original depending on the image to print.

Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly.

Gives priority to printing text clearly.

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

Prints images with ne gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

Printing

276

You can change the print settings for PDFs.

<2-Sided Printing>

You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.

Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number

of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of

paper, select <4 on 1>.

Specify pages you want to print.

Prints all pages.

<Specied Pages>

Specify the range of pages you want to print. Enter the desired value in each of <Start Page> and <End Page>,

and select <Apply>.

●When the specied page range does not match any of the pages of the PDF le, printing is not performed.

Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size

enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.

Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.

●If you set to <On>, part of print data may not be printed in edge areas or paper may be partly smudged

depending on the document.

Printing

277

This setting species whether to print annotations in the PDF le.

<Off>

Prints no annotations.

<Auto>

Prints only those annotations that are specied to be printed in the PDF le.

You can print password protected PDF les by entering the password required to open them. Enter the

password, and select <Apply>.

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. You can make this setting for each of the types of

image contained in one document. See <Halftones>(P. 552) for the description of the setting.

You can print black text of which color information is "R=G=B=0%," "C=M=Y=100%," or "C=M=Y=0%/K=100%,"

using only the K (black) toner. See <Pure Black Text>(P. 547) for the description of the setting.

Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or gure. See <Black

Overprint>(P. 547) for the description of the setting.

Select the source prole for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using. See

<RGB Source Prole>(P. 548) for the description of the setting.

This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.

The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on this simulation. See

<CMYK Simulation Prole>(P. 549) for the description of the setting.

Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) data using the grayscale

prole of the machine. See <Use Grayscale Prole>(P. 549) for the description of the setting.

Select the appropriate prole for print data. This option can be specied for each image type in one

document. See <Output Prole>(P. 550) for the description of the setting.

Select the element to be prioritized when making color adjustment in <RGB Source Prole>. See

<Matching Method>(P. 551) for the description of the setting.

Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output. See <Composite

Overprint>(P. 553) for the description of the setting.

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white. See <Grayscale Conversion>(P. 553) for the

description of the setting.

Printing

278

Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. See <Density>(P. 517) for the description of the setting.

Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other

appearance characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job. See <Toner Save>(P. 518)

for the description of the setting.

Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives ner gradation than <High

1>. See <Gradation>(P. 518) for the description of the setting.

When ne lines or small text are faded, increase the density to give less faded print. See <Density Fine

Adjustment>(P. 518) for the description of the setting.

Specify the resolution to process print data. See <Resolution>(P. 519) for the description of the setting.

Specify the mode to print data with a smooth nish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in

<Mode 1> (default), try another mode. See <Special Smoothing Mode>(P. 519) for the description of

the setting.

When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that

the toner volume does not exceed the limit value. See <Toner Volume Correction>(P. 520) for the

description of the setting.

Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines. See <Line Control>(P. 520) for the description

of the setting.

Congure a setting to print text or ne lines in bold. See <Width Adjustment>(P. 521) for the

description of the setting.

Congure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using

applications) or text with a smooth nish. <Level 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Level 1>.

You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics. See <Advanced Smoothing>(P. 521) for the

description of the setting.

Congure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations

created using applications) or bit map images with a smooth nish. <Level 2> applies a stronger

smoothing effect than <Level 1>. You can apply the setting separately for graphics and images. See

<Gradation Smoothing>(P. 522) for the description of the setting.

5Select <Start>.

➠Selecting <B&W> starts black and white printing. Selecting <Color> starts color printing.

●If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

●If you always want to print with the same settings: Memory Media Print(P. 173)

LINKS

<Store/Access Files>(P. 579)

Printing

279

Scanning

Scanning .............................................................................................................................................................. 281

Scan Basic Features Screen ............................................................................................................................... 283

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ......................................................................................................... 286

Scanning and Saving to a Computer ............................................................................................................. 287

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device ........................................................................................................... 289

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server ......................................................... 293

Canceling Sending Documents ..................................................................................................................... 303

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals ........................................................................................... 304

Scanning Clearly ................................................................................................................................................ 306

Adjusting Image Quality ............................................................................................................................... 307

Adjusting Density ......................................................................................................................................... 308

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness) ........................................................................................ 309

Useful Scanning Functions ............................................................................................................................... 311

Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files ..................................................................................................... 312

Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size) .............................................................. 315

Conguring a File Name ............................................................................................................................... 316

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings) ....................................................... 317

Specifying E-Mail Settings ............................................................................................................................. 320

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .................................................................................................. 323

Scanning Documents from an Application .................................................................................................... 324

Using ScanGear MF ...................................................................................................................................... 326

Using WSD .................................................................................................................................................... 327

Scanning Originals Using WSD (WSD Scan) ............................................................................................ 329

Scanning

280

Scanning

6FR9-05H

1660-05E

You can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer.

Whichever way you use, the scanned originals are converted into electronic le formats such as PDFs. Use the scan

function to convert large-volume paper documents into les so that you can organize them easily.

●Depending on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the

screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

◼Using the Machine with a Computer

To use this machine with a computer, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to

a computer. To connect the machine to your computer via a network, you must register the machine to the installed

software. Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 85)

◼Using the Scanner

You can scan and save originals to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine. You can also save

originals to a USB memory device or send them as e-mail attachments.

Scan Basic Features Screen(P. 283)

Basic Operations for Scanning

Originals(P. 286)

Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

Checking Status and Log for Scanned

Originals(P. 304)

Scanning and Saving to a

Computer(P. 287)

Saving Data to a USB Memory

Device(P. 289)

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving

Data to a Shared Folder or FTP

Server(P. 293)

◼Enhancing Quality

You can nd instructions on how to resolve problems such as "blurry photos" or "text unreadable due to too deep

color of the paper."

Scanning

281

Scanning Clearly(P. 306)

◼Eciently, Reliably

You can nd instructions on how to enhance eciency when sending data and descriptions of useful settings.

Useful Scanning Functions(P. 311)

◼Scanning from a Computer

You can scan originals placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned originals are saved to the computer. You

can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing or

word-processing application.

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)(P. 323)

Scanning from Mobile Devices

●Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to

scan originals set on this machine. Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 333)

Scanning

282

Scan Basic Features Screen

6FR9-05J

When you select <Scan> in the Home screen, the Scan Basic Features screen appears.

Saves the scanned data to a computer. Basic Features Screen for Computer Scanning(P. 283)

Puts the machine into the online status when originals are scanned from a computer. Using Your

Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)(P. 323)

Saves the scanned data to a USB memory device. Basic Features Screen for USB Scanning(P. 284)

<E-Mail>

Sends the scanned data by e-mail. Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax Sending/File

Saving(P. 284)

<I-Fax>

Sends the scanned data by I-Fax. Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax Sending/File

Saving(P. 284)

<File>

Saves the scanned data to a shared folder or FTP server. Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax

Sending/File Saving(P. 284)

Basic Features Screen for Computer Scanning

Scan type

Select the scan setting. Scanning and Saving to a Computer(P. 287)

Scanning

283

<Start>

Use this button to start scanning.

Basic Features Screen for USB Scanning

Send Settings

The original is scanned based on the settings specied here.

<Reset>

You can collectively restore the default settings.

<Start>

Use this button to start scanning. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white scanning. Selecting <Color> starts

color scanning.

Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax Sending/File Saving

E-Mail Sending I-Fax Sending File Saving

<Specify Destination> tab

Select this tab to search for a destination in the Address Book or an LDAP server, enter a coded dial, or

specify a destination using the recall settings.

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server(P. 293)

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 317)

<Send Settings> tab

Select this tab to specify the scanning settings.

Scanning

284

<Conrm Destination>

You can check or change the name and address of the specied destination as well as the number of

destinations.

<Reset>

You can collectively restore the default settings.

<Start>

Use this button to start scanning. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white scanning. Selecting <Color> starts

color scanning.

Scanning

285

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals

6FR9-05K

1660-05H

This section describes the basic procedures for scanning originals.

◼Scanning

Scanning and Saving to a

Computer(P. 287)

Saving Data to a USB Memory

Device(P. 289)

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving

Data to a Shared Folder or FTP

Server(P. 293)

◼Operating Jobs

Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 304)

Scanning

286

Scanning and Saving to a Computer

6FR9-05L

You can perform the task of "scanning an original and saving it to a computer" from the operation panel of the

machine. Select the computer to be used as the save destination and the settings such as the scanning color (color or

black and white).

●When a network-connected computer is specied as the save destination, you must register the machine to

that computer beforehand. Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 85)

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <Computer> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan Basic Features

Screen(P. 283)

●If only a computer connected to the machine via USB is used, proceed to step 5.

4Select the destination computer.

5Select the scan type in the Computer Scan Basic Features screen. Basic Features

Screen for Computer Scanning(P. 283)

●The scan types and settings that are displayed can be conrmed and changed by using MF Scan Utility. For

more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

●If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual

website.

6Select <Start>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

●You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the screen before scanning.

Scanning

287

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Finish>.

➠The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

About the save destination folder

●By default, the scanned data is saved to the My Documents folder. A subfolder named with the scanning

date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.

●You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on

MF Scan Utility.

Scanning

288

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

6FR9-05R

This section describes how to scan the original and save the scanned data to a USB memory device. For more

information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device, see Using

a USB Memory Device(P. 187) .

●It is necessary to set <Use Scan Function> to <On>. <Memory Media Settings>(P. 586)

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <USB Memory> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan Basic Features

Screen(P. 283)

4Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original

Selecting a File Format

Specifying Orientation of Your Original

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original

You can specify the scanning size of your original.

<Scan Size> Select the original size

Scanning

289

Selecting a File Format

You can select the le format to which originals are scanned from PDF/JPEG/TIFF.

For PDF, you can select Compact PDF that reduces the data size or the PDF format

that enables a text search by including text data scanned with OCR (optical

character recognition). You can also create a PDF le with enhanced security by

encrypting data or adding the signature. Enhancing the Security of

Electronic Files(P. 312)

<File Format> Select a le format

●If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan an original from the platen glass, you can only scan

one page. To scan a multiple-page original all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the original is

saved as a separate le. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page originals either from the

platen glass or from the feeder. In this case, whether the original is to be saved as a single le or each

page as a separate le can be specied in Dividing a PDF File by Page(P. 290) or Dividing a TIFF

File by Page(P. 290) .

●<PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)> compress photos and illustrations on originals more

than <PDF> and <PDF (OCR)>. The le will be smaller, but the image quality of some originals or the

number of originals that can be scanned at once may be lower.

●In <PDF (Compact/OCR)> and <PDF (OCR)> you can congure the settings so that the machine

automatically detects the original direction during scanning based on the direction of the text read by

the OCR function. <OCR (Text Searchable) Settings>(P. 511)

◼Dividing a PDF File by Page

Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single PDF le or create a separate PDF le for

each page. This setting can be congured for each PDF format.

<File Format> <Set PDF Details> Select the PDF format <Divide into Pages> Select <Off> or

<On>

◼Dividing a TIFF File by Page

Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single TIFF le or create a separate TIFF le

for each page.

<File Format> <Set TIFF Details> <Divide into Pages> Select <Off> or <On>

Scanning

290

Specifying Orientation of Your Original

You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.

<Orig. Orientation> Select the original orientation

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the

feeder.

●The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals are placed on the platen

glass.

<2-Sided Original> Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

●For information about other scan settings, see Scanning Clearly(P. 306) or Adjusting Balance

between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size)(P. 315) .

5Select <Start>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

Scanning

291

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the saving process starts.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Finish>.

➠The saving process starts.

●A new folder is created on the USB memory device, and the scanned document is stored in that folder. The

le name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: the characters

SCAN followed by a four-digit number.le extension name. The character string "SCAN" in the le name

can be replaced with a different arbitrary character string ( Conguring a File Name(P. 316) ).

●If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

●If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used

Settings(P. 171)

Scanning

292

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder

or FTP Server

6FR9-05S

This section describes the procedures for scanning originals and sending the scanned data directly from the machine

by attaching it to an e-mail or saving it to a shared folder or FTP server.

●Before you can send the data directly by e-mail, you need to complete certain procedures, such as specifying

the e-mail server settings. Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)

●Before you can save the data to a shared folder or FTP server, you need to complete certain procedures,

such as specifying the location to save the scanned originals to.

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 94)

Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location(P. 98)

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <E-Mail> or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan Basic Features

Screen(P. 283)

4Specify the destination.

Specifying from Address Book

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Entering Destinations Directly (E-Mail Sending)

Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server

Specifying from the Address Book on a Mobile Device (E-Mail Sending)

Specifying from Address Book

The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of

registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient

names.

●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering

Destinations(P. 179)

Scanning

293

●Register the shared folder or FTP server address from a computer.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

1Select <Address Book> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Select <To>.

3Select an index. Index(P. 179)

4Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.

●If a destination is selected from <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Basic Features screen for e-mail

sending or le saving can be displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address

Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.

●To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.

Registering Destinations(P. 179)

●Register the shared folder or FTP server address from a computer.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

1Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Select <To>.

Scanning

294

3Enter a three-digit number.

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <Conrm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and

the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are

shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination,

select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying Destinations in

Address Book(P. 418)

Entering Destinations Directly (E-Mail Sending)

For a destination that is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering an e-mail address.

1Select <Use Keyboard> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Enter the e-mail address, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server

If your oce has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user

information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the

appropriate user information and specify it as destination.

●You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP

Servers(P. 65)

1Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

Scanning

295

2Select the LDAP server you are using.

3Select conditions for user information to be searched.

●Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for

searching destinations.

4Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

●To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5Select <Search Method>.

6Select conditions to display the search result.

Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.

If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.

7Select <Start Search>.

➠The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.

●If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine

and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

8Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select

<Apply>.

Scanning

296

Specifying from the Address Book on a Mobile Device (E-Mail Sending)

You can specify destinations from the address book on your mobile device.

Before using this feature

●You need to install "Canon PRINT Business" on your mobile device. Utilizing the Machine through

Applications(P. 341)

●Set <Link Mobile Device Address Book> on the machine to <On>. <Link Mobile Device Addr.

Book>(P. 562)

1Select <Mobile Portal> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

2Connect to the mobile device. Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 334)

3Send an address from the mobile device to the machine.

●On how to operate on the mobile device side, see "Canon PRINT Business Help."

●Information entered on the mobile device side such as subject, message and le name can also be sent to

the machine.

4When a message appears on the display of the machine, select <OK>.

If a screen on which a destination is already specied appears

●You can only send to destinations that are not restricted. To send to other destinations, you must

congure the send function authentication settings in such a way that transmission is not restricted.

Contact your administrator for details. LDAP Server Authentication(P. 375)

Specifying destinations from the transmission records

●You can also recall previously used destinations. Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/

Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 317)

Saving the data to a shared folder or FTP server

●Only one destination can be specied.

5When sending an e-mail, specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations,

as necessary.

●Select the method used to specify destinations in the <Specify Destination> tab, and then specify the

destination.

Scanning

297

●If you selected <LDAP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is specied in the <To>

eld.

●<Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Address Book> or <Coded Dial>.

To delete destinations

If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Conrm Destination>.

2Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.

●If you select Group, select <Details> <Destination>; you can view the destinations registered in the

group.

3Select <Yes>.

6Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original

Selecting a File Format

Specifying Orientation of Your Original

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original

You can specify the scanning size of your original.

Select <Scan Size> in the <Send Settings> tab Select the original size

Scanning

298

Selecting a File Format

You can select the le format to which originals are scanned from PDF/JPEG/TIFF. For

PDF, you can select Compact PDF that reduces the data size or the PDF format that

enables a text search by including text data scanned with OCR (optical character

recognition). You can also create a PDF le with enhanced security by encrypting

data or adding the signature. Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files(P. 312)

Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab Select a le format

●If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan an original from the platen glass, you can only scan

one page. To scan a multiple-page original all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the original is

saved as a separate le. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page originals either from the

platen glass or from the feeder. In this case, whether the original is to be saved as a single le or each

page as a separate le can be specied in Dividing a PDF File by Page(P. 299) or Dividing a TIFF

File by Page(P. 299) .

●<PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)> compress photos and illustrations on originals more

than <PDF> and <PDF (OCR)>. The le will be smaller, but the image quality of some originals or the

number of originals that can be scanned at once may be lower.

●In <PDF (Compact/OCR)> and <PDF (OCR)> you can congure the settings so that the machine

automatically detects the original direction during scanning based on the direction of the text read by

the OCR function. <OCR (Text Searchable) Settings>(P. 511)

◼Dividing a PDF File by Page

Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single PDF le or create a separate PDF le for

each page. This setting can be congured for each PDF format.

Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set PDF Details> Select the PDF format

<Divide into Pages> Select <Off> or <On>

◼Dividing a TIFF File by Page

Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single TIFF le or create a separate TIFF le

for each page.

Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set TIFF Details> <Divide into Pages> Select

Scanning

299

Specifying Orientation of Your Original

You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.

Select <Orig. Orientation> in the <Send Settings> tab Select the original orientation

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the

feeder.

●The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals are placed on the platen

glass.

Select <2-Sided Original> in the <Send Settings> tab Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

●For information about other scan settings, see Scanning Clearly(P. 306) or Adjusting Balance

between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size)(P. 315) .

●For e-mail, you can specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority as necessary. Specifying

E-Mail Settings(P. 320)

Scanning

300

7Select <Start>.

●If the <Conrm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select

<Start Scanning>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the sending/saving process starts.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Start Sending>.

➠The sending/saving process starts.

If the <File Authentication> or <SMTP Authentication> screen appears

●Enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.

File name of the sent document

●The le name of a sent document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication

management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).le extension

name. An arbitrary character string can be added in front of le name ( Conguring a File

Name(P. 316) ).

If an E-Mail Send Error Occurs

Error notications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may

result in an insucient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that

you clear the mailbox periodically.

To clear the mailbox

●When the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail

account that you use usually, you should rst check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [TX Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].

4Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].

5Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].

Scanning

301

➠E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.

●If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

●If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used

Settings(P. 171)

Scanning

302

Canceling Sending Documents

6FR9-05U

If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the display or press

. You can also cancel sending documents after checking the sending status.

◼Select <Cancel> to cancel

◼Press to cancel

If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed

Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select

<Cancel> <Yes>.

◼Check the transmission status before canceling

<Status Monitor> <TX Job> Select the document in the <TX Job Status> tab <Cancel> <Yes>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 304)

Scanning

303

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals

6FR9-05W

You can check the status and log for scanned originals sent directly from the machine.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the logs for sent documents. <Display Job

Log>(P. 592)

1Select <Status Monitor>.

2Select <TX Job>.

3Check the statuses and logs for sent documents.

To check the statuses for sent documents

1Select the document whose status you want to check in the <TX Job Status> tab.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●If you specied multiple destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the

screen. To check the details of specied multiple destinations, select <Destination>.

To check the logs for sent documents

1Select the document whose log you want to check in the <TX Job Log> tab.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document

failed to be sent because it was canceled or there was some error.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>

Scanning

304

●This number represents an error code. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

Registering the destination of the sent document to the Address Book

●For a document sent to a destination not registered in the Address Book, you can register that

destination to the Address Book by selecting <Regst to Add Book> on the details screen.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 630)

Scanning

305

Scanning Clearly

6FR9-05X

When creating les for brochures that contain many pictures or reports written in pencil, you can adjust density and

brightness to achieve clearer image quality.

Adjusting Image Quality(P. 307) Adjusting Density(P. 308) Adjusting Sharpness When

Scanning (Sharpness)(P. 309)

Scanning

306

Adjusting Image Quality

6FR9-05Y

You can select the image quality for the scan depending on the original type, such as

text-only originals, originals with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

<Scan> <USB Memory> <Original Type> Select the original type

Sending Data by E-Mail/I-Fax or Saving Data to the Server

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> Select <Original Type> in the <Send

Settings> tab Select the original type

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Scanning

307

Adjusting Density

6FR9-060

You can adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in a original are too light

or dark.

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

<Scan> <USB Memory> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>

Sending Data by E-Mail/I-Fax or Saving Data to the Server

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> Select <Density> in the <Send Settings>

tab Adjust the density <Apply>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness)(P. 309)

Scanning

308

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness)

6FR9-061

You can adjust the sharpness of the image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen

blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of

magazine photos.

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

<Scan> <USB Memory> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>

Sending Data by E-Mail/I-Fax or Saving Data to the Server

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> Select <Sharpness> in the <Send

Settings> tab Adjust the sharpness <Apply>

Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

Scanning

309

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Adjusting Density(P. 308)

Scanning

310

Useful Scanning Functions

6FR9-062

The machine is equipped with useful functions such as those that can create secure PDF les to prevent them from

being tampered with, and that can send data again to previously specied destinations.

Enhancing the Security of

Electronic Files(P. 312)

Adjusting Balance between File

Size and Image Quality (Data Size)

(P. 315)

Conguring a File Name(P. 316)

Recalling Previously Used

Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall

Settings)(P. 317)

Specifying E-Mail Settings(P. 320)

Scanning

311

Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files

6FR9-063

Digital les are vulnerable in terms of security because they can be easily viewed or

tampered with leaving no trace. When scanning important documents, you can take

appropriate measures such as encrypting data and adding a device signature to

enhance security.

Encrypting a PDF File(P. 312)

Adding a Device Signature(P. 313)

●An optional Send PDF Security Feature Set is required. System Options(P. 674)

●Encryption and device signature are only available for PDF les.

●Both the encryption and device signature can be used at the same time.

Encrypting a PDF File

You can encrypt and send/save a PDF le by setting a password when scanning originals. The password setting helps

reduce the risk of the PDF le being viewed or edited by others.

1Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

2Select <USB Memory>, <E-Mail>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan

Basic Features Screen(P. 283)

●If you select <USB Memory>, proceed to step 4.

3Specify the destination, and specify the scanning settings as necessary. Basic

Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

4Proceed to <Set PDF Details>.

Saving data to a USB memory device

●Select <File Format> <Set PDF Details>.

Sending e-mail/saving data to a shared folder or FTP server

●Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set PDF Details>.

Scanning

312

5Select the type of PDF format.

●You can specify whether to enable encryption for each PDF format.

6Select <Encryption>.

7Select the encryption level.

Encrypt the le in the 128-bit environment, which can be opened by Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later.

Encrypt the le in the 256-bit environment, which can be opened by Adobe Acrobat 10.0.

●<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> can be changed to <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> with a

different compatible version. <256-bit AES Set. (Encrypt. PDF)>(P. 511)

8Enter the encryption password, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

9Enter the same password, and select <Apply>.

10 Select <Apply>.

Adding a Device Signature

Convert the scanned original into a PDF le with a device signature. The device signature serves the same purpose as

sealing or signing a document; it can be used to check where the le was created and whether the document has been

tampered with or falsied after the signature was appended. To assign the device signature to a PDF le, you need to

generate the key and certicate for the device signature in advance. Generating a Device Signature Key(P. 428)

1Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

2Select <USB Memory>, <E-Mail>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan

Basic Features Screen(P. 283)

Scanning

313

●If you select <USB Memory>, proceed to step 4.

3Specify the destination, and specify the scanning settings as necessary. Basic

Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

4Proceed to <Set PDF Details>.

Saving data to a USB memory device

●Select <File Format> <Set PDF Details>.

Sending e-mail/saving data to a shared folder or FTP server

●Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set PDF Details>.

5Select the type of PDF format.

●You can specify whether to enable encryption for each PDF format.

6Select <Digital Signatures>.

7Select <Top Left>.

8Select <Apply>.

Scanning

314

Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality

(Data Size)

6FR9-064

You can specify the le compression ratio when converting scanned originals into

the JPEG format. <Small: Memory Priority> makes the compression ratio higher than

normal to create smaller les with lower image quality. On the other hand, <Large:

Image Quality Priority> makes the compression ratio lower than normal larger les

with higher image quality.

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

<Scan> <USB Memory> <Data Size> Specify the setting

Sending Data by E-Mail or Saving Data to the Server

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<File> Select <Data Size> in the <Send Settings> tab

Specify the setting

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Scanning

315

Conguring a File Name

6FR9-065

You can specify an arbitrary character string to be used in the le name of a scanned

document.

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

The le name is automatically assigned based on the following format: arbitrary character string + four-digit

number.le extension name.

<Scan> <USB Memory> <File Name> Enter a character string <Apply>

Sending Data by E-Mail/I-Fax or Saving Data to the Server

The le name is automatically assigned based on the following format: arbitrary character

string_communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three

digits).le extension name.

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> Select <File Name> in the <Send

Settings> tab Enter a character string <Apply>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Scanning

316

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving

(Recall Settings)

6FR9-066

You can select a destination from among the past destinations. When you specify a

previously used destination, the machine also sets the same scan settings such as

density you used the last time you sent documents to that destination.

●When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of

Previously Used Destinations(P. 418)

●Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and

disables this feature. Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 418)

●When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specied are

deleted.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135)

3Select <E-Mail>, <I-Fax>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan Basic

Features Screen(P. 283)

4Select <Recall Settings> in the <Specify Destination> tab.

5Select the destination.

●When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specied for the rst transmission is displayed

in the log, but all the destinations are specied.

Scanning

317

➠The selected destination and its scan settings are specied. You can also change the settings before

sending.

To delete destinations (e-mail/I-Fax)

If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Conrm Destination>.

2Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.

●If you select the Group check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting

<Details> <Destination>.

3Select <Yes>.

6Select <Start>.

●If the <Conrm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select

<Start Scanning>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the sending/saving process starts.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Start Sending>.

➠The sending/saving process starts.

If the <File Authentication> or <SMTP Authentication> screen appears

●Enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Scanning

318

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Scanning

319

Specifying E-Mail Settings

6FR9-067

When attaching a scanned originals to an e-mail, you can specify the subject,

message, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail before sending it.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server. Logging

in to Authorized Send(P. 135) .

3Select <E-Mail> in the Scan Basic Features screen. Scan Basic Features

Screen(P. 283)

4Specify the destination, and congure the scan settings as necessary. Basic

Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

5Specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail.

To specify subject/message

1Select <Subject/Message> in the <Send Settings> tab.

2Select <Subject>.

3Enter the subject, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

4Select <Message>.

5Enter the message, and select <Apply>.

6Select <Apply>.

To specify reply-to address

Specify the reply-to address when you want to notify the recipient of an e-mail address different from that of

the machine as the reply-to address. Select the target reply-to address from the destinations registered in the

Scanning

320

Address Book, and specify it. If the destination has not been registered in the Address Book, see

Registering Destinations(P. 179) .

1Select <Reply To> in the <Send Settings> tab.

2Select <Specify from Address Book>.

3Select the check box for the desired reply-to address, and select <Apply>.

To specify priority

1Select <Priority> in the <Send Settings> tab.

2Select a priority level.

6Select <Start>.

●If the <Conrm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select

<Start Scanning>.

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 303)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the e-mails are sent.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

select <Scan Next>.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Start Sending>.

➠The e-mails are sent.

If the <SMTP Authentication> screen appears

●Enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.

●If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

●If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used

Settings(P. 171)

●If you want to specify the e-mail sender name: <Register Unit Name>(P. 560)

Scanning

321

LINKS

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 304)

Scanning

322

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)

6FR9-068

To scan from a computer, you can use MF Scan Utility or an application such as an image processing or word

processing application. If you use ScanGear MF supplied with the machine, you can congure advanced scan settings

( Using ScanGear MF(P. 326) ).

●When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. Entering Sleep

Mode(P. 177)

Scanning Using MF Scan Utility

MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan

documents or images to a computer. You can forward the scanned data to a specied

application, or attach it to an e-mail message. For more information, click [Instructions]

on MF Scan Utility.

●If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual

website.

Scanning Using an Application

You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or

image-processing application, and load the images directly into the application.

You do not need to start another application to scan. Scanning Documents

from an Application(P. 324)

Scanning

323

Scanning Documents from an Application

6FR9-069

You can scan originals from applications such as image-processing or word-

processing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application,

allowing you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure

varies depending on the application.

●The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA*. For more information, see the instruction manual

for your application.

*TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an

integrated standard in Windows.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

●The second or subsequent originals may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed

depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one original at a time.

●When <Auto Online> is set to <Off>, you must select <Scan> <Remote Scanner> in the Home screen to

bring the machine online. <Auto Online>(P. 510)

2From the application, select the start scan command.

●The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more

information, see the instruction manual for your application.

3Select the scanner driver for this machine.

●Select ScanGear MF or WIA. If you select ScanGear MF, you can congure advanced scan settings.

4Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

5Click [Scan].

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwarded to an application.

How to use ScanGear MF

●Click on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.

Scanning

324

LINKS

Using ScanGear MF(P. 326)

Scanning

325

Using ScanGear MF

6FR9-06A

ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear

MF to congure advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of

starting ScanGear MF differs depending of the way of scanning from the computer.

Starting from MF Scan Utility

When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For more information, click

[Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

●If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual

website.

Starting from an application

To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as

scanner driver. Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 324)

Functions of ScanGear MF

●Previewing the image before scanning

●Specifying the scanning area

●Adjusting the detailed image quality

How to use ScanGear MF

●Click on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.

Scanning

326

Using WSD

6FR9-06C

"WSD (Web Services on Devices)" is a function to search devices located on the network. Using WSD enables you to

automatically nd the machine on the network from a computer, and start scanning the original on the machine. This

function is called "WSD Scan." You need to complete some procedures before using WSD Scan. Preparing for WSD

Scan(P. 327)

◼Preparing for WSD Scan

From the control panel

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <WSD Settings>.

3Select <On> in <Use WSD Scanning> and then select <On> in <Use Computer

Scanning>.

4Select <Apply>.

5Select <OK>.

6Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

From a computer

7Click [Start] [Devices and Printers].

8Click [Add a device].

Scanning

327

9Select this machine and click [Next].

●Follow the on-screen instructions to operate.

●If this machine is not displayed, a Firewall setting problem may exist. For more information, see the

instruction manual of the computer.

Scanning

328

Scanning Originals Using WSD (WSD Scan)

6FR9-06E

This section describes how to scan originals from a computer using WSD.

From the control panel

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 137)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

3Select <Remote Scanner>.

➠Now you are ready for scanning from your computer.

From a computer

4Click [Start] [All Programs] [Windows Fax and Scan].

5Click [Scan].

6Click [New Scan].

Scanning

329

●When the [Select Device] dialog box is displayed, select the machine and click [OK].

7From the [Source] drop-down list, select the location where the original is placed.

●When placing the original on the platen glass, select [Flatbed]. When placing in the feeder, select [Feeder

(Scan one side)].

8Specify the scan settings as necessary.

●Selecting the type of original from the [Prole] drop-down list enables you to make adjustments for the

optimal image quality. For originals mainly consisting of text, select [Document]. For originals consisting of

photographs only, select [Photo (Default)].

●From the [File type] drop-down list, select the le format for the saved image of the scanned original.

●To check the scanned image with the specied settings reected, click [Preview].

9Click [Scan].

➠Scanning an original starts.

Scanning

330

●When scanning is complete, the scanned document is displayed in the list of les on the [Windows Fax and

Scan] screen and saved in the [Scanned Documents] folder of [Documents].

Registering frequently used scan settings

●If you always scan with the same settings, follow the procedures below to register the settings. You

can easily and conveniently recall them when scanning.

Select [Add prole] from the [Prole] drop-down list Specify the scan settings you want to register

Enter a name in the [Prole name] text box Click [Save Prole]

Sending the document to a computer using WSD

●You can also send the scanned document to computers on the network that support WSD. In this

case, select <Computer> on the Main Menu select the computer you want to send.

The [Windows Fax and Scan] screen and the folder open in the computer, and the scanned document

is displayed.

Scanning

331

Linking with Mobile Devices

Linking with Mobile Devices .................................................................................................................... 333

Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 334

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 335

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 337

Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 341

Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 343

Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 348

Scanning with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 351

Faxing with AirPrint ...................................................................................................................................... 353

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 355

Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 356

Printing with Default Print Service (Android) .................................................................................................. 358

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 359

Linking with Mobile Devices

332

Linking with Mobile Devices

6FR9-06F

Linking the machine with mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate

application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile

devices via remote control to conrm printing status and change the settings of the machine.

Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 334)

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 337)

Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 341)

Using AirPrint(P. 343)

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

Printing with Default Print Service (Android)(P. 358)

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 359)

●Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.

●When [Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] or [Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] is enabled in

Security Policy ( Security Policy(P. 446) ), you can use neither Mopria® or AirPrint.

Linking with Mobile Devices

333

Connecting with Mobile Devices

6FR9-06H

There are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and

communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the

communication environment and the device you are using. Perform communication with mobile devices from <Mobile

Portal> ( Home Screen(P. 124) ).

◼Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router

Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 335)

◼Connecting Directly

Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately

connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment. Connecting Directly (Access Point

Mode)(P. 337)

Linking with Mobile Devices

334

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)

6FR9-06J

If a wireless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication

with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to

connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or

contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN. Setting Up the Network

Environment(P. 15)

●To perform the procedures below, use the IPv4 address. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

●Select <LAN Connection> and proceed with the procedure, if the <Direct Connection> screen is displayed

after <Mobile Portal> is selected in the procedure below.

●For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting

procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://

global.canon/gomp/).

◼Connecting Manually

1Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.

◼Connecting Using a QR Code

1Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <QR Code>.

3Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device. Utilizing the Machine through

Applications(P. 341)

4Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.

Linking with Mobile Devices

335

◼Connecting Using the NFC (Android)

Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>. <Use NFC>(P. 592)

1Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device. Utilizing the Machine through

Applications(P. 341)

2Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.

3Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine. Operation

Panel(P. 113)

Linking with Mobile Devices

336

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)

6FR9-06K

1660-068

Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile

device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without dicult

settings.

Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 337)

Connecting Directly(P. 338)

Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)

Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order.

Check the network settings of the machine.

●Set the IPv4 address. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Preparing the mobile device

●Congure settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.

Put the machine into the connection standby status.

●<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> set

<Use Direct Connection> to <On>.

Specifying the value for time until auto termination

●You can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.

<Direct Connection Termination>(P. 475)

Connecting multiple mobile devices at the same time

●Congure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily. <Access Point Mode Settings>(P. 475)

Linking with Mobile Devices

337

Canon PRINT Business

●For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting

procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://

global.canon/gomp/).

Connecting Directly

●It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.

◼Connecting Manually

1Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.

2Select <Connect>.

3Congure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key

information that appear on the screen.

4When the target operation is completed, select <Disconnect>.

◼Connecting Using a QR Code

1Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.

2Select <Connect>.

3Select <QR Code>.

4Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device. Utilizing the Machine through

Applications(P. 341)

5Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.

Linking with Mobile Devices

338

6When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.

◼Connecting Using the NFC (Android)

Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>. <Use NFC>(P. 592)

1Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

●When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.

2Select <Connect>.

3Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device. Utilizing the Machine through

Applications(P. 341)

4Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.

5Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine. Operation

Panel(P. 113)

6When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.

●Select <Connection Information> on the <Direct Connection> screen to check the connected mobile device.

●When <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd> is set to <On>, it is not necessary to perform the operation of

selecting <Connect>. <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd>(P. 475)

●While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the

mobile device you are using.

Linking with Mobile Devices

339

●If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and

network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.

●If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during

communication by direct connection, the communication may end.

●Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.

●If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN

when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection

process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the

machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication

may end.

●When you nish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the

mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.

●If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may

prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.

Linking with Mobile Devices

340

Utilizing the Machine through Applications

6FR9-06L

Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various

applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the

application, and the situation.

◼Using Canon PRINT Business

This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When

printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating

systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://

global.canon/gomp/).

●You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.

◼Printing with Canon Print Service

You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on

supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

◼Using Mopria®

The machine also supports Mopria®. Mopria® enables you to perform printing and other operations from a mobile

Android device using common operations and settings regardless of the manufacturer or model. For example,

businesses using multiple Mopria® compatible devices from different manufacturers can print from the same printer

and businesspeople on-the-go can use a Mopria® compatible device with a local certied printer without having to

install a separate application. For more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://

www.mopria.org.

Conrming Mopria® Settings

Registration] [Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria]

check box is selected [OK]

Linking with Mobile Devices

341

◼Printing with Google Cloud Print

You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device

without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

Linking with Mobile Devices

342

Using AirPrint

6FR9-06R

This section describes the settings required to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.

AirPrint Settings

Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 343)

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 346)

Functions of the AirPrint

Printing with AirPrint(P. 348)

Scanning with AirPrint(P. 351)

Faxing with AirPrint(P. 353)

Troubleshooting

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 355)

Conguring AirPrint Settings

You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying

the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

●If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.

3Select [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Specify the required settings.

Linking with Mobile Devices

343

[Use AirPrint]

Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.

[Printer Name]

Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (

Conguring DNS(P. 57) ), the registered name is displayed.

[Location]

Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information Settings]

([Device Management] in [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.

[Latitude]

Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.

[Longitude]

Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.

6Click [OK].

If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings in <Network> are set to <On>.

●Use HTTP

●IPP Print Settings

●IPv4 Use mDNS

●IPv6 Use mDNS

●Use Network Link Scan

●If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the

Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> (

Conguring DNS(P. 57) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac

again.

●Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.

Linking with Mobile Devices

344

◼Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint

If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, congure the

necessary setting using the operation panel.

Changing Print and Fax Settings

To perform printing or fax sending with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.

Turning the Function On/Off

You can specify whether to perform printing and fax sending with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> Set

Changing the TLS Setting

You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing or sending faxes with

AirPrint. The factory default setting is <Off>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> Set

Changing the Scan Setting

Congure the scan setting using AirPrint.

Set the Function to Enable or Disable

You can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.

●If you set this item to <On>, <Use HTTP> under <Network> is set to <On>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan

Settings> Set <Use Network Link Scan> to <Off> or <On> <Apply>

Change TLS Settings

You can specify whether or not to encrypt TLS communications when scanning data using AirPrint. The factory

default setting is <Off>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan

Settings> Set <Use TLS> to <Off> or <On> <Apply>

Linking with Mobile Devices

345

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint

You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view

information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function

settings.

1Select [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac

you are using.

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

2Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].

3Click [Options & Supplies].

4Click [Show Printer Webpage].

5Log in to the Remote UI.

●To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.

◼AirPrint-Dedicated Page

When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.

Linking with Mobile Devices

346

[AirPrint Settings]

Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the

machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.

[Other Settings]

[Print Security Settings]

Congure the print security settings using TLS or authentication.

[Scan Security Settings]

Congure the scan security settings using TLS.

[TLS Settings]

Enables you to change the key and certicate used for TLS. Conguring the Key and Certicate for

TLS(P. 391)

[Key and Certicate Settings]

Enables you to generate and install a key and certicate, or request a certicate to be issued.

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

[Consumables Information]

Enables you to check the information of each paper source and consumables of the machine and the device

version.

Trademarks

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Linking with Mobile Devices

347

Printing with AirPrint

6FR9-06S

You can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 348)

Printing from a Mac(P. 349)

System Requirements

One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.

●iPad (all models)

●iPhone (3GS or later)

●iPod touch (3rd generation or later)

●Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*

*OS X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly

●An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

●For printing, it is required to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>. Changing the Setting of Functions

Available with AirPrint(P. 345)

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15) .

●For information on the Direct Connection, see Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 337) .

Linking with Mobile Devices

348

2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.

3Tap [Print].

4Select this machine from [Printer].

●The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.

●The screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support

AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6Tap [Print].

➠Printing starts.

Checking the print status

●During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].

Printing from a Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15) .

2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual or Help for the application you are using.

4Select the machine in the print dialog box.

●The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.

Linking with Mobile Devices

349

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6Click [Print].

➠Printing starts.

Linking with Mobile Devices

350

Scanning with AirPrint

6FR9-06U

You can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac.

System Requirements

To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed. To scan using TLS, you need a Mac with

OS X 10.11 or later installed.

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

●An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

●For scanning, it is required to set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>. Changing the Setting of Functions

Available with AirPrint(P. 345)

●Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function ( <Auto

Online>(P. 510) ) is set to <Off>, rst put the machine into online state by selecting <Scan> <Remote

Scanner>, then start the procedure for scanning.

●You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing any

operation whatsoever.

Scanning from a Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15) .

2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

3Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].

Linking with Mobile Devices

351

4Click [Scan].

5Click [Open Scanner].

➠The [Scanner] screen is displayed.

6Congure the scan settings as necessary.

7Click [Scan].

➠The original is scanned, and the image is displayed.

Linking with Mobile Devices

352

Faxing with AirPrint

6FR9-06W

You can send faxes from a Mac in almost the same way as when you print from a Mac.

System Requirements

To send faxes with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

●An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

●For faxing, it is required to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>. Changing the Setting of Functions

Available with AirPrint(P. 345)

Faxing from a Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 15) .

2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

4Select this machine in the print dialog box.

➠The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select the fax driver of this machine in this step.

Linking with Mobile Devices

353

5Specify the destination.

6Click [Fax].

➠Fax sending starts.

Linking with Mobile Devices

354

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used

6FR9-06X

If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.

●Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10

seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.

●Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.

●Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may

take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.

●Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.

●Make sure that the machine is congured to enable execution of jobs from a computer even when no department

ID and password are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 371)

●For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sucient amount

remaining in the toner cartridges. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 346)

●For scanning, make sure that the machine's setting for Network Link Scan is <On>. Changing the Setting of

Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 345)

Linking with Mobile Devices

355

Using Google Cloud Print

6FR9-06Y

Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or

computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional

printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.

Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 356)

Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

●An environment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and

when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding

internet connection.

●Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.

●Google Cloud Print does not support printing from an IPv6 address.

●A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on

the Google website.

Checking the Settings of the Machine

Check the following before conguring cloud printing.

●Make sure that the IPv4 address is specied for the machine, and that the machine is able to communicate with

computers on a network.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 18)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

●Check whether the date and time of the machine are specied correctly. Setting the Date/Time(P. 13)

●If Department ID Management is set, make sure that you can print from a computer without entering a Department

ID or PIN. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 371)

Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print

Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print from anywhere using the service.

Linking with Mobile Devices

356

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].

4Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].

5Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box [OK].

6Click [Register] in [Registration Status].

Re-Registering the Machine

●To re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.

7Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].

8Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.

➠Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google

Chrome™.

●For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud

Print home page.

Conguring Settings on the Operation Panel

●You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from <Menu> in the Home screen. <Google Cloud

Print Settings>(P. 486)

Registering from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome

●You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the

conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Press <Yes> to complete the registration.

●For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.

Linking with Mobile Devices

357

Printing with Default Print Service (Android)

6FR9-070

If your Android terminal supports Default Print Service, you can print from the Default Print Service of your Android

terminal.

To print on the machine using Default Print Service, it is necessary to enable Mopria® settings.

Conrming Mopria®settings

Registration] [Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] select the [Use Mopria] check

box [OK]

●In order to use the Canon machine/printer from the Default Print Service of your Android terminal, you must

rst congure the following settings on your Android terminal.

●Enable Default Print Service.

●Disable or uninstall Mopria®.

●Disable or uninstall Canon Print Service.

Linking with Mobile Devices

358

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control

6FR9-071

You can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can conrm the machine status or

perform various settings from a mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be displayed properly for

some devices and environments.

Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices

Enter the IP address of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, conrm the IP

address set for the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 39) ). If it is unknown, ask your network administrator.

1Start the Web browser of the mobile device.

2Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.

●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.

Example: http://[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/

●For a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to

conrm all of the items, see the "PC Version."

LINKS

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 429)

Linking with Mobile Devices

359

Managing the Machine

Managing the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 362

Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 364

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN ...................................................................................................... 365

Setting the Department ID Management ..................................................................................................... 367

Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 373

LDAP Server Authentication .......................................................................................................................... 375

Conguring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 379

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 381

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 382

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 385

Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 388

Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 389

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .................................................................................................. 391

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 394

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 397

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 400

Conguring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 402

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 409

Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 413

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions ......................................................................... 415

Restricting Use of the Address Book ...................................................................................................... 416

Limiting Available Destinations .............................................................................................................. 418

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions ................................................................................................... 420

Restricting Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................... 422

Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 423

Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 425

Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 426

Increasing the Security of Documents ............................................................................................................. 427

Generating a Device Signature Key ............................................................................................................... 428

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 429

Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 430

Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 433

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 439

Registering Destinations from Remote UI .................................................................................................... 442

Security Policy .............................................................................................................................................. 446

Managing the Machine

360

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data .......................................................................................................... 452

Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 455

Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 457

Managing the Machine

361

Managing the Machine

6FR9-072

To reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or

unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should

manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.

◼Conguring the Basic Management System

Setting Access Privileges(P. 364) Conguring the Network Security Settings(P. 379)

◼Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse

Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 413) Increasing the Security of Documents(P. 427)

◼Ensuring Effective Management

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 429)

Managing the Machine

362

◼Managing the System Conguration and Settings

Updating the Firmware(P. 455) Initializing Settings(P. 457)

Managing the Machine

363

Setting Access Privileges

6FR9-073

Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.

Access privileges are set separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are

set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.

Set up an account with full access privileges called "System Manager ID" for a system manager. Registering an account

called "Department ID" allows you to manage general users. Using a Department ID, you can set a PIN for using this

machine as well as keep track of the number of pages printed for each department ID. And by setting a Remote UI

Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.

System Manager ID

System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to

log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in order to access items that requires

administrator privileges such as <Network> and <Management Settings>. We recommend that you set and

System Manager ID can be registered. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 365)

Department ID (Department ID Management)

You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register

multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a login

screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information

such as how many pages have been printed for each Department ID can be compiled. Setting the

Department ID Management(P. 367)

Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)

This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. Setting a

Remote UI PIN(P. 373)

Authentication Settings for Send Function (Authorized Send)

If your system has an LDAP server installed, you can set LDAP server authentication to be carried out when the

fax or scan function is used. LDAP Server Authentication(P. 375)

Managing the Machine

364

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN

6FR9-074

Set the system manager account, "System Manager ID." You can also set a PIN for the System Manager ID. If the

System Manager ID is specied, you can access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network>

and <Management Settings>, only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System

Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know

the System Manager ID and PIN.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Management Settings>.

If the System Manager ID has already been set

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <User Management> <System Manager Information Settings>.

4Select <System Manager ID and PIN>.

5Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.

●Specify the <System Manager ID> <System Manager PIN>.

●Enter numbers for each item, and select <Apply>.

●The Conrm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.

●You cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

●To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in and select

<Apply> with the elds blank.

Setting the System Manager Name

1Select <System Manager Name>.

2Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 133) .

Managing the Machine

365

●Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help

line.

Conguring settings via the Remote UI

●Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration] [User Management]

[System Manager Information] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.

●By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,

Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can

page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 436)

Logging in to the machine

●If you try to access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network> and <Management

Settings>, when the System Manager ID is specied, the Login screen is displayed. Logging in to the

Machine(P. 135)

●You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in using the Remote UI in System Manager

Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 364)

Setting the Department ID Management(P. 367)

Managing the Machine

366

Setting the Department ID Management

6FR9-075

You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the

machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a login screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own

Department ID and PIN to use the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as

printing, is recorded for each Department ID. To congure Department ID Management, register department IDs as

necessary and then enable Department ID Management function. When you want to enable Department ID

Management for jobs from a computer, you need to congure additional settings on the computer side.

Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 367)

Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 369)

Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 370)

Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 371)

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].

4Register or edit Department IDs.

Registering a Department ID

1Click [Register New Department].

2Specify the required settings.

Managing the Machine

367

[Department ID]

Enter the Department ID number to be registered.

[Set PIN]

To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text boxes.

[Restrict Functions]

You can restrict the number of pages to print and the available functions for departments to be

registered. To restrict the number of pages to print, select the check box for the target type, and enter

the appropriate number of pages in [Number of Pages]. Select the check box for the target functions to

restrict functions.

●If the [Restrict Scan] check box is selected, the Save to USB Memory Device, Send E-mail, and Save to

Shared Folder or FTP Server functions are all restricted. You can also restrict other methods that scan

documents by importing them to a computer, but in that case you cannot block access for each

Department ID ( Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 371) ).

3Click [OK].

Editing the settings of the registered Department ID

1Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.

2Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].

Deleting a Department ID

●Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].

[Department ID Page Total]

●You can check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date on a department ID basis.

Managing the Machine

368

●If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click

[Clear Count] [OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts]

[OK].

Using control cards

●When the optional Copy Card Reader-F is attached to the machine, Department IDs will be registered

automatically.

●Do not delete the registered department IDs. The control cards that correspond to the deleted department

IDs will become unavailable.

●You cannot use [Restrict Functions] to restrict the allowable number of pages to print.

Enabling the Department ID Management

After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Department ID Management] check box.

[Department ID Management]

Managing the Machine

369

Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID

Management, clear the check box.

●For information about the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]/[Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs]/[Allow

Black & White Copy Jobs] check boxes, see Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 371) .

6Click [OK].

Using the operation panel

●Department ID Management settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<Department ID Management>(P. 590)

Logging in to the machine

●When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the login screen is

displayed. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer

When you want to enable Department ID Management for jobs from a computer, you need to specify the department

ID and PIN using the driver pre-installed on each computer.

●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682)

2Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3Click the [Device Settings] tab.

4Select [Department ID Management] under [User Management].

5Click [Settings] found to the right.

6Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].

Managing the Machine

370

[Allow PIN Setting]

Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.

[Department ID]

Enter the Department ID number.

[PIN]

Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.

[Verify]

Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the

computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.

[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Sending Faxes]

Select the check box to display the [Conrm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you send job from

a computer.

[Do Not Use Department ID Management When B&W Printing]

Select the check box to send black and white print data as an unknown ID job.

[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]

Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.

7Click [OK].

Logging in to the machine

●When you try to send job from a computer when Department ID

Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed

(unless the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Conrm

Department ID/PIN When Sending Faxes] check box is cleared):

Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown

If you do not change the default settings, any user can print from a computer, scan (via <Computer> and <Remote

Scanner>), send a PC fax from a computer, or make black and white copies without entering an ID and PIN even when

Department ID Management is enabled for the machine. You can change the default settings so that the machine

cannot be used for these functions without a correct ID and PIN.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

Managing the Machine

371

3Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].

4Click [Edit].

5Clear the check boxes as necessary.

[Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]

In order to send job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the

correct ID and PIN ( Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 370) ).

However, if the check box is selected for this setting, jobs are executed even when the ID and PIN are not

entered. When you want to congure a setting so that no jobs are executed unless the correct department ID

and PIN are entered, clear the check box.

[Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs]

If the check box is selected, you can select <Computer> or <Remote Scanner> on the main screen and scan

documents into a computer anytime. If the check box is cleared, you cannot scan documents into a computer

if Department ID Management is enabled. It is not possible to restrict scanning of documents into a

computer for individual department IDs.

[Allow Black & White Copy Jobs]

If the check box is selected when Department ID Management is enabled, you can copy in black and white

without entering the correct ID and PIN. Clear the check box to require entering an ID and PIN.

6Click [OK].

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 364)

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 365)

Managing the Machine

372

Setting a Remote UI PIN

6FR9-076

You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.

●When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required. Setting the Department ID

Management(P. 367)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Management Settings>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <License/Other> <Remote UI Settings> <Restrict Access>.

4Select <On>.

5Specify the Remote UI Access PIN.

●Enter a PIN, and select <Apply>.

●The Conrm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.

●You cannot register a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

●Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, use the procedure above to set a new PIN.

If <Management Settings> are initialized

●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. <Initialize

Menu>(P. 597)

Managing the Machine

373

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 364)

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 365)

Managing the Machine

374

LDAP Server Authentication

6FR9-077

If your system has an LDAP server installed, you can ensure that LDAP server authentication is carried out when the

send function is used. This enables you to prevent unauthorized use by third parties and information disclosure. Once

the authorization settings are enabled, the Authorized Send screen appears when the fax or scan function is used and

operation can only continue if it is correctly authorized by the LDAP server. Use the settings described here to

congure LDAP server authentication. For more information about registering the server to be used for

authentication, see Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65) .

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [TX Settings] [Authentication Settings for Send Function].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use User Authentication] check box and select whether a conrmation

screen is displayed at logout.

[Use User Authentication]

Select the check box to display the Authorized Send login screen when the fax or scan function is used (LDAP

server authentication).

[Display Conrmation Screen When Logging Out]

Select the check box to display a screen that allows you to selectively log out when you are logged on for

both Authorized Send and Department ID Management. If you clear this check box, no selection screen is

displayed when you log out and you are logged out from both Authorized Send and Department ID

Management.

Managing the Machine

375

6Congure the settings for sending e-mail/I-Faxes.

[E-Mail/I-Fax Sending]

Select whether to allow sending e-mail and I-Faxes.

[Do Not Allow] Blocks sending e-mail and I-Faxes. <E-Mail> and <I-Fax> in the scan function can no

longer be used.

[Allow] Permits outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes.

[Only Allow Sending to Myself] Blocks all outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes other than those to users with authorized e-

mail addresses. The e-mail addresses of authorized users must be registered on the

LDAP server.

[Authentication Method]

When [Allow] or [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected in [E-Mail/I-Fax Sending], this allows you to specify

whether an authentication screen is shown on the SMTP server when e-mail is sent.

[Display the authentication screen using the same

user name as when the sending operation started]

Displays the authentication screen showing the same user

name and password entered in the Authorized Send login

screen.

[Display the authentication screen without any

authentication information]

Displays the authentication screen with the user name and

password elds blank.

[Use device-specic authentication information and

do not display the authentication screen]

No authentication screen is displayed when e-mail or I-Faxes are

sent. Authorization on the SMTP server is carried out using the

user name and password set in [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings]

Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings(P. 90) .

[Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender]

Select the check box when the e-mail address of an authorized user will be set as the sender. The e-mail

addresses of authorized users must be registered on the LDAP server. If you clear this check box, the e-mail

address set in the [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] is set as the sender.

7Congure the le transfer settings (for saving to shared folders and FTP servers).

Managing the Machine

376

[File Sending]

Select whether to allow saving to shared folders and FTP servers.

[Do Not Allow] Blocks saving to shared folders and FTP servers. <File> in the scan

function can no longer be used.

[Allow] Saving to shared folders and FTP servers is not blocked.

[Only Allow Sending to Myself or

Specied Folder]

Blocks all saving to shared folders and FTP servers other than specied

folders. The data is saved to folders registered on the LDAP server or to

the folder specied in [Specify Destination Folder].

When [Allow] is specied in [File Sending]

[Authentication Method]

Allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.

[Display the authentication screen using the same

authentication information as when the sending operation

started]

Displays the authentication screen showing the same user

name and password entered in the Authorized Send login

screen.

[Display the authentication screen without any

authentication information]

Displays the authentication screen with the user name and

password elds blank.

[Use the authentication information from the address book

and do not display the authentication screen]

No authentication screen is displayed when sending.

Authentication is carried out on the server using the user

name and password set in the Address Book.

When [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specied Folder] is specied in [File Sending]

[Authentication Method]

Allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.

[Use the same authentication information as

when the sending operation started]

Carries out authorization on the server using the user name and

password entered in the Authorized Send login screen. Selecting the

[Display Authentication Screen] check box displays the authentication

screen with this user name and password already entered when you

send the data.

[Display the authentication screen without any

authentication information]

Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password

elds blank.

Managing the Machine

377

[Specify Destination Folder]

Selecting this check box allows you to specify the folder where the data is saved. If the check box is not selected,

the save destination is set based on authorized user information registered on the LDAP server.

[Host Name] Enter a host name for the shared folder or FTP server.

[Folder Path]

Enter a path name for the save destination folder (excluding the host name). When the [Add

User Name] check box is selected, the user name used for authentication on the LDAP

server is added to the path.

8Congure the settings for sending faxes.

[Fax Sending]

Select whether to allow sending faxes. [Do Not Allow] prevents the user from sending faxes from the

machine.

9Click [OK].

LINKS

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

Managing the Machine

378

Conguring the Network Security Settings

6FR9-078

Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,

and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these

attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.

Firewall Settings

Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting

communication only to devices that have a specic IP address or MAC address. Restricting Communication

by Using Firewalls(P. 381)

Changing Port Numbers

A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are

predetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication

devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.

Changing Port Numbers(P. 388)

Proxy Settings

When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy

server. When the proxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be

expected to be enhanced. Setting a Proxy(P. 389)

TLS Encrypted Communication

TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web

browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine

from a computer via the Remote UI. Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

Managing the Machine

379

IPSec Communication

While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,

IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system

than TLS. Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 402)

IEEE 802.1X Authentication

IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively

managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must

go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.

Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication

to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)

blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client

device. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 409)

Managing the Machine

380

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls

6FR9-079

Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are

connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that

restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 382)

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 385)

Managing the Machine

381

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings

6FR9-07A

You can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP

addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].

4Click [Edit] for the target IP address lter.

●Select the lter that matches the target IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer,

select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].

5Specify the settings for packet ltering.

●Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then

specify IP addresses for exceptions.

Managing the Machine

382

1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].

[Use Filter]

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

[Default Policy]

Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.

[Reject]

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from

devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications

with other devices are prohibited.

[Allow]

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from

devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications

with other devices are permitted.

2Specify address exceptions.

●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click

[Add].

Check for entry errors

●If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,

in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.

<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 485)

<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 485)

Entry form for IP addresses

Description Example

Entering a single address

IPv4:

Delimit numbers with periods. 192.168.0.10

IPv6:

Delimit alphanumeric characters with

colons.

fe80::10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

Specifying a range of addresses with a prex Enter the address, followed by a slash and

a number indicating the prex length.

192.168.0.32/27

fe80::1234/64

When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter

●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.

Deleting an IP address from exceptions

●Select an IP address and click [Delete].

Managing the Machine

383

3Click [OK].

6Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IP address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 485)

<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 485)

LINKS

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 385)

Managing the Machine

384

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings

6FR9-07C

You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC

addresses but permit other communications.

This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].

4Click [Edit] for the target MAC address lter.

●To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from

a computer, select [Inbound Filter].

5Specify the settings for packet ltering.

●Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the

machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.

Managing the Machine

385

1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].

[Use Filter]

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

[Default Policy]

Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.

[Reject]

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from

devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].

Communications with other devices are prohibited.

[Allow]

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from

devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].

Communications with other devices are permitted.

2Specify address exceptions.

●Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].

●You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.

Check for entry errors

●If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the

Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. <MAC Address

Filter>(P. 486)

When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter

●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.

Deleting a MAC address from exceptions

●Select a MAC address and click [Delete].

Managing the Machine

386

3Click [OK].

6Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen. <MAC Address

Filter>(P. 486)

LINKS

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 382)

Managing the Machine

387

Changing Port Numbers

6FR9-07E

Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for

major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are

well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has

been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.

Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.

●To change the port number for proxy server, see Setting a Proxy(P. 389) .

●To change the port number for LDAP server, see Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65) .

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Preferences> <Network>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Port Number Settings>.

4Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.

Learning more about the protocols

●<LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

●<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 425)

●<POP3>/<SMTP> Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings(P. 90)

●<SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 70)

●<Multicast Discovery> Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 75)

●<FTP> Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location(P. 98)

5Enter the port number, and select <Apply>.

6Select <OK>.

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

LINKS

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Managing the Machine

388

Setting a Proxy

6FR9-07F

A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other

devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The

client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the

resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks

but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use

Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make

sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and

password for authentication.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [Proxy Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use Proxy]

Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.

[HTTP Proxy Server Address]

Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.

[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]

Managing the Machine

389

Change the port number as necessary.

[Use Proxy within Same Domain]

Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same

domain.

[Use Proxy Authentication]

To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the

user name in the [User Name] text box.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and

enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.

6Click [OK].

LINKS

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

Managing the Machine

390

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS

6FR9-07H

You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer

Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when

the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/

PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote UI, you need to specify a "key and certicate"

(server certicate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or install the key and certicate for TLS before

enabling TLS ( Management Functions(P. 666) ).

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [TLS Settings].

4Click [Key and Certicate].

5Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.

Viewing details of a certicate

●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link

under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

6Click [Edit].

7Congure detailed TLS settings.

Managing the Machine

391

[Allowed Versions]

Specify [Maximum Version] and [Minimum Version] of TLS.

[Algorithm Settings]

Select the check box for the encryption algorithm to use for TLS.

8Click [OK].

9Select [License/Other] [Remote UI Settings].

10 Click [Edit].

11 Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].

Managing the Machine

392

12 Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen. <Remote

UI>(P. 594)

Starting the Remote UI with TLS

●If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the

security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed

to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

Using TLS to encrypt e-mail/I-Fax communication

●If the SMTP server and the POP3 server support TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with these

servers ( Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings(P. 90) ). For more information about the

SMTP server and the POP3 server, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

LINKS

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 394)

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 397)

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 400)

Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 402)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 409)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 70)

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 65)

Managing the Machine

393

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

6FR9-07J

A key and certicate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via

Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certicates

are used with the key and certicate generated in "Network Communication."

●If you want to use a server certicate that has a CA signature, you can generate a CSR together with a key

instead of a certicate. Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 397)

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key and certicate

●Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certicate you want to delete click [OK].

●A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or

"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key

and certicate before deleting it.

5Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].

6Specify settings for the key and certicate.

Managing the Machine

394

[Key Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a

list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Key Algorithm]

Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-

down list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level

becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.

●When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the

key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].

[Certicate Settings]

[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity start date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day.

[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity end date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than

[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"

is often abbreviated as "CN."

Managing the Machine

395

7Click [OK].

●Generating a key and certicate may take some time.

●After the key and certicate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.

LINKS

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 400)

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 402)

Managing the Machine

396

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

6FR9-07K

Because certicates generated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result

depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certicate authority issue the certicate with the CA

signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certicate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from

Remote UI. When the certicate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.

Generating a Key and CSR(P. 397)

Registering a Certicate to a Key(P. 399)

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

Generating a Key and CSR

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key and certicate

●Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certicate you want to delete click [OK].

●A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or

"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and

certicate before deleting it.

5Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].

6Specify settings for the key and CSR.

Managing the Machine

397

[Key Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a

list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Key Algorithm]

Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-

down list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.

However, the security is tighter.

●When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the

key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].

[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"

is often abbreviated as "CN."

7Click [OK].

●Generating a key and CSR may take some time.

Managing the Machine

398

8Click [Store in File].

●A dialog box for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].

➠The CSR le is stored on the computer.

9Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority.

Registering a Certicate to a Key

The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certicate issued from the certicate authority based on the

CSR is registered in the key. Once the certication authority has issued the certicate, register it using the procedure

below.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] required to register the certicate.

5Click [Register Certicate].

6Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing request, and click [Register].

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 394)

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 400)

Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 402)

Managing the Machine

399

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

6FR9-07L

You can obtain the key and certicate, and the CA certicate from a certication authority (CA) for use with the

machine. Install and register the obtained key and certicate le and CA certicate le in this machine using Remote

UI. Check the key and certicate, and CA certicate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (

Management Functions(P. 666) ).

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate

Settings].

●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to install a key and certicate, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA

certicate.

4Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].

Deleting a registered key and certicate or CA certicate

●Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certicate or CA certicate you want to delete click [OK]. You

cannot delete the preinstalled CA certicates.

●A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or

"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and

certicate before deleting it.

Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates

●Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate

again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.

5Click [Install].

Managing the Machine

400

Deleting the key and certicate le or CA certicate le

●Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete click [OK].

6Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].

➠The key and certicate le or the CA certicate le is installed on the machine from a computer.

7Register the key and certicate or CA certicate.

Registering a key and certicate

1Click [Register] on the right of the key and certicate le you want to register.

2Enter the name of the key and password.

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key to be registered.

[Password]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be registered.

3Click [OK].

Registering a CA certicate

Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate le you want to register.

LINKS

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 394)

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 402)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 409)

Managing the Machine

401

Conguring IPSec Settings

6FR9-07R

Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including

Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail

application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security

system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With

this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check

the system requirements ( Management Functions(P. 666) ) and set the necessary conguration on the computer

before you congure the machine.

Using IPSec with IP address lter

●IP address lter settings are applied before the IPSec policies. Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall

Settings(P. 382)

Conguring IPSec Settings

Before using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists

of the groups of settings described below. After registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.

Selector

Selector denes conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP

addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.

IKE

IKE congures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the

authentication method selected.

[Pre-Shared Key Method]

This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the

machine and other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before specifying this authentication method (

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391) ).

[Digital Signature Method]

The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.

Generate or install the key and certicate beforehand ( Registering the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication(P. 400) ).

AH/ESP

Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used

at the same time. You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.

Managing the Machine

402

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [IPSec Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].

●If you want the machine to only receive packets that match one of the security policies that you dene in the

steps below, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.

6Click [Register New Policy].

7Specify the Policy Settings.

1In the [Policy Name] text box, enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the

policy.

2Select the [Enable Policy] check box.

8Specify the Selector Settings.

Managing the Machine

403

[Local Address]

Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.

[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.

[IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the

machine.

[IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the

machine.

[Remote Address]

Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.

[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.

[All IPv4 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the

other devices.

[All IPv6 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the

other devices.

[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.

Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.

[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.

Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.

[Addresses to Set Manually]

If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to

apply the policy. You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.

Entering IP addresses

Description Example

Entering a single address IPv4:

Delimit numbers with periods.

192.168.0.10

Managing the Machine

404

Description Example

IPv6:

Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons.

fe80::10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

[Subnet Settings]

When manually specifying IPv4 address, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the

subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").

[Prex Length]

Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prexes. Enter a

range between 0 and 128 as the prex length.

[Local Port]/[Remote Port]

If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or WSD, click the [Single Port] radio

button and enter the appropriate port number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.

IPSec is not applied to the following packets

●Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets

●IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)

●ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets

9Specify the IKE Settings.

[IKE Mode]

The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the

aggressive mode.

[Authentication Method]

Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the

machine. You need to enable TLS for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method]. You need to

generate or install the key and certicate before selecting [Digital Signature Method]. Conguring the

Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

[Valid for]

Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.

[Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group]

Select an algorithm from the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.

Managing the Machine

405

[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.

[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.

[DH Group] Select the Die-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.

Authenticating a machine using a pre-shared key

1Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key

Settings].

2Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].

3Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.

Authenticating a machine using digital signature method

1Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and

Certicate].

2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.

Viewing details of a certicate

●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text

link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

3Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.

10 Specify the IPSec Network Settings.

[Use PFS]

Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances

the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other

devices.

[Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size]

Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select

either or both of the check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is

terminated when either of the conditions has been satised.

[Specify by Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.

[Specify by Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.

Managing the Machine

406

[Select Algorithm]

Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check box(es) depending on the IPSec header and the

algorithm used. AES-GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also

select algorithms for authentication and encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] drop-

down lists.

[ESP Authentication] To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not

Use] if you want to disable the ESP authentication.

[ESP Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to

specify the algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.

[Connection Mode]

The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of

IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated

is not available.

11 Click [OK].

●If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 6.

12 Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].

●Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or

down the order.

Editing a policy

●Click the corresponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.

Deleting a policy

●Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete click [OK].

13 Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Managing the Machine

407

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Menu> in the Home screen. <Use

IPSec>(P. 481)

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

IPSec Policy List(P. 633)

Managing the Machine

408

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings

6FR9-07S

The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server

(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a

device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that

the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,

which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,

a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method

Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certicate or

a CA certicate before conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Registering the Key and Certicate for

Network Communication(P. 400) ).

TLS

The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. A

key and certicate issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when

authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be

used in addition to a CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.

TTLS

This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certicate

for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used

with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391) ).

PEAP

The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.

Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Conguring the Key and

Certicate for TLS(P. 391) ).

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

Managing the Machine

409

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]

text box.

[Use IEEE 802.1X]

Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.

[Login Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.

6Congure the required settings according to the specied authentication method.

Setting TLS

1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].

●You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.

2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use for the client

authentication.

Viewing details of a certicate

●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text

link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

Managing the Machine

410

Setting TTLS/PEAP

1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.

Internal protocol for TTLS

●You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.

2Click [Change User Name/Password].

●To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check

box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.

3Set the user name/password.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new

password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.

4Click [OK].

7Click [OK].

8Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen. <Use IEEE

802.1X>(P. 485)

Managing the Machine

411

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

Managing the Machine

412

Restricting the Machine's Functions

6FR9-07U

Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,

the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions

You can specify the PIN in the Address Book to disable a general user from modifying data or limit destinations

that can be specied for fax sending. You can also disable a user from collectively sending a fax to multiple

destinations (Sequential Broadcast). Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions(P. 415)

Restricting Printing from a Computer

You can limit "printing from computer" only to secure documents so that no print jobs can be executed unless

the PIN is entered on the machine side. Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 422)

Restricting USB Functions

The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as

an information leakage. You can restrict a USB connection with a computer or saving to a USB memory device.

Restricting USB Functions(P. 423)

Disabling HTTP Communication

When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,

you can disable HTTP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port. Disabling HTTP

Communication(P. 425)

Managing the Machine

413

Disabling Remote Management

When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote

UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 426)

Managing the Machine

414

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending

Functions

6FR9-07W

Some cases of information leakage can be prevented by limiting the available fax and e-mail destinations to those

registered in the Address Book or LDAP servers, or by setting a PIN for the Address Book so that unauthorized users

cannot add or edit Address Book entries. You can also avoid sending documents to unintended recipients if the

machine is set to ask you to enter the fax number twice for conrmation.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 418)

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions(P. 420)

Managing the Machine

415

Restricting Use of the Address Book

6FR9-07X

The Address Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new

entries to the Address Book or edit existing entries. Setting a PIN to the Address

Book can reduce the risk of documents being sent to unintended recipients because

changes to the Address Book can only be made by users who know the PIN.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Set Destination>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <Address Book PIN>.

4Specify the PIN.

●Enter the number, and select <Apply>.

●The Conrm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.

●You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".

●To cancel the PIN setting, clear the information you entered in and select <Apply> with the eld blank.

In addition to setting the Address Book PIN, you can further enhance security by performing the following

operations:

●Restricting the addition of new destinations, see Restricting New Destinations that Can Be

Specied(P. 418) .

●Disabling the PC fax function, see Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 420) .

LINKS

Registering Destinations(P. 179)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

Managing the Machine

416

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 87)

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)

Managing the Machine

417

Limiting Available Destinations

6FR9-07Y

By limiting destinations that can be specied to those registered in the Address Book

or LDAP servers, you can reduce the possibility of specifying unintended destinations

and prevent users from leaking information. You can congure the setting to display

the conrmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when specifying a coded

dial number in the Address Book.

Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 418)

Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations(P. 418)

Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 418)

Checking Destinations when Sending Data(P. 419)

Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied

Restrict destinations that can be specied when sending faxes or scanned documents to "those already registered in

the Address Book," "those previously used," or "those searchable from the LDAP servers." When this function is

enabled, the machine prohibits users from entering destinations using the numeric keys, adding new entries to the

Address Book, and editing the existing Address Book entries.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Restrict New

Destinations> <On>

●This function does not limit the available destinations for PC faxing. Restricting Fax Sending from a

Computer(P. 420)

Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations

Prohibits the specication of destinations from the transmission records. Using this restriction prevents destinations

being selected from the transmission records for "Send Fax," "Scan and Send as E-mail" and "Scan and Save to Shared

Folder or FTP Server."

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Restrict Resending from

Log> <On>

Displaying Destinations in Address Book

When using coded dial numbers to specify destinations, you need to precisely remember whose destination (or what

group) is registered in what coded dial number. If you do not remember all these numbers accurately, you may send

your documents to unintended destinations. You can avoid sending data to unintended recipients by conguring the

Managing the Machine

418

machine to display the details of the coded dial number you selected/entered as a sending destination on the screen

before you send documents to that destination.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Conrm When Coded Dial

TX> <On>

Checking Destinations when Sending Data

You can congure a setting so that the destination conrmation screen is displayed when fax, e-mail, or I-Fax sending

starts. If <Only for Sequential Broadcast> is selected, the conrmation screen is displayed only when multiple

destinations are specied.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Conrm Dest. Before

Sending> Select <On> or <Only for Sequential Broadcast>

LINKS

Sending I-Faxes(P. 251)

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server(P. 293)

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 317)

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions(P. 420)

Managing the Machine

419

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions

6FR9-080

You can set various restrictions for sending faxes, which can prevent information leakage to third parties or sending

documents to unintended destinations.

Conrming the Entered Fax Number(P. 420)

Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 420)

Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 420)

Disabling Destination Registration from Logs to the Address Book(P. 421)

Conrming the Entered Fax Number

You can congure the setting to display the conrmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when entering a

destination fax number using the numeric keys.

<On>

Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer

You can prohibit users from PC faxing (faxing from a computer).

Restricting Sequential Broadcasts

You can prohibit a function that collectively sends a fax to multiple destinations (Sequential Broadcast).

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Restrict Sequential

Broadcast> <On>

Managing the Machine

420

Disabling Destination Registration from Logs to the Address Book

You can congure to disable registering destinations from fax send logs to the Address Book.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Register Log Dest to Addr

Book> <Do Not Allow>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings)(P. 232)

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 247)

Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 370)

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 418)

Managing the Machine

421

Restricting Printing from a Computer

6FR9-081

You can drastically reduce information leakage risks by limiting the documents printable from a computer to the

Secure Print documents ( Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 268) ).

<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Managing the Machine

422

Restricting USB Functions

6FR9-082

USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source

of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This

section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory

devices.

Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 423)

Restricting the Scan to USB Function(P. 423)

Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 423)

Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer

You can disable the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the

machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB. This setting does not affect the front USB port, which is for

attaching USB memory devices.

<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings> Select <Off> in <Use as USB

Device> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Restricting the Scan to USB Function

You can disable storing scanned original data into a USB memory device.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> Select <Off>

in <Use Scan Function> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Restricting the USB Print Function

You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> Select <Off>

in <Use Print Function> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

LINKS

Managing the Machine

423

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 272)

Managing the Machine

424

Disabling HTTP Communication

6FR9-083

HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you

are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party

intrusions via the unused HTTP port.

●Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing

with Google Cloud Print.

LINKS

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 429)

Changing Port Numbers(P. 388)

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

Managing the Machine

425

Disabling Remote UI

6FR9-084

The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied by using a Web browser on a computer. To use

the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a

computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the

risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote

UI> Select <Off> in <Use Remote UI> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

LINKS

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 429)

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 425)

Managing the Machine

426

Increasing the Security of Documents

6FR9-085

The machine is equipped with security functions designed to prevent documents from being leaked or tampered with.

Device Signature

The digital signature is added to scanned documents using a key and certicate mechanism in order to prove to

the recipient that the document has been created on the machine. The recipient can verify "the device that

created the document" and "whether the document has been tampered with." Before adding a device

signature, you need to generate a key and certicate (device certicate) that is used for the device signature

using the machine. Generating a Device Signature Key(P. 428)

Managing the Machine

427

Generating a Device Signature Key

6FR9-086

You can generate a key and certicate for the device signature that show a document was scanned on the machine.

The certicate is appended when an document is scanned and converted into a PDF le.

●Only one key and certicate for the device signature can be generated. It cannot be deleted.

●An optional Send PDF Security Feature Set is required. System Options(P. 674)

●Key and certicate for the device signature are valid for ve years. Renew them when required.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

5Select the [Device Signature] check box, and click [OK].

➠A key and certicate for the device signature is generated.

Renewing the Device Signature Key and the Key and Certicate

1Click [Update] at the right of the key and certicate for the device signature.

2Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

428

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

6FR9-087

Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the

status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system

management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see System

Environment(P. 668) .

Functions of the Remote UI

Checking the Status and Logs(P. 433)

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

Security Policy(P. 446)

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 452)

Basics of the Remote UI

Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

Managing the Machine

429

Starting Remote UI

6FR9-088

To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.

Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 39) ). If you have any questions,

ask your Network Administrator.

1Start the Web browser.

2Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld, and press the

[ENTER] key.

●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://

[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).

If a security alert is displayed

●A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Conguring the

Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue

browsing the Web site.

3Log in to the Remote UI.

When the Department ID Management is disabled

Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode], and enter a value in [Remote UI Access PIN] as

necessary.

[System Manager Mode]

You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID]

and PIN in [System Manager PIN]. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 365)

[General User Mode]

You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When

you want to check if a specic document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document

of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is

automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login

name.

[Remote UI Access PIN]

Managing the Machine

430

If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 373)

When the Department ID Management is enabled

Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN]. Setting the Department ID

Management(P. 367)

4Click [Log In].

➠The Portal page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

Remote UI Screen

When you log in to the Remote UI, the following Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on

the Portal page and the basic operations.

[Device Basic Information]

Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the

Error Information page will be displayed.

[Consumables Information]

Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.

Managing the Machine

431

[Support Link]

Displays the support link specied in [Support Link] under [License/Other].

Refresh Icon

Refreshes the currently displayed page.

[Language]

Selects the display language used for the Remote UI screens.

[Log Out]

Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.

[Mail to System Manager]

Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]

under [User Management].

[Status Monitor/Cancel]

Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/

history or cancel the processing.

[Settings/Registration]

Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change

the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439)

[Address Book]

Displays the coded dial numbers and the Favorites list registered in the Address Book. You can also register

or edit the Address Book when you have logged in to System Manager Mode. Registering Destinations

from Remote UI(P. 442)

[Application Library]

Displays the Application Library setting page.

Managing the Machine

432

Checking the Status and Logs

6FR9-089

Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 433)

Checking Current Status of Received Documents(P. 434)

Checking History of Documents(P. 434)

Checking Information of Documents That Failed To Be Forwarded(P. 434)

Checking Error Information(P. 435)

Checking Consumables(P. 435)

Checking Device Specications(P. 436)

Checking System Manager Information(P. 436)

Checking Print Total Counter(P. 437)

Checking History of Toner Cartridges(P. 437)

Checking Usage Status of the Machine(P. 438)

●A le name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the

le name.

Checking Current Status of Print Documents

The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.

in [Print]

●You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].

●Regardless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and

waiting to be printed will be listed.

●If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only

be displayed on the documents that you printed.

Managing the Machine

433

●Click [Job Number] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information.

You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.

Checking Current Status of Received Documents

You can check the logs of received fax and I-Fax documents. You can also click [Delete] for a received fax document to

delete it.

in [RX]

●To perform the following operations for a received fax document, you need to log on in System

Manager Mode and set <Use Fax Preview> to <On>.

- Click [Print All] to print all received documents.

- Click [Print] to print a document waiting to be printed.

- Click [Job Number] to display detailed information and preview of a document waiting to be printed.

Checking History of Documents

The job logs of print, copy, sending (TX), and receiving (RX) are displayed.

Checking Information of Documents That Failed To Be Forwarded

Information of documents that failed to be forwarded is displayed.

Errors]

Managing the Machine

434

●When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can click [Delete] to delete documents that

failed to be forwarded.

●When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can click [Job Number] to display detailed

information or preview of the document that failed to be forwarded.

Checking Error Information

When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the

Portal page (main page). Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

Information]

Checking Consumables

Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click

[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page ( Remote UI Screen(P. 431) ).

[Consumables]

Managing the Machine

435

Checking Device Specications

The maximum print speed and machine features are displayed.

Features]

Checking System Manager Information

Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. The device name and other system manager

information displayed here correspond to the settings in [System Manager Information] on the [User Management]

page or in [Device Information Settings] on the [Device Management] page.

Information]

Managing the Machine

436

Checking Print Total Counter

The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy, print, and fax functions is displayed.

Counter]

Checking History of Toner Cartridges

You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges and other logs. The display can be changed for each color of the

toner cartridge.

Log]

Managing the Machine

437

Checking Usage Status of the Machine

The monthly total volume of printouts and monthly total power consumption are displayed. You can display the Eco

Information screen and change the settings to save paper and power consumption.

Information]

LINKS

Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

Managing the Machine

438

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI

6FR9-08A

You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the

machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic ow of changing the

settings of the machine using the Remote UI.

●Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

●Some settings may require operations that differ from the procedure described here.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Click the setting you want to congure in the menu on the left side of the screen.

4Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.

Managing the Machine

439

5Click [Edit].

6Specify the required settings.

7Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

440

8Restart the machine as necessary. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

●For information about whether you need to restart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.

Managing the Machine

441

Registering Destinations from Remote UI

6FR9-08C

1660-083

You can use the computer to register destinations in the Address Book of the machine and edit information of

registered destinations. Specify the shared folder or FTP server destination here.

●You can change the settings only when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

2Click [Address Book] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

If the enter PIN page is displayed

●The Address Book is protected by a PIN. Enter the [PIN] and click [OK].

3Click [Coded Dial].

●You can also register destinations in Favorites. In this case, click [Favorites] instead of [Coded Dial].

Favorites(P. 179)

4Click the text link under [Number], [Type], or [Name] for an item named "Not

Registered."

●You can edit a registered item by clicking the corresponding text link under [Number], [Type] or [Name].

●You can delete a registered destination by clicking the corresponding [Delete] button.

●If you delete a destination from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the favorite settings.

Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 171)

5 Select the type of the destination to register, and click [OK].

●To register the shared folder or FTP server destination, select [File].

Managing the Machine

442

6Specify the destination.

To register the fax destination

[Name]

Enter the name of the destination.

[Fax Number]

Enter the fax number of the destination.

[ECM TX]

Select the check box to make the following possible: if an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is

checked and corrected to prevent an improper image from being sent.

[Speed]

If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the

transmission start speed downward.

[Long Distance]

Specify [International (1)] to [International (3)] according to the transmission conditions when registering

overseas fax numbers.

●You can also specify [ECM TX] and [Speed] from <Fax Settings> ( <Send>(P. 559) ) on the operation panel.

However, settings made from <Address Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations

registered in the Address Book.

Managing the Machine

443

To register the e-mail or I-Fax destination

[Name]

Enter the name of the destination.

[E-Mail Address]/[I-Fax Address]

Enter the e-mail address of the destination.

To register the shared folder or FTP server destination

[Name]

Enter the name for the destination.

[Protocol]

Select the protocol for the destination.

[Windows (SMB)] Select this when registering a shared folder as a destination.

[FTP] Select this when registering an FTP server as a destination.

[Host Name]

●For a shared folder

Enter the computer name or IP address. You can include a path to the shared folder with the computer

name or IP address (e.g. "\\swan\share" or "\\192.168.2.100\share").

●For an FTP server

Enter the IP address of the FTP server (e.g. "192.168.2.100").

Using a DNS server

●You can also enter the host name (or FQDN) instead of the computer name or IP address (e.g. for a shared

folder: "\\swan.organization.company.com\share").

Managing the Machine

444

[Folder Path]

Enter the location of the folder to which the data will be sent.

●For a shared folder

Use "\" as a separator. Specify the level that follows the path specied in [Host Name].

●For an FTP server

Use "/" as a separator. The path is an absolute path when a "/" is placed at its top, otherwise a relative path

with respective to the current directory of the user who has logged in.

●If there is no folder in which the data will be stored, a folder with the specied name is automatically

created when sending is performed. However, if the specied path includes two or more non-existent

folder levels or if the user does not have a write privilege for the parent folder, no folder is created and the

process ends in a send error.

[User Name]

Enter the user name set for the shared folder or FTP server.

[Set Password]

To set a password for the shared folder or FTP server, select the check box and enter a [Password].

Ensure that the same display language is selected on both the computer and the

Remote UI.

●[Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly or may not be referenceable.

7Click [OK].

LINKS

Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 452)

Address Book List(P. 632)

Managing the Machine

445

Security Policy

6FR9-08E

It is a common practice for organizations to adopt a security policy that denes basic information security objectives

and standards, which requires information devices such as computers and multifunctional printers to be operated

accordingly. If you have a security policy to be applied in your organization, apply it to this machine as well.

Viewing the Security Policy(P. 446)

Security Policy Items(P. 446)

To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine(P. 450)

Viewing the Security Policy

You can view the security policy set in the machine using the Remote UI.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Click [Security Settings] [Conrm Security Policy].

Security Policy Items

The following items are displayed by the Remote UI. The items for functions unavailable on this machine are also

displayed, but do not affect the machine operation.

◼[Interface]

[Wireless Connection Policy]

Prevent unauthorized access by prohibiting wireless connections.

[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection] <Use Direct Connection> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

access the machine from mobile devices.

<Direct Connection

Settings>(P. 474)

[Prohibit Use of Wireless LAN] <Select Wired/Wireless LAN> is set to <Wired LAN>. It is not

possible to establish a wireless connection with the machine via

a wireless LAN router or access point.

<Select Wired/Wireless

LAN>(P. 473)

[USB Policy]

Prevent unauthorized access and data breaches by prohibiting USB connection.

Managing the Machine

446

[Prohibit Use as USB Device] <Use as USB Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

connect to a computer via USB.

<Use as USB Device>(P. 488)

[Prohibit Use as USB Storage Device] <Use USB Storage Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible

to use USB memory devices.

<Use USB Storage

Device>(P. 488)

◼[Network]

[Communication Operational Policy]

Increase the security of communications by requiring the verication of signatures and certicates.

[Always Verify Signatures for SMS/

WebDAV Server Functions]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Always Verify Server Certicate

When Using TLS]

The following settings in [Use TLS for SMTP] and [Use TLS for

POP] are set to [On].

●[Verify Certicate]

●[Add CN to Verication Items]

The following settings in [Use Google Cloud Print] are set to

[On].

●[Verify Server Certicate]

●[Add CN to Verication Items]

The following settings in [Conrm TLS Certicate for LDAP

Server Access] of [LDAP Server (For Search)] and [LDAP Server

(For Authentication)] are set to [On].

●[Conrm TLS Certicate for LDAP Server Access]

●[Add CN to Verication Items]

Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax

Communication

Settings(P. 90)

Registering the Machine

with Google Cloud

Print(P. 356)

Registering LDAP

Servers(P. 65)

[Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for

Server Functions]

<Dedicated Port Auth. Method> is set to <Mode 2>. When

using the machine as a server, plain text authentication and

functions that use plain text authentication are not available.

<Dedicated Port Auth.

Method>(P. 484)

[Prohibit Use of SNMPv1] In <SNMP Settings>, <SNMPv1 Settings> is set to <Off>. It is

not possible to use SNMPv1 when obtaining device

information from the computer.

<SNMP Settings>(P. 482)

●This setting does not apply to communication with IEEE 802.1X networks, even if [Always Verify Server

Certicate When Using TLS] is set to [On].

●If [Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions] is set to [On] and your device management

software or driver version is old, it may not be possible to connect to the machine. Ensure that you are using

the latest versions.

[Port Usage Policy]

Prevent external breaches by closing unused ports.

[Restrict LPD Port (Port Number: 515)] In <LPD Settings>, <Use LPD Printing> is set to <Off>. It is

not possible to perform LPD printing.

<LPD Settings>(P. 480)

[Restrict RAW Port (Port Number: 9100)] In <RAW Settings>, <Use RAW Printing> is set to <Off>. It is

not possible to perform RAW printing.

<RAW Settings>(P. 480)

Managing the Machine

447

[Restrict FTP Port (Port Number: 21)] This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict WSD Port (Port Number: 3702,

60000)]

The following settings in <WSD Settings> are set to <Off>.

It is not possible to use WSD functions.

●<Use WSD Printing>

●<Use WSD Browsing>

●<Use WSD Scanning>

●<Use Computer Scanning>

●<Use Multicast Discovery>

<WSD Settings>(P. 480)

[Restrict BMLinkS Port (Port Number:

1900)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] Part of the settings to enable printing from mobile devices

using applications will be turned <Off>, disabling part of

printing from mobile devices using applications.

Linking with Mobile

Devices(P. 333)

[Restrict SMB Port (Port Number: 137, 138,

139, 445)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict SMTP Port (Port Number: 25)] This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict Dedicated Port (Port Number:

9002, 9006, 9007, 9011-9015, 9017-9019,

9022, 9023, 9025, 20317, 47545-47547)]

<Use Dedicated Port> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

use dedicated ports.

<Use Dedicated

Port>(P. 483)

[Restrict Remote Operator's Software Port

(Port Number: 5900)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) Port (Port Number:

5004, 5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] The following settings will be turned <Off>, and part of the

settings to enable printing from mobile devices using

applications will also be turned <Off>. It will be disabled to

search the network or perform automatic settings using

mDNS. In addition, part of printing from mobile devices

using applications will be disabled as well.

●<mDNS Settings> (IPv4)

●<mDNS Settings> (IPv6)

●[Use Google Cloud Print] [Local Print]

<mDNS

Settings>(P. 479)

Registering the

Machine with Google

Cloud Print(P. 356)

Linking with Mobile

Devices(P. 333)

[Restrict SLP Port (Port Number: 427)] In [Multicast Discovery Settings], [Discovery Response] is

set to [Off]. It is not possible to search the network or

perform automatic settings using SLP.

Conguring SLP

Communication with

Device Management

Software(P. 76)

[Restrict SNMP Port (Port Number: 161)] In <SNMP Settings>, the <SNMPv1 Settings> and <SNMPv3

Settings> are set to <Off>, and <Scan w/Canon PRINT

Business> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to obtain device

information from the computer or congure settings

using SNMP.

<SNMP

Settings>(P. 482)

<Scan w/Canon PRINT

Business>(P. 593)

◼[Authentication]

[Authentication Operational Policy]

Managing the Machine

448

[Prohibit Guest Users to Use Device] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force Setting of Auto Logout] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Password Operational Policy]

[Prohibit Caching of Password for External Servers] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security level.

[Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security level.

[Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security level.

[Password Settings Policy]

[Minimum Number of Characters for Password] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Password Validity Period] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive

Characters]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Lockout Policy]

Block users from logging in for a specied period of time after a certain number of consecutive invalid login attempts.

[Enable Lockout] In <Lockout>, <Enable Lockout> is set to <On>. Specify the values for

<Lockout Threshold> and <Lockout Period>.

<Lockout>(P. 598)

◼[Key/Certicate]

Protect important data by preventing the use of weak encryption, or by saving encrypted user passwords and keys in a

designated hardware component.

[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption] <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> is set to <On>. It is not

possible to use weak encryption.

<Encryption

Settings>(P. 598)

[Prohibit Use of Key/Certicate with Weak

Encryption]

In <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>, <Prohibit Weak

Encryp. Key/Cert.> is set to <On>. It is not possible to use

a key or certicate with weak encryption.

<Encryption

Settings>(P. 598)

Managing the Machine

449

[Use TPM to Store Password and Key] This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

◼[Log]

[Force Recording of Audit Log] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force SNTP Settings] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

◼[Job]

[Printing Policy]

[Prohibit Immediate Printing of Received Jobs] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security level.

[Sending/Receiving Policy]

Limit the sending operations for destinations, and limit how received data is processed.

[Allow Sending Only to Registered

Addresses]

<Restrict New Destinations> is set to <On>. It is only

possible to send to destinations that are registered in

the Address Book.

<Restrict New

Destinations>(P. 559)

[Force Conrmation of Fax Number] <Conrm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>. Users

are required to enter a fax number again for

conrmation when sending a fax.

<Conrm Entered Fax

Number>(P. 569)

[Prohibit Auto Forwarding] In <Forwarding Function>, the <Use Forwarding

Function> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

automatically forward faxes.

<Forwarding

Settings>(P. 577)

◼[Storage]

[Force Complete Deletion of Data] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine

You can import the security policy edited on the imageRUNNER ADVANCE Series or using Device Management

Software to apply it to this machine. In addition, you can export the security policy as applied to this machine to apply

it to other machines*. Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 452)

*Only Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings

●The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password on the exporting

machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine.

If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password congured for the exporting machine

is set to the importing machine.

Managing the Machine

450

●You cannot set or change the security policy on this machine.

Managing the Machine

451

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data

6FR9-08F

Address Book and machine settings data can be saved on your computer (export). Data that is saved on your

computer can also be registered in the machine (import). You can easily copy the destinations in the Address Book

to multiple machines.* To use these features, it is required that you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

*If using the same model, you can import/export machine settings data.

Exporting the Setting Data(P. 452)

Importing the Setting Data(P. 453)

Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete

●It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may

result in damage to data or the machine.

Do not operate the machine during the import or export process

●Before importing/exporting, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently proceeding.

●For the settings that cannot be imported/exported, see Setting Menu List(P. 460) .

●You can also import/export settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the

machine. <Import/Export>(P. 596)

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 439) .

Exporting the Setting Data

You can export Address Book and machine settings data, and save them on a computer. You can export Address Book

data as a device conguration information le (*.dcm) or Canon Address Book le (*.abk). Select the device

conguration information le type to save the data as a backup copy or copy the Address Book data to the same

machine model. Select the Canon Address Book le type to copy the Address Book data to the fax driver or a different

machine model. It is recommended that you regularly back up important settings.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Data Management] [Export].

4Select the settings to export, and specify the encryption password.

Managing the Machine

452

[Address Book (ABK)]

Select the check box to export the Address Book data as a Canon Address Book le (*.abk).

●If the [Address Book (ABK)] check box is selected, you cannot export the settings of the machine at the

same time with the Address Book data.

[Address Book]

Select the check box to export Address Book data as a device conguration information le (*.dcm).

[Address Book PIN]

If the Address Book is code-protected, enter the code for the Address Book. Restricting Use of the

Address Book(P. 416)

[Settings/Registration]

Select the check box to export machine settings data.

[Application Library Settings Information]

Select the check box to export the Application Library settings data.

[Encryption Password]

Enter a password to encrypt the export data using alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in

[Conrm]. If the [Address Book] or [Settings/Registration] check box is selected, the data cannot be exported

without an encryption password set.

●The password is required when exported data is imported. Importing the Setting Data(P. 453)

5Click [Start Exporting].

6Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where to save the exported

data.

➠The setting data will be saved.

Importing the Setting Data

Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import machine settings data from another

machine to your machine if the models are the same.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 430)

Managing the Machine

453

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 431)

3Select [Data Management] [Import].

4Specify the le, enter the password, and select the settings to import.

[File Path]

Click [Browse] and select the le. You can only import a device conguration information le (*.dcm) and a

Canon Address Book le (*.abk). If you select the Canon Address Book le type, you do not need to set any

other items.

[Decryption Password]

Enter the password set when the settings were exported.

[Address Book]

Select the check box to import Address Book data.

●Importing Address Book data will overwrite the Address Book entries currently registered on the machine.

[Address Book PIN]

If the Address Book is code protected, enter the code for the Address Book. Restricting Use of the

Address Book(P. 416)

[Settings/Registration]

Select the check box to import machine settings data.

[Application Library Settings Information]

Select the check box to import the Application Library settings data.

5Click [Start Importing].

6Click [OK].

➠The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.

7Click [OK].

➠If the [Settings/Registration] check box is selected in step 4, the machine automatically restarts.

Managing the Machine

454

Updating the Firmware

6FR9-08H

For the rmware, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two

methods of update: the one is to access the latest rmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the

update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest rmware

version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed

in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a

wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.

Installation Condition of the Machine How to Install the Update

Wireless LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 455)

Wired LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 455)

Updating from a Computer(P. 456)

USB connection Updating from a Computer(P. 456)

●If you are in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform rmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,

and perform the update from the computer.

Checking the rmware version

●You can check the rmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the

rmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly. Checking the Firmware

Version(P. 456)

Updating via the Internet

You can access the Canon server from the machine to update the rmware to the latest version.

1Select <Update Firmware> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

➠A check for existence of the latest rmware is performed.

●If the <This is the latest rmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the

rmware.

2When a license screen appears, select <Accept>.

3Select <OK>.

➠When the rmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.

Managing the Machine

455

●Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.

Updating from a Computer

When you have downloaded the latest rmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility

software to update the rmware from a computer. For how to perform rmware update from a computer, see the

"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.

To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State

Checking the Firmware Version

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Management Settings>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

3Select <License/Other> <Update Firmware>.

4Select <Version Information>.

➠The current rmware version is displayed.

Managing the Machine

456

Initializing Settings

6FR9-08J

You can restore the following settings:

Initializing Menu(P. 457)

Initializing Key and Certicate(P. 457)

Initializing Address Book(P. 458)

Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 458)

Initializing Menu

You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 460) ). Depending on the settings selected, you

may need to restart the machine after initialization.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Menu> Select the item

you want to initialize <Yes> (Restart the machine if necessary)

●You can restore the settings only for <Network> in <Preferences>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> <OK> Restart the

machine

Initializing Key and Certicate

You can restore the settings of the key and certicate and the CA certicate. Note that all the keys and certicates and

CA certicates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certicates) will be deleted after

initializing.

●After initializing, functions that require a key and certicate such as TLS encrypted communication and IKE

of IPSec communication are not available. To use these functions, congure the settings for the key and

certicate and activate the functions again.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Key and

Certicate> <Yes>

Managing the Machine

457

Initializing Address Book

You can restore the settings of the Address Book. Note that all the information registered in the Address Book will be

deleted after initializing.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Address

Book> <Yes>

Initializing All Data/Settings

This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents

sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process nishes,

the machine automatically restarts.

●Before initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.

These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.

●To use the machine after initializing it, you need to congure all settings from the beginning.

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 391)

Registering Destinations(P. 179)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

Managing the Machine

458

Setting Menu List

Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 460

<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 461

<Display Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 462

<English Keyboard Layout> .......................................................................................................................... 467

<Timer/Energy Settings> .............................................................................................................................. 468

<Network> .................................................................................................................................................... 473

<External Interface> ..................................................................................................................................... 488

<Accessibility> .............................................................................................................................................. 489

<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 490

<Adjust Image Quality> ................................................................................................................................ 491

<Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................................. 504

<Function Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 506

<Common> ................................................................................................................................................... 507

<Copy> ......................................................................................................................................................... 513

<Printer> ...................................................................................................................................................... 515

<Send> ......................................................................................................................................................... 559

<Receive/Forward> ....................................................................................................................................... 572

<Store/Access Files> ..................................................................................................................................... 579

<Secure Print> .............................................................................................................................................. 587

<Set Destination> .............................................................................................................................................. 588

<Management Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 589

<User Management> .................................................................................................................................... 590

<Device Management> ................................................................................................................................. 591

<License/Other> ........................................................................................................................................... 594

<Data Management> .................................................................................................................................... 596

<Security Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 598

Setting Menu List

459

Setting Menu List

6FR9-08K

You can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by conguring settings described in this

chapter. To start conguration, select <Menu> on the Home screen ( Home Screen(P. 124) ). This section describes

what each item in the setting menu can congure.

<Preferences>(P. 461) This section describes the display and network settings.

<Adjustment/Maintenance>(P. 490) This section describes how to adjust print image quality and the cleaning functions of the

machine.

<Function Settings>(P. 506) This section describes the settings for the individual functions.

<Set Destination>(P. 588) This section describes the Address Book settings.

<Management Settings>(P. 589) This section describes the user and hardware information management, security

settings, etc.

●You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings: Printing Lists of

Settings(P. 632)

Setting Menu List

460

6FR9-08L

Item Description

<Display Settings>(P. 462) This section describes the settings related to viewing of the display.

<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 467) This section describes the USB keyboard settings.

<Timer/Energy Settings>(P. 468) This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.

<Network>(P. 473) This section describes the network settings.

<External Interface>(P. 488) This section describes the USB settings and other relevant settings.

<Accessibility>(P. 489) This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen

colors and setting the message display time.

Setting Menu List

461

6FR9-08R

All the settings related to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger

().

<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 462)

<Home Screen Button Display Settings>(P. 463)

<Language>(P. 463)

<Remote UI Language>(P. 464)

<Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area>(P. 464)

<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>(P. 465)

<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>(P. 465)

<Show Warnings>(P. 465)

<Action When Warning>(P. 466)

<Display IP Address>(P. 466)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

●Settings marked with "*2" cannot be imported or exported.

●Settings marked with "*3" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

By default, the Home screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function

is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function. If

you specify <Status Monitor>, also specify the screen to display after exiting the <Status Monitor> screen.

<Home>

<Copy>

<Fax> *1

<Scan>

<Home>

<Copy>

<Fax>*1

<Scan>

Setting Menu List

462

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Default Screen After Startup/

Restoration> Select a function to display the desired screen

<Home Screen Button Display Settings> *2

Congure the settings for the buttons displayed in the Home screen. You can select the settings that will be displayed

as shortcut buttons, rearrange the order in which the buttons appear, and insert or remove spaces. Customizing

the Home Screen(P. 168)

<Favorite Fax Settings>*1

<Language> *3

Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.

<Català>

<Čeština>

<Dansk>

<Eesti>

<Español>

<Français>

<Latviešu>

<Lietuvių>

<Norsk>

<Português>

<Română>

<Slovenčina>

<Slovenščina>

<Suomi>

<Tiếng Việt Nam>

<Türkçe>

<Ελληνικά>

<Български>

<Русский>

Setting Menu List

463

<ภาษาไทย>

<ةيبرعلا>

<日本語>

<中文(繁體)>

<中文(简体)>

<한국어>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language <Yes>

<Remote UI Language> *3

Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.

<Dutch>

<Czech>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a

language

Specify whether to display a message when stains are detected in the document feed scanning area.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

464

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area> Select <Off>

or <On>

Select the unit of measurement.

<Inch>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select

Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

<Auto>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.> Select <Off> in

<Auto> Enter toner level in <Custom> <Apply>

Specify whether to display a message telling that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Show Warnings> Select <Off> or

Setting Menu List

465

●When <Action When Warning> is set to <Stop Printing>, you cannot set this item to <Off>.

●When <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> is set to <Off>, the message will appear even if you set this item to

<Off>. <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>(P. 573)

Specify whether to continue printing when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Action When Warning> <Low Cartridge

Level> Select <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing> <Apply> <Yes>

●If you change the setting of this item from <Continue Printing> to <Stop Printing>, <Show Warnings> is set

to <On>.

Specify whether to display the machine's IPv4 address on the <Status Monitor> screen. <Status Monitor>

Screen(P. 127)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Display IP Address> Select <Off> or

<On>

Setting Menu List

466

6FR9-08S

Specify the layout of an USB keyboard if connected to the machine. The default setting is marked with a dagger ( ).

<Menu> <Preferences> <English Keyboard Layout> Select <USA Layout> or <UK Layout>

Setting Menu List

467

6FR9-08U

All the settings related to the timer and energy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger

().

<Current Date/Time Settings>(P. 468)

<Date/Time Settings>(P. 468)

<Date Format>(P. 469)

<Time Format>(P. 469)

<Auto Reset Time>(P. 470)

<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 470)

<Auto Shutdown Time>(P. 471)

<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 471)

<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>(P. 472)

<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>(P. 472)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.

●Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

<Current Date/Time Settings> *1

Set the current date and time. Setting the Date/Time(P. 13)

●Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the current

date and time are also changed accordingly.

●The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time goes into effect.

Specify the date and time standard of the region in which the machine is to be installed.

Setting Menu List

468

Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also

changed accordingly. Setting the Date/Time(P. 13)

<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time> to <(UTC+14:00)

Kiritimati Island>

UTC

●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks

and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

<Daylight Saving Time Settings> *2

Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to

which daylight saving time is in effect.

<Off>

<On>

Start: Month, Week, Day

End: Month, Week, Day

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving

Time Settings> Select <On>, and specify the dates <Apply>

<Date Format> *2

Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date Format> Select the date format

Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

<12 Hour (AM/PM)>

Setting Menu List

469

<24 Hour>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Time Format> Select the display

setting

If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the

default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not

performed in the following cases:

●The setting menu is displayed.

●The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents or sending or receiving faxes.

●An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the

error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)

<Off>

<On>

1 to 2 to 9 (min.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Select <On> in <Set

This Function> Enter the time in <Set Time> <Apply>

●The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.

Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is

selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> is displayed (

<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 462) ). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display returns to the

main screen of the function that was selected.

Setting Menu List

470

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select

<Auto Shutdown Time> *2

Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after a specied period of idle time has elapsed since the machine

entered the sleep mode.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Shutdown Time> Select <On>, and

set the Auto Shutdown time <Apply>

Before setting <Auto Shutdown Time>

●When the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is enabled, the machine may automatically shut down even if you

are operating the machine from the Remote UI or from the Send Function Setting Tool. A malfunction may

occur, particularly if the machine shuts down while data is being imported. When you import data using the

Remote UI or use the Send Function Setting Tool, set <Auto Shutdown Time> to <Off> in advance.

●If any settings of the [Timer Settings] are changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep

mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically

shuts down after a specied period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.

If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specied period of time, the machine enters

sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.

Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to

save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 177)

1 to 60 (min.)

Setting Menu List

471

You can specify the time when the machine is automatically set to the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 177)

<Off>

<On>

(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)

Specify the time when the machine is recovered from the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 177)

<Off>

<On>

(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)

Setting Menu List

472

6FR9-08W

All the settings related to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 473)

<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 473)

<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 474)

<Easy Connection via PC>(P. 476)

<TCP/IP Settings>(P. 476)

<SNMP Settings>(P. 482)

<Use Dedicated Port>(P. 483)

<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>(P. 484)

<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>(P. 484)

<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 484)

<Use IEEE 802.1X>(P. 485)

<Firewall Settings>(P. 485)

<Google Cloud Print Settings>(P. 486)

<Device Settings Management>(P. 486)

<RMT-SW>(P. 487)

<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 487)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.

●Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when

switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using

the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 17)

Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the

setting for saving power consumption.

Select to congure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by

inputting manually from the operation panel.

Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.

You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting

a Wireless Router(P. 25)

Setting Menu List

473

Select to congure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify

authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed

Settings(P. 28)

<None>

<WEP>

WEP Key 1 to 4

WEP Key 1 to 4

<Auto>

<AES-CCMP>

Select to automatically congure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting

Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 21)

Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 23)

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed

message <OK> <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>

<Connection Information> *1

Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 39)

Set whether to connect directly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an

environment without an access point or wireless LAN router. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 337)

Setting Menu List

474

<Off>

<On>

Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 60 (min.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Direct Connection

Termination> Select <On> in <Automatically Terminate Session> and enter the time <Apply>

<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Congure the SSID/network key arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the

same time, you need to congure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.

<Off>

<On>

<SSID>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode

Settings> Select <On> for each item and select <SSID>/<Network Key> Enter the SSID/network

key <Apply> <Apply> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

<Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd> *2

Specify whether to keep the machine waiting for Direct Connection.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

475

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Keep Enabled If SSID/

Ntwk Key Spcfd> Select <Off> or <On> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

●When setting this item to <On>, congure in advance a custom SSID or network key using <Access

Point Mode Settings>.

<Cong. IP Address For Direct Conn.>

Manually enter the machine's IP address at the time of Direct Connection.

192.168.22.1

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Cong. IP Address For

Direct Conn.> Enter an arbitrary IP address <Apply> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Start the procedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). You can use Canon Laser NW Device Setup

Utility to congure network settings via a computer.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Easy Connection via PC> <Yes> The connection

process starts

●Download Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility from the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.

Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP

network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 33)

Setting Menu List

476

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<DHCP>

<Off>

<On>

<Manually Acquire> *2

<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0

<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0

<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0

If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the

DNS server address or the domain name. Conguring DNS(P. 57)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network. Testing the Network

Connection(P. 34)

Setting Menu List

477

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 36)

<Off>

<On>

You can check the link-local address that is automatically acquired.

Enable or disable stateless addresses.

<Off>

<On>

<Prex Length>

Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6.

<Off>

<On>

<Prex Length>

If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the

DNS server address or the domain name. Conguring DNS(P. 57)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

Specify the IP address of the DNS server in the IPv4 environment.

<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0

<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0

Setting Menu List

478

Specify the host name of the machine to be registered in the DNS server as well as the name of the domain

to which the machine belongs.

<IPv4>

<IPv6>

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is changed.

<IPv4>

<Off>

<On>

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

<IPv6>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.

<IPv4>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

479

<IPv6>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Specify settings for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address

resolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP. Conguring WINS(P. 63)

<Off>

<On>

<WINS Server Address>: 0.0.0.0

Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. You

can also set the reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

<Off>

<On>

1 to 5 to 60 (min.)

Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing protocol. You can also set the reception timeout period after

which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD

Functions(P. 42)

<Off>

<On>

1 to 5 to 60 (min.)

Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner by using the WSD

protocol. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

Setting Menu List

480

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Specify whether to use PASV mode for FTP. If you are connecting to an FTP server through a rewall, you must

select PASV mode. Conguring FTP PASV Mode(P. 74)

<Off>

<On>

Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote

UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 425)

<Off>

<On>

<Use IPSec> *1

Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.

Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 402)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use IPSec> Select <Off> or

<On> <OK> Restart the machine

Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers(P. 388)

<LPD>

1 to 515 to 65535

<RAW>

1 to 9100 to 65535

1 to 3702 to 65535

Setting Menu List

481

<HTTP>

1 to 80 to 65535

1 to 427 to 65535

<POP3>

1 to 110 to 65535

<SMTP>

1 to 25 to 65535

<FTP>

1 to 21 to 65535

<SNMP>

1 to 161 to 65535

Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission

Unit(P. 55)

<1300>

<1400>

<1500>

Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 70)

Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to

Management Information Base (MIB) objects.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv1

Settings> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is

enabled.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

482

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv3

Settings> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running

SNMP-compatible software.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Acquire

Printer Mngt. Info. from Host> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Specify whether to conform to the advanced specications (RFC2790) of the protocol when monitoring the

machine status from the SNMP-compatible software.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Format

Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing, faxing, or scanning uses MF Scan

Utility and when browsing or specifying the machine settings over the network.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Use Dedicated Port> Select <Off> or

<On> <OK> Restart the machine

Setting Menu List

483

Specify whether to limit the authentication method specically to the secure one when using the dedicated port. If

<Mode 2> is selected, the authentication method is limited specically to the secure one.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Dedicated Port Auth. Method> Select <Mode 1> or

●If <Mode 2> is selected, you cannot establish a connection from the device management software or driver

in some cases.

Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a

Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

0 to 300 (sec.)

Select the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/

full-duplex). You can also view the MAC address for wired LAN.

Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

<Off>

<10BASE-T>

<100BASE-TX>

<1000BASE-T>

<On>

Setting Menu List

484

●When <Communication Mode> is set to <Half Duplex>, you cannot select <1000BASE-T>.

Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing

the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 39)

<Use IEEE 802.1X> *1*2

Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 409)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Use IEEE 802.1X> Select <Off> or <On>

<OK> Restart the machine

Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are

connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that

restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 382)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter> Select

<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 382)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

485

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter> Select

<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets sent to or received from devices with specied MAC addresses.

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 385)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <MAC Address Filter> Select

<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

<Off>

<On>

<Google Cloud Print Regist. Status> *1

Specify whether to use iW Management Console plug-ins to manage machine data such as settings and Address Book

destinations. For detailed information on iW Management Console, contact your nearest Canon dealer. Conguring

Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins(P. 77)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

486

<RMT-SW>

Leave this switch set to <Off>. When the service representative remotely performs device maintenance, you may be

asked to set the switch to <On>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <RMT-SW> Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the

machine

Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. <Initialize Menu>(P. 597)

Setting Menu List

487

6FR9-08X

All the settings related to the USB are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

Specify whether to enable or disable use of the USB port or a USB memory device.

Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Restricting the USB

Connection with a Computer(P. 423)

<Off>

<On>

Specify whether to use a USB memory device.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Use

USB Storage Device> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Setting Menu List

488

6FR9-08Y

All the settings related to accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors and message display time, are listed with

descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 489)

<Brightness>(P. 489)

<Message Display Time>(P. 489)

Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was

adjusted in <Brightness>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Invert Screen Colors> Select <Off> or <On>

Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.

Five Levels

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Brightness> Adjust the brightness <Apply>

Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.

1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Message Display Time> Enter a number for the

interval <Apply>

Setting Menu List

489

6FR9-090

Item Description

<Adjust Image Quality>(P. 491) This section describes how to adjust image quality for printing.

<Maintenance>(P. 504) This section describes how to use the cleaning functions.

Setting Menu List

490

6FR9-091

All the settings related to image quality adjustment are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger ( ).

<Auto Adjust Gradation>(P. 491)

<Auto Correction Settings>(P. 491)

<Correct Print Color Mismatch>(P. 492)

<Black Text Processing for Color>(P. 492)

<Adjust Print Position>(P. 492)

<Special Processing>(P. 493)

<Remove Streaks from Scan Area>(P. 503)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or

other setting items.

Adjust the gradation, density, and color in copies or printouts. Adjusting Gradation(P. 619)

Congure the settings to automatically perform a quick gradation adjustment or color mismatch correction.

Select when to make an automatic quick gradation adjustment. If <Off> is selected, quick adjustment is not

made automatically. You can also perform this adjustment manually ( Quick Adjust(P. 621) ).

<Off>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Correction

Settings> <Auto Adjust Image Regularly> Select <Off> or the adjustment timing

Setting Menu List

491

Select the timing at which the Correct Print Color Mismatch function is to be performed automatically after the

machine is turned ON. You can also perform this adjustment manually ( Correcting "Print Color

Mismatch"(P. 624) ).

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Correction

Settings> <Correct Print Color Mismatch> Select <After Printing First Job> or <When Turning

Main Power ON>

Use this function if color shift has blurred the image. Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 624)

Select whether the color of black or blackish text in color documents should be reproduced as true black or as a color

more or less close to that of the original. For each option, you can adjust the degree of effect. You can set values for

the feeder and the platen glass separately. Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility(P. 625)

Seven Levels

Seven Levels

Adjust the print position for each paper source. The print position can be adjusted in the range from -5.0 mm to +5.0

mm in increments of 0.1 mm. Adjusting Print Position(P. 627)

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

Setting Menu List

492

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

<Drawer 2> *

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)

If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the

printouts.

When printing on the back side of printed paper, rough paper, or envelopes, the print results may be improved

by adjusting the following settings.

If printouts on the back side of printed paper are too light, select <On>. You can specify this setting

separately for each paper source.

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Drawer 2> *

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)> Select

<On> in the paper source to be set <Apply> <Yes>

Setting Menu List

493

●If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time

elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.

When printing on rough paper, especially when color images are printed too light, select <On>. You can

specify the settings separately for each paper source.

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Drawer 2> *

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Rough Surface Paper Mode> Select <On> in the

paper source to be set <Apply> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower or image quality may be affected.

<Env. Flap Closing Prevention>

If envelope aps cling to the envelope bodies when printing, select <On>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Env. Flap Closing Prevention> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, toner may not be xed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.

Printouts may wrinkle depending on the paper to use. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem.

The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

494

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Paper Wrinkle Correction> Select the

mode <Yes>

●This setting is effective for plain paper and thin paper.

●Setting a greater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.

If the printed paper curls, set this item. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode

1>. First try with <Mode 1>.

<Off>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Paper Curl Correction> Select the

mode <Yes>

●Setting a greater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.

If printing on thin paper produces curled printouts, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Reduce Thin Paper Curling> <On> <Yes>

●<Reduce Thin Paper Curling> functions only when the paper type setting is <Thin 1>. Specifying Paper

Size and Type(P. 156)

●If you set to <On>, automatic 2-sided printing with <Thin 1> is disabled. Further, printouts may be faded

due to poor xing of toner.

When performing 2-sided printing in color, paper may stick together at the output. Setting this item will slow

down the printing speed of prints that may easily stick together, to reduce sticking.

Setting Menu List

495

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output> Select the item <Yes>

Print density may be uneven when the machine is used in an environment with high humidity. In this case,

setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <High

Humidity Mode> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On> and use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text

may be blurry.

When using the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may be blurry. In this

case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Low

Humidity Mode> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, print density may be lower or uneven when the machine is used in an environment

with high humidity.

If the printout reveals a ghost of an image in the same page, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

496

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Ghosting 1> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, toner may not be xed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.

If continuous printing involves generation of ghost images, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Ghosting 2> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, print density may be uneven.

If the xing assembly is dirty, edges of the paper may get smudged. In this case, changing the setting of this

item may solve the problem. The higher level you specify, the higher frequency of regular cleaning is

performed.

<Auto>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly> Select the level <Yes>

●If a higher level is specied, the printing speed will be slower.

Setting Menu List

497

If the xing assembly is dirty, edges or the back side of the paper may get smudged. You can congure to

perform automatic cleaning of the xing assembly to prevent smudges. When <On> is specied, a sheet of

paper is output each time cleaning is performed. Congure so that paper feed is performed from the paper

source in which paper usable for cleaning is loaded.

<Off>

<On>

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Drawer 2>*

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Auto

Clean Fixing Assembly> <On> <Yes> Set available paper sources to <On> <Apply>

●You can use the following paper for cleaning.

- Paper sizes: A4/Letter

- Paper types: Plain 1 to 3/Recycled 1 or 2

<Rdc. Condens. (1-Sd->2-Sd Prt)>

When performing 2-sided printing after 1-sided printing, the printed images may be faint due to moisture

condensation. In this case, setting to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Rdc.

Condens. (1-Sd->2-Sd Prt)> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.

Setting Menu List

498

If the printed images are faint due to moisture condensation when performing 2-sided printing, setting to other

than <Off> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Rdc

Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)> Select the item <Yes>

●The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than <Mode 1>.

●If you set to other than <Off>, the print may be faded or the printing speed may be slower.

When gloss unevenness occurs in the leading edge of paper, setting to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Correct Uneven Gloss> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, toner may not be xed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.

<Corr. Void on Paper Back Side>

When performing 2-sided printing on thin paper, void may occur on the back side of paper in the leading edge.

In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Corr.

Void on Paper Back Side> <On> <Yes>

Setting Menu List

499

●If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.

If print density is uneven in a way that the print looks like a water drops pattern, setting this item to <On> may

solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Waterdrop Pattern> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.

<Corr. Img. Corrup. by Ppr. Dust>

Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. In this case, setting this item

to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Corr.

Img. Corrup. by Ppr. Dust> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.

If white areas are lightly colored, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Prevent Fogging> <On> <Yes>

Setting Menu List

500

●If you set to <On>, print density may be lighter.

If streaks appear on printouts, setting to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Drum Streak> <On>

Toner may peel off the printed page depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case,

setting this item may solve the problem.

<Off>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Toner Flaking> Select the item <Yes>

●The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>. First try the adjustment with

<Mode 1>.

●Setting a greater improvement effect may result in curled printouts or slower printing speed.

When toner stain (spotted stain) appears on the printed paper, the problem may not be solved even if you

cleaning the xing assembly. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1> <On> <Yes>

Setting Menu List

501

●If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.

When the machine is used in an environment with high humidity, faded or curled printouts may be output. In

this case, changing the setting of this item may solve the problem.

<Auto>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2> Select the item <Yes>

<Auto>

Automatically adjusts toner xing.

If printouts are curled, set to this option.

If printouts are faded, set to this option.

●If you set to <Mode 1>, printouts may be faded.

●If you set to <Mode 2>, printouts may be curled.

When black and white print data is mixed with color data, specify whether to prioritize the print speed or to

reduce the toner usage of the cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges when printing data.

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Auto

Detect B&W/Color Orig.> Select the mode <Yes>

Setting Menu List

502

Prioritizes the print speed when printing.

Reduces the toner usage of toner cartridges when printing.

<Rdc. Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.>

Printouts may be faded immediately after replacement of toner cartridges with new ones. In this case, setting

this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Rdc.

Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.> <On> <Yes>

●If you set to <On>, the setting will become effective with next replacement of toner cartridges.

●Immediately after cartridge replacement, a certain amount of time is required for toner to be evenly

distributed inside the cartridge.

You can congure a setting to prevent stains from being scanned when they are detected in the document feed

scanning area. Selecting <On> removes streaks generated by the edge of the original.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Remove Streaks from Scan

Area> Select <Off> or <On>

●When streaks are removed, areas with stains are not scanned. Clean the original scanning area so that the

original is scanned satisfactorily.

Setting Menu List

503

6FR9-092

The cleaning functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>(P. 504)

<Clean Fixing Assembly>(P. 504)

<Clean ITB>(P. 504)

<Clean Feeder>(P. 504)

<Control Condensation>(P. 504)

Clean the xing assembly when the edge or back side of the printout is smudged. Cleaning the Fixing

Assembly(P. 609)

Clean the xing assembly after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts. Cleaning the

Fixing Assembly(P. 609)

Clean the transfer belt inside the machine to prevent the print quality from deteriorating. Cleaning the Transfer

Belt (ITB)(P. 611)

Clean the feeder rollers if originals become dirty after being fed through the feeder. Cleaning the Feeder(P. 606)

When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation occurs, which

may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. Select <On> to remove dew condensation in the machine. When

selecting <On>, specify whether to restrict jobs.

<Off>

<On>

<Use Fax Memory Lock + Do Not Allow Job Printing During Process>/<Do Not Allow Job Printing During

Process>

Check the message <OK> Select the item <Yes>

Setting Menu List

504

●While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper

may be output.

●If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation removal.

●The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.

Setting Menu List

505

6FR9-093

Item Description

<Common>(P. 507) This section describes settings common to each function.

<Copy>(P. 513) This section describes how to specify the copy settings.

<Printer>(P. 515) This section describes how to specify printer settings.

<Send>(P. 559) This section describes how to specify settings for sending faxes and scanned originals.

<Receive/Forward>(P. 572) This section describes how to specify settings for receiving faxes and e-mails.

<Store/Access Files>(P. 579) This section describes the settings for scanning originals and printing stored les.

<Secure Print>(P. 587) This section describes the settings for the Secure Print.

Setting Menu List

506

6FR9-094

All the items related to settings common to each function are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with

a dagger ( ).

<Paper Feed Settings>(P. 507)

<Print Settings>(P. 509)

<Scan Settings>(P. 510)

<Generate File>(P. 511)

<Fax Setup Guide>(P. 512)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

●Settings marked with "*2" cannot be imported or exported.

Congure paper feed settings.

Enable or disable the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is

set to <On> when printing documents, the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with the

appropriate paper size. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching

from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size. Automatically Selecting an

Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 166)

<Copy>

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Drawer 2>*1

<Off>

<On>

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Drawer 2>*1

Setting Menu List

507

<Off>

<On>

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Drawer 2>*1

<Off>

<On>

<Other>

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Drawer 2>*1

<Off>

<On>

Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with

logos, you need to change how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are

performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load

the paper with the logo side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing. For more

information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 154) .

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Drawer 2> *1

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings> <Switch Paper Feed

Method> Select the paper source Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>

Setting Menu List

508

Paper Sources

Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.

When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you

perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.

●We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.

To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-

sided printing is selected.

●If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing

( Available Paper(P. 657) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need

to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 154) ).

●1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.

Congure printing operation settings.

You can congure so that if the machine stops printing a job due to an error, the job will be automatically

deleted after a specied period of time.

<Off>

<On>

0 to 5 to 240 (min.)

Setting Menu List

509

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Print Settings> <Auto Delete Suspended

Jobs> Select <On> in <Set This Function> Enter the time in <Set

Time> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

Congure scan settings.

When scanning from the computer, use this to specify whether to automatically go online for remote scanning

(scan standby mode) without using the operation panel.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Scan Settings> <Auto Online> Select <Off> or

<On>

If scan is not performed within a specied period of time after the screen below is displayed (the machine is

set online for scanning), the machine automatically becomes oine. Specify the time period at which the

machine becomes oine.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 5 to 60 (min.)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Scan Settings> <Auto Oine> Select <On> in

<Set This Function> Enter the time in <Set Time> <Apply>

Setting Menu List

510

Congure le generation settings.

Specify settings for the gamma value for converting scanned originals into les.

Select the gamma value used when converting scanned color originals into the specied le format. You can

specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted les. The

les are displayed with brightness that is true to the original documents.

<YCbCr TX Gamma Value> Select the gamma value

●For the gamma value of a monitor display, see the instruction manual included with the display.

To run OCR (Optical Character Recognition) on a text original to create a "searchable PDF," specify whether the

machine determines the original's text direction and detects the original direction.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Generate File> <OCR (Text Searchable)

Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Smart Scan> <Apply>

<256-bit AES Set. (Encrypt. PDF)> *1

When generating an encrypted PDF, the PDF encryption level can be set to "128-bit" or "256-bit." If "256-bit" is

selected, the version compatible with Acrobat can be changed.

Setting Menu List

511

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Generate File> <256-bit AES Set. (Encrypt.

PDF)> Select <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent> or <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent>

<Fax Setup Guide> *1*2

Select to display on-screen instructions for specifying settings, including the fax number and the RX mode.

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 79)

Setting Menu List

512

<Copy>

6FR9-095

All the settings related to the copy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

●Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

You can change the default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy

function. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

1 to 999

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Drawer 2>*1

Nine Levels

<Auto>

Nine Levels

<Red>: Nine Levels

<Green>: Nine Levels

<Blue>: Nine Levels

<Copy Ratio> *2

Custom Ratio

<100% 1:1>

<Auto>

<400% Max>

<200%>

<141% A5->A4>

<141% A5->A4/LTR>

<122% A5->B5>

<115% B5->A4/LTR>

Setting Menu List

513

<86% A4/LTR->B5>

<81% B5->A5>

<70% A4->A5>

<70% A4/LTR->A5>

<50%>

<25% Min>

<2-Sided Printing>

<Off>

<1-Sided->2-Sided>

<2-Sided->2-Sided>

<2-Sided->1-Sided>

<Orig./Fin. Type>

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<Text>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Seven Levels

Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black

17 Levels

<High>: 17 Levels

<Medium>: 17 Levels

<Low>: 17 Levels

Setting Menu List

514

6FR9-096

All the settings related to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Printer Settings>(P. 515)

<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 558)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

●Settings marked with "*2" cannot be imported or exported.

Priority of settings

●If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the

specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the

operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when performing PS/PCL printing and

printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.

Congure settings about printing and printer operations.

Select whether printing is performed in accordance with the printer driver's settings for paper size and type

taking priority over the settings made for each paper source under <Paper Settings> in the Home screen. By

selecting <On>, you can print from the paper source specied in the printer driver, regardless of the paper

settings on the machine. An error message can be set to display if the loaded paper size is largely different from

that set in the printer driver.

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

515

<Drawer 2> *1

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Prioritize Driver Settings When

Printing> Select the paper source Select <On> in <Prioritize Driver Settings> <Action When

Size Mismatch> Select <Force Output> or <Display Error> <Apply>

Continue printing even when the paper size setting in the printer driver and the loaded paper are largely

different.

When the paper size setting in the printer driver and the loaded paper are largely different, an error message is

displayed and printing is stopped.

●If the printer driver's settings do not match the size and type of loaded paper with <On> selected, a

paper jam or printing error may occur.

Set the number of copies to print.

1 to 999

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of

copies to print <Apply>

<2-Sided Printing>

Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.

Setting Menu List

516

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select

Set the default paper size and type. Printing will be performed with paper of the size and type set here when

you want to print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not

supporting paper size and type settings. Available Paper(P. 657)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the

paper size Select the paper type

Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but

the other is not. When you select <On>, if you specify A4 size paper to print from the computer but A4 size

paper is not loaded in the machine, it will print your document on Letter size paper.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Paper Size Override> Select

●You can specify print settings, such as the number of copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing, from an

application or the printer driver. However, the <Paper Size Override> setting can only be specied on

the machine.

You can change settings related to print quality.

<Density> *1

Adjust the toner density.

Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black

17 Levels

Setting Menu List

517

17 Levels

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print

Quality> <Density> Adjust the density of each color <Apply>

●You can use <Fine Adjust> to adjust the toner density of each color to three density levels: high

density, medium density, and low density.

●When <Toner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot set this item.

You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance

characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner

Save> Select <Off> or <On>

Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives ner gradation than <High 1>.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print

Quality> <Gradation> Select <High 1> or <High 2>

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

When ne lines or small text are faded, increase the density to give less faded print.

Five Levels

Setting Menu List

518

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density Fine

Adjustment> Adjust the adjustment value <Apply>

●A change in the density affects objects other than text or lines and the color balance.

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>.

Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.

<1200 dpi>

<600 dpi>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print

Quality> <Resolution> Select <1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>

Specify the mode to print data with a smooth nish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in <Mode

1> (default), try another mode.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Special

Smoothing Mode> Select the mode

Prints an outline of dark text or a gure with a smooth nish. This is the optimal mode for various types of

printing.

Prints gure outline and internal halftones with a smooth nish.

Setting Menu List

519

Prints dark text or lines on an area with a colored background with a smooth nish.

Prints an image such as a photo or an outline of a gure or text with a smooth nish.

Prints an image and halftones with an even balance.

Prints the entire image with a smooth nish.

●When <Error Diffusion> is set to <On> in <Halftones>, printing in modes other than <Mode 5> all produces

the same results.

●When <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>, all settings other than <Mode 6> produce the same result.

When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that the

toner volume does not exceed the limit value.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner

Volume Correction> Select the item

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for text and lines, and that proper color

tone is ensured for other types of print data.

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper color tone is ensured for all types of print data.

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for all types of print data.

Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines.

Setting Menu List

520

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Line

Control> Select <Resolution Priority> or <Gradation Priority>

Draws lines with the same resolution as for text.

Draws lines while maintaining color and gradation.

Congure a setting to print text or ne lines in bold.

<Off>

<On>

<Text>

<Line>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Width

Adjustment> <On> Select the target

●If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower or image quality may be affected.

●Even if you set to <On>, bold printing may not be possible depending on the printing application.

Congure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications)

or text with a smooth nish.

Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother nish than

<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

521

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced

Smoothing> <Advanced Smoothing> Select the item

<Apply to Graphics> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to graphics when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced

Smoothing> <Apply to Graphics> Select <Off> or <On>

<Apply to Text> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to the text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced

Smoothing> <Apply to Text> Select <Off> or <On>

●The settings of <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> are only effective when [Advanced Smoothing] is

set to [Printer Default] in the printer driver.

Congure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations created

using applications) or bit map images with a smooth nish.

Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother nish than

<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

522

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation

Smoothing> <Gradation Smoothing> Select the item

<Apply to Graphics> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to graphics when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation

Smoothing> <Apply to Graphics> Select <Off> or <On>

<Apply to Images> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to images when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation

Smoothing> <Apply to Images> Select <Off> or <On>

●[Gradation Smoothing] in the printer driver applies only to graphics data. The setting congured here

applies to smoothing processing for image data.

When printing a color document in black and white, using this item adjusts the density of text to make it

more legible. This is useful and effective for printing in black and white a color document containing light-

colored text.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Enhance

Text for B&W Printing> Select <Off> or <On>

●This item does not apply to text drawn as graphics or images.

Setting Menu List

523

●This item has no effect on PDF or PS print data.

●If you set this item to <Off> when printing documents that contain light-colored text, the text is printed

thinner than when <On> is selected, so it may be more or less illegible.

●Even when this item is set to <Off>, the print result may be such that text looks emphasized. If so, also set

<Advanced Smoothing> to <Off>. <Advanced Smoothing>(P. 521)

Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.

If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind

on the long or short edge. Specify the setting of this item in combination with <Gutter>, which species the

binding margin to apply to the binding position.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding

Location> Select <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>

Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.

Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.

Shift the print position to adjust the binding margin to apply to the binding edge specied by <Binding

Location>. The value "00.0" exerts no effect on the binding margin.

-50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Gutter> Specify

the binding margin <Apply>

Setting Menu List

524

Entering the setting value

Specify the print position shift direction and shift width. Whether the setting value is a "+" or "-" value

determines the binding edge along which to adjust the binding margin. The margin width can be adjusted in

0.5 mm increments. Basic Operation(P. 130)

Setting Value Long Edge Short Edge

A value with a "+" sign Left edge of paper Top edge of paper

A value with a "-" sign Right edge of paper Bottom edge of paper

Irrespective of the paper source, you can shift the print position in units of "0.5 mm" for all print jobs.

-50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> Select the

combination of adjustment direction and printing side Specify the offset value <Apply>

Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing up.

Setting Menu List

525

Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing down.

Entering the setting value

For <Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Short Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print

position in the left-to-right direction. For <Offset Long Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>, specify a

value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. To shift in the reverse direction,

specify a value with a "-" sign. Basic Operation(P. 130)

Printing stops if a certain error occurs in the process. However, if you set this item to <On>, the certain error will

be skipped and printing can continue. Normally, set this item to <Off>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Auto Skip Error> Select

Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data

reception interruption.

5 to 15 to 300 (sec.)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time

period <Apply>

Specify the mode in which the machine should operate when the format of document data is unknown.

<Auto>

<PS>

<PCL>

<PDF>

Setting Menu List

526

<XPS>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Personality> Select the

Personality mode

Select whether to print data in color or black and white.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Color Mode> Select <Auto

(Color/B&W)> or <Black & White>

Specify the operation that is to be performed when the image quality has degraded due to insucient memory

during printing.

Select <Output> or <Display Error>

Continues printing regardless of how much the image quality has degraded.

If the image quality has degraded signicantly, an error message is displayed, and printing is stopped.

Specify whether to feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when Auto Select Paper is enabled. If <On> is

selected, paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray when paper of the same size and same type is loaded in both

the multi-purpose tray and paper drawer.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

527

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Prioritize MP Tray> Select

You can change the settings that become effective when printing from the UFR II printer driver.

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Error Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Image>

Setting Menu List

528

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR

II> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select <Resolution> or

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Specify the processing method used to correct the color.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Matching

Method> Select the item

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.

Setting Menu List

529

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an

image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.

Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.

Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only

the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can

be specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Image>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Gray

Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Paper

Save> Select <Off> or <On>

<PCL>

Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

530

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select

Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select

Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font

samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List(P. 634)

0 to 104

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font

Number> Select the font number <Apply>

<Point Size> *1

Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a

proportionally-spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.

4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify

the point size <Apply>

<Pitch> *1

Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only

when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.

0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)

Setting Menu List

531

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the

pitch value <Apply>

Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according

to the settings specied in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.

5 to 64 to 128 (lines)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form

Lines> Specify the number of lines <Apply>

Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specied setting

is ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in <Font Number>.

<ISO4>

<ISO6>

<ISO11>

<ISO15>

<ISO17>

<ISO21>

<ISO60>

<ISO69>

<ISOL1>

<ISOL2>

<ISOL5>

<ISOL6>

<ISOL9>

<LEGAL>

<MATH8>

<PC775>

<PC8>

<PC850>

<PC851>

<PC852>

<PC858>

<PC862>

<PC864>

<PC866>

<PC8DN>

<PC8TK>

<VNUS>

<WIN30>

<WINL1>

<WINL2>

<WINL5>

Setting Menu List

532

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character

Code> Select the character code

Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension>

and <Y dimension>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom

Paper> Select <Off> or <On>

<Unit of Measure> *1

Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.

<Inch>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of

Measure> Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>

<X dimension> *1

Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.

77 to 216 (mm)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <X

dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>

<Y dimension> *1

Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.

127 to 355 (mm)

Setting Menu List

533

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y

dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>

Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is

selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If

<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.

<Yes>

<No>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to

LF> Select <Yes> or <No>

Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of

Letter size.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print

Width> Select <Off> or <On>

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

534

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Image>

<Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select <Resolution> or <Gradation>

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Setting Menu List

535

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Specify the processing method used to correct the color.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Matching

Method> Select the item

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an

image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.

Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.

Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only

the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can

be specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Image>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

536

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Gray

Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>

<BarDIMM> *1

This setting enables you to print bar codes supported by the Barcode Printing Kit. If <Enable> is selected, the

machine will generate bar codes when it receives bar code commands from the host computer. If <Disable>

is selected, bar codes will not be generated, even if bar code commands are sent from the host computer.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <BarDIMM> Select

●To enable the BarDIMM menu, it is necessary to activate the Barcode Printing Kit. When you are not

printing bar codes, make sure to disable the BarDIMM menu. Otherwise, the processing speed of regular

print jobs may be reduced.

●The default setting is <Disable>. If you activate the Barcode Printing Kit, it changes to <Enable>.

<FreeScape> *1

Specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does

not support the standard Escape Code.

<Off>

<~>

<">

<#>

<$>

</>

<\>

<?>

<{>

<}>

<|>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <FreeScape> Select

an escape code

●This setting is available only when <BarDIMM> is enabled.

Setting Menu List

537

<PS>

Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out. If a job has not nished within

the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.

0 to 3600 (sec.)

Specify the seconds for job timeout <Apply>

This setting determines whether an error page is printed when an error is encountered.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

Congures a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C

= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based

on the <Output Prole> setting.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

<Black Overprint> *1

Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or gure. This option is not

displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

538

Select <Off> or <On>

<Off>

Outlines black text from a colored background or gure rst, then prints black text in the outlined part.

Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.

<On>

Prints all the colored backgrounds and gures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and gures using

only the black (K) toner, then prints.

<RGB Source Prole> *2

Select the prole for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.

<sRGB>

<None>

Select the prole

<sRGB>

Sets the image quality to the industry standard for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor

supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.

Setting Menu List

539

Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from

being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.

<None>

Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source prole.

<CMYK Simulation Prole> *2

Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent

CMYK color model based on the simulation.

<JapanColor(Canon)>

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

<None>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <CMYK Simulation

Prole> Select the prole

<JapanColor(Canon)>

Set a JapanColor prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

Set a U.S. Web Coated prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.

Set a Euro Standard prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing

standard.

<None>

Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation prole.

●When <None> is selected, the dark color gradation may become uneven depending on data.

<Use Grayscale Prole> *2

Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale prole of the machine.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

540

Select <Off> or <On>

●Even if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output

Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.

<Output Prole> *2

Select the appropriate prole for the print data. This option can be specied for each image type in any one

document.

<Text>

<Photo>

<Photo>

<Image>

<Photo>

Select the type of image Select the prole

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting Menu List

541

Setting value

Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.

<Photo>

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.

Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K

(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and

gray elements.

The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.

●<RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>

●<CMYK Simulation Prole> is set to <None>

●<Use Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>

Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Prole>.

Select the item

Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.

Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation

materials.

Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine

as accurately as possible.

●The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>.

Setting Menu List

542

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Image>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer

Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select

Setting Menu List

543

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

<Brightness> *1

Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the

image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.

85 to 100 to 115 (%)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Brightness> Adjust

the brightness

Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Composite

Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>

●Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.

<Grayscale Conversion> *1

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

Setting Menu List

544

Select the type of grayscale conversion

<sRGB>

Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.

<NTSC>

Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC

system).

Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only

brightness as the reference.

You can specify the password that restricts the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <PS Password

Settings> Select <SystemParamsPassword> or <StartJobPassword> Enter the password

<Apply> Enter the password (Conrm) <Apply> <OK>

●<SystemParamsPassword> is a password that allows changes to the system parameter, and

<StartJobPassword> is a password that allows startjob, exitserver operator to perform. For more

information, check PostScript language specications.

●If <StartJobPassword> is set but <SystemParamsPassword> is not set, password check will not be

performed while performing startjob, exitserver operator.

You can change the print settings that will apply when printing image les (JPEG/TIFF).

You can change the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the

lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

Setting Menu List

545

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Imaging

Settings> <Halftones> Select <Gradation> or <Error Diffusion>

Prints images with ne gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<PDF>

You can change settings for PDF les.

Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size

enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Enlarge/Reduce to Fit

Paper Size> Select <Off> or <On>

Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

●If you specify <On>, it may occur that edge-adjacent portions of page are not printed or that printouts

come out partially smudged depending on the original.

Setting Menu List

546

Specify whether to shrink multiple pages and print them on one page in such arrangement that the rst

page is positioned at top left. For example, to print 4 pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>.

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<6 on 1>

<8 on 1>

<9 on 1>

<16 on 1>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <N on 1> Select the

number of pages to be combined

Specify whether to print comments. If you specify <Auto>, comments in PDF les will be printed.

<Off>

<Auto>

Select <Off> or <Auto>

Congures a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C

= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based

on the <Output Prole> setting.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

<Black Overprint> *1

Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or gure. This option is not

displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

547

Select <Off> or <On>

<Off>

Outlines black text from a colored background or gure rst, then prints black text in the outlined part.

Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.

<On>

Prints all the colored backgrounds and gures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and gures using

only the black (K) toner, then prints.

<RGB Source Prole> *2

Select the prole for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.

<sRGB>

<None>

Select the prole

<sRGB>

Sets the image quality to the industry standard for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor

supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.

Setting Menu List

548

Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from

being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.

<None>

Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source prole.

<CMYK Simulation Prole> *2

Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent

CMYK color model based on the simulation.

<JapanColor(Canon)>

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

<None>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <CMYK Simulation

Prole> Select the prole

<JapanColor(Canon)>

Set a JapanColor prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

Set a U.S. Web Coated prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.

Set a Euro Standard prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing

standard.

<None>

Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation prole.

●When <None> is selected, the dark color gradation may become uneven depending on data.

<Use Grayscale Prole> *2

Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale prole of the machine.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

549

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Use Grayscale

Prole> Select <Off> or <On>

●Even if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output

Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.

<Output Prole> *2

Select the appropriate prole for the print data. This option can be specied for each image type in any one

document.

<Text>

<Photo>

<Photo>

<Image>

<Photo>

Select the type of image Select the prole

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting Menu List

550

Prole

Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.

<Photo>

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.

Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K

(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and

gray elements.

The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.

●<RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>

●<CMYK Simulation Prole> is set to <None>

●<Use Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>

Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Prole>.

Select the item

Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.

Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation

materials.

Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine

as accurately as possible.

●The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>.

Setting Menu List

551

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Image>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer

Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select

Setting Menu List

552

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

<Brightness> *1

Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the

image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.

85 to 100 to 115 (%)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Brightness> Adjust

the brightness

Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Composite

Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>

●Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.

<Grayscale Conversion> *1

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

Setting Menu List

553

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Grayscale

Conversion> Select the type of grayscale conversion

<sRGB>

Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.

<NTSC>

Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC

system).

Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only

brightness as the reference.

<XPS>

You can change settings for XPS les.

Specify the processing method used to correct the color.

Select the item

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an

image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.

Setting Menu List

554

Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.

Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

●This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Image>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer

Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select

Setting Menu List

555

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only

the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can

be specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Image>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Gray

Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>

<Grayscale Conversion> *1

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.

<Text>

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

Setting Menu List

556

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

<Image>

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Grayscale

Conversion> Select the type of image Select the type of grayscale conversion

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Type of grayscale conversion

<sRGB>

Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.

<NTSC>

Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the

NTSC system).

Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only

brightness as the reference.

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

557

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Paper Save> Select

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language

when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play.

<Network> *2

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is detected over the network.

<FAX>*1

<PCL6>

<PS>

<USB>

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is connected to a computer via USB.

<PCL6>

<PS>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network>

or <USB> Select a page description language <OK> Restart the machine

<FAX>*1

Detects and connects the machine as a fax device.

Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer.

<PCL6>

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

<PS>

Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.

Setting Menu List

558

<Send>

6FR9-097

All the settings related to sending faxes and scanned originals are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked

with a dagger ( ).

<Common Settings>(P. 559)

<Scan and Send Settings>(P. 560)

<Fax Settings>(P. 565)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

●Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

●Settings marked with "*3" cannot be imported or exported.

Congure the settings to restrict destinations at the time of sending faxes, e-mails, or I-Faxes, and specify the

conrmation method to prevent transmission to wrong destinations.

Select whether to limit the fax numbers and e-mail/I-Fax addresses that can be specied as destinations to

those already registered in the Address Book. Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 418)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to prevent a destination from being selected from the sent job logs. Disabling Use of

Previously Used Destinations(P. 418)

<Off>

<On>

<Conrm When Coded Dial TX>

Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.

Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 418)

<Off>

<On>

<Conrm Dest. Before Sending>

Specify whether to display the destination conrmation screen when sending faxes, e-mails, or I-Faxes. If <Only

for Sequential Broadcast> is selected, the conrmation screen is displayed only when multiple destinations are

specied. Checking Destinations when Sending Data(P. 419)

<Off>

Setting Menu List

559

<On>

You can change and register the settings for sending faxes or scanned documents.

mail address. If the sender name is not registered, only the e-mail address is displayed.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <Register Unit

Name> Enter the sender name <Apply>

<E-Mail Settings>

Change the default settings used for scanning originals to send as e-mails.

You can change the default settings used for scanning originals to send as e-mails. The selected settings are

used as the default settings when scanning originals. Changing the Default Settings for

Functions(P. 173)

<A4>

<A5R>

<B5>

<LTR>

<LGL>

<STMT>

<EXEC>

<PDF>

<Encryption>*1

Setting Menu List

560

<None>

<Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>*1

<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>*1

<Digital Signatures>*1

<None>

<Off>

<On>

<JPEG>

<TIFF>

<Off>

<On>

Nine Levels

<Text>

<Photo>

<2-Sided Original >

<Off>

Seven Levels

<Small: Memory Priority>

<Large: Image Quality Priority>

<None>

Setting Menu List

561

<Low>

<High>

Congure so that destinations registered in the address book of mobile devices can be specied as send

destinations. When <Use Remote UI Access PIN> is set to <On>, a PIN is required for access to the machine.

To set a PIN, use <Remote UI Access PIN>. <Remote UI Settings>(P. 594)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <E-Mail Settings> <Link

Mobile Device Addr. Book> Select <On> in <Link Mobile Device Address Book> Select <Off> or

<I-Fax Settings>

Specify the basic settings for using the machine as an I-Fax device.

You can change the default settings used for sending I-Fax. The selected settings are used as the default

settings when scanning originals. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

<A4>

<A5R>

<B5>

<LTR>

<LGL>

<STMT>

<EXEC>

Nine Levels

Setting Menu List

562

<Text>

<Photo>

<2-Sided Original >

<Off>

Seven Levels

<None>

Information such as the date and time of transmission and the e-mail address of the machine (sender

information) can be added as a header in transmitted documents. This information tells the recipient when

the I-Fax was sent and who sent it.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <TX

Terminal ID> Select <On> in <Add TX Terminal ID> <Print Position> Select <Inside Image

Area> or <Outside Image Area> <Apply>

Change the default settings used when originals are saved to a shared folder or FTP server.

You can change the default settings used when originals are saved to a shared folder or FTP server. The

selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning. Changing the Default Settings for

Functions(P. 173)

<A4>

<A5R>

<B5>

Setting Menu List

563

<LTR>

<LGL>

<STMT>

<EXEC>

<PDF>

<Encryption>*1

<None>

<Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>*1

<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>*1

<Digital Signatures>*1

<None>

<Off>

<On>

<JPEG>

<TIFF>

<Off>

<On>

Nine Levels

<Text>

<Photo>

Setting Menu List

564

<2-Sided Original>

<Off>

Seven Levels

<Small: Memory Priority>

<Large: Image Quality Priority>

<Fax Settings> *1

Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a fax device.

You can change the default settings used for sending faxes. The selected settings are used as the default

settings when scanning originals. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 173)

<200 x 100 dpi (Normal)>

<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>

<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>

<200 x 400 dpi (Superne)>

<400 x 400 dpi (Ultrane)>

Nine Levels

<2-Sided Original >

<Off>

Seven Levels

<Off-Hook Alarm>

Select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone or the optional handset

connected to the machine is not properly set on the cradle. You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound.

0 to 3

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Off-Hook Alarm> Select the

volume of the alert sound <Apply>

Setting Menu List

565

Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce

errors on received faxes, see <ECM RX>(P. 574) .

<Off>

<On>

●ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error checks are

performed on both the sending and receiving devices.

●Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.

●It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error checks

and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.

<Set Pause Time> *2

For example, when you make calls by dialing "0 - (pause) - (telephone number)," 0 is dialed rst and then a few

seconds later, the telephone number. When sending faxes overseas, you need to specify destinations by dialing

"(international access code) - (country code) - (area code) - (fax number)" but consecutive numbers that are

input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. In this case, try adding a pause after the international

access code or the fax number. If the code or the number is still not recognized correctly, change the duration

of the pause. For instructions on how to enter a pause, see Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218) .

1 to 4 to 15 (sec.)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Set Pause Time> Specify the

duration of pause <Apply>

<Auto Redial> *2

Specify settings for Auto Redial, a function that automatically redials the fax number after several minutes if the

rst attempt fails because the line is busy. You can specify how many times the machine redials and the interval

between redials.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 2 to 10 (time(s))

2 to 99 (min.)

<Off>

Setting Menu List

566

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Auto Redial> Select <On> in <Use

Auto Redial> Specify the settings <Apply>

Species how many times the machine redials. Enter a number, and select <Apply>.

Species the interval between redials. Enter a number for the interval, and select <Apply>.

When set to <On>, species to redial when a transmission error occurs.

<Check Dial Tone Before Send> *2

Select whether to check the dial tone before a fax number is dialed.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Check Dial Tone Before

Send> <On>

Specify a fax number, unit name, and line type.

registered name is sent as sender information to the destination ( <TX Terminal ID>(P. 570) ).

<Select Line Type> *2

Select the telephone line type used for fax transmission. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)

<Pulse>

<Tone>

Setting Menu List

567

If it takes a long time to start sending a fax, such as when there is a poor connection, you can adjust the

communication start speed downward incrementally.

<33600 bps>

<14400 bps>

<9600 bps>

<7200 bps>

<4800 bps>

<2400 bps>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <TX Start Speed> Select the

communication start speed

<R-Key Setting>

If your machine is connected through a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), it is necessary to set the access method.

If you set it to <PBX>, the <R> key will be displayed on the Fax Basic Features screen. If you assign an outside

line access number to the <R> key, you can easily access the outside line.

<PSTN>

<PBX> *2

<Prex>

Prex Code

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <R-Key Setting> <PBX> Select

<Prex> or <Hooking> Enter an outside line access number if you select <Prex>

<Apply>

<PBX>*2

Select <PBX> when you want the machine to be connected through a PBX (Private Branch Exchange). Set the

function of the <R> key displayed on the Fax Basic Features screen to <Prex> or <Hooking>. If you select

<Prex>, register the prex code on the next screen. Enter the prex code using the numeric keys, select

<Pause>, and then select <Apply>. If you do not insert a pause, the prex code is not registered.

Setting Menu List

568

<Archive TX Document> *3

In addition to the destination specied when the fax is sent, you can specify whether faxed documents are

also sent to a preset storage address for archiving. Saving a Copy of a Sent Original(P. 237)

<Off>

<On>

<Conrm Entered Fax Number>

Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.

Conrming the Entered Fax Number(P. 420)

<Off>

<On>

Enable or disable PC faxing (sending faxes from a computer). Restricting Fax Sending from a

Computer(P. 420)

<Off>

<On>

Make a setting so that you can perform fax transmission by entering a specic number before specifying a

coded dial number or specifying a destination from the Address Book.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Use Addr. Book When On-

Hook> Select <Do Not Allow After Num. Key Use> or <Always Allow>

●Transmission may be impossible if the entered number consists of too many digits.

Select whether to prohibit sequential broadcasting, a feature that sends faxes to multiple destinations in

succession. Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 420)

Setting Menu List

569

<Off>

<On>

Specify whether to disable registering destinations from fax send logs to the Address Book. Disabling

Destination Registration from Logs to the Address Book(P. 421)

<Allow>

Specify settings for adding the sender information, including the fax number and the name of the machine, to

the fax header. The recipient can check who sent the fax by looking at the added information.

<Off>

<On>

<Fax>

<Tel>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <TX Terminal ID> Select <On> in

<Add TX Terminal ID> Specify the settings <Apply>

Species the position to print the terminal ID information in the sent fax. Select <Inside Image Area> to print

the information inside the image area, or <Outside Image Area> to print the information outside the image

area.

Adds the "Fax" or "Tel" mark in front of the fax number registered for the machine ( Registering the Fax

Number and Unit Name(P. 81) ). Select <Tel> to indicate that the notied number is a telephone number.

When you want to perform a successful fax communication with a partner device or on a line with which errors

tend to occur easily, you can use this function to reduce communication errors.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

570

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Auto Adjust VoIP Comm.

Speed> Select <Off> or <On>

●If you set the function to <On>, the communication speed may be slower.

Setting Menu List

571

6FR9-098

All the settings related to receiving faxes and e-mails are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger ( ).

<Common Settings>(P. 572)

<I-Fax Settings>(P. 573)

<Fax Settings>(P. 574)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

●Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

●Settings marked with "*3" cannot be imported or exported.

Specify operations that are to be performed when faxes are received in memory and when the amount remaining in

the toner cartridge is low.

<Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox> *1

Congure settings for receiving faxes in memory.

Select whether to store received faxes without immediately printing them. Stored fax documents can be

printed at any time by changing the setting to <Off>. Saving Received Documents into the Machine

(Memory Reception)(P. 240)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

572

If receiving faxes when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low, the machine holds them in memory

instead of printing. However, if this function is enabled, the machine continues printing. In addition to fax

reception, this is true with I-Fax reception.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Continue Print.

When Cart. Low> <On>

●When this function is enabled, faxes may fade or blur. Because received documents are not stored,

you need to ask the sender to resend the document.

<I-Fax Settings>

Congure settings to print received I-Fax documents.

Specify settings for printing received documents on both sides of paper.

<Off>

<On>

<On>

Specify the paper size to be used for printing.

<A4>

<LTR>

<LGL>

Setting Menu List

573

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <I-Fax Settings> <RX Print Size> Select

the paper size

<Fax Settings> *1

Congure settings for receiving and forwarding faxes.

Specify settings for printing received documents on both sides of paper.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Print on Both

Sides> <On>

Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce

errors on sent faxes, see <ECM TX>(P. 566) .

<Off>

<On>

●ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error check is

performed on both the sending and receiving devices.

●Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.

●It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error check

and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.

<Incoming Ring> *2

Specify settings for sounding a ring to notify you of incoming faxes. This feature is only available when <Auto>

or <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> is selected for the receive mode. Specify how many times the incoming call rings

when the machine receives a fax call. You can also disable the settings to prevent the incoming call from

ringing.

Setting Menu List

574

<Off>

<On>

1 to 2 to 99 (time(s))

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Incoming Ring> Select

<On> in <Use Incoming Ring> Enter the desired number in <Number of Rings> <Apply>

●When <On> is specied, you need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine

beforehand.

●When <Off> is specied, the machine does not enter sleep mode.

<Remote RX> *2

Specify settings for receiving a fax by operating a telephone that is connected to the machine (Remote

Reception). When a fax is sent to the machine, you can receive it just by picking up the handset of the telephone

and entering a specic ID number by using the telephone. This feature can save you the trouble of going all the

way to the machine. For instructions on how to use Remote Reception, see Using a Telephone to Receive

Faxes (Remote Reception)(P. 230) .

<Off>

<On>

00 to 25 to 99

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Remote RX> Select

<On> in <Use Remote RX> Enter the ID number in <Remote RX ID> <Apply>

Specify settings for automatically receiving a fax after the machine has rung for a specied time period. This

feature is only available when <Manual> is selected for the receive mode. By using this feature, faxes can be

received even when no one is available to pick up the handset.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 15 to 99 (sec.)

Setting Menu List

575

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Switch to Auto

RX> Select <On> in <Use Switch to Auto RX> Enter the desired number of seconds in <Ring

Time Until Auto RX> <Apply>

If it takes a long time to start receiving a fax, such as when there is a poor connection, you can adjust the

communication start speed downward incrementally.

<33600 bps>

<14400 bps>

<9600 bps>

<7200 bps>

<4800 bps>

<2400 bps>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <RX Start Speed> Select

the communication start speed

Specify settings for reducing the image size of a received document. You can select an automatic reduction ratio

that reduces the received document to size of the loaded paper. You can also select a ratio from a list.

<Off>

<On>

<Auto>

<97%>

<95%>

<90%>

<75%>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Use Reduce RX

Size> Select <On> in <Use Reduce RX Size> Specify each setting item <Apply>

Setting Menu List

576

<Auto> reduces the image by a ratio that is based on the size of the loaded paper. <97%>, <95%>, <90%>, or

<75%> reduces the image by the corresponding ratio.

Select <Vertical/Horizontal> to reduce the image both vertically and horizontally. Select <Vertical Only> to

reduce only vertically.

Select whether to print information, including date and time of reception and page numbers, on the bottom of

received faxes.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Print RX Page

Footer> <On>

Specify settings for forwarding faxes.

<Forwarding Function> *3

Select whether to forward all the received fax documents to a specied destination. In addition to a fax

number, you can also specify an e-mail address or a shared folder in a computer, etc. as the forwarding

destination. Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically(P. 242)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to print forwarded fax documents. You can set the machine to print forwarded documents

only when an error occurs. Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 243)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to store fax documents in memory when they are not successfully forwarded. You can resend

or print the documents later as necessary. Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be

Forwarded(P. 243)

Setting Menu List

577

<Off>

Setting Menu List

578

6FR9-099

All the settings related to saving the scanned document to a USB memory device or printing stored les are listed with

descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Common Settings>(P. 579)

<Memory Media Settings>(P. 586)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or

other setting items.

Change the settings for le saving or memory media print.

Congure settings for saving the scanned document to a USB memory device.

You can change the settings used when data is saved to a USB memory device.

You can change the default settings used for saving scanned originals to a USB memory device. The

selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning originals. Changing the Default

Settings for Functions(P. 173)

<A4>

<A5R>

<B5>

<LTR>

<LGL>

<STMT>

<EXEC>

<PDF>

Setting Menu List

579

<Encryption>*

<None>

<Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>*

<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>*

<Digital Signatures>*

<None>

<Off>

<On>

<JPEG>

<TIFF>

<Off>

<On>

Nine Levels

<Text>

<Photo>

<2-Sided Original>

<Off>

Seven Levels

<Small: Memory Priority>

<Large: Image Quality Priority>

You can change the settings to print les in a USB memory device and the method for displaying them.

Setting Menu List

580

You can change the default settings associated with memory media print. The settings congured here are

used as the default settings of the memory media print function. Changing the Default Settings for

Functions(P. 173)

<Paper>

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Drawer 2>*

1 to 999

<2-Sided Printing>

<Off>

Five Levels

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

< Set PDF Details>

Seven Levels

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<6 on 1>

<8 on 1>

<9 on 1>

<16 on 1>

<Specied Pages>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

581

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<Auto>

<Off>

<On>

<Resolution/Gradation>*

<Text>

<Image>

<Off>

<On>

<Black Overprint>*

<Off>

<On>

<sRGB>

<None>

<JapanColor(Canon)>

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

<None>

<Off>

<On>

<Text>

<Photo>

Setting Menu List

582

<Photo>

<Image>

<Photo>

<Off>

<On>

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

<Density>*

Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black

17 Levels

17 levels

<Off>

<On>

Five Levels

<1200 dpi>

<600 dpi>

Setting Menu List

583

<Off>

<On>

<Text>

<Line>

<Off>

<Apply to Graphics>*

<Off>

<On>

<Apply to Text>*

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<Apply to Graphics>*

<Off>

<On>

<Apply to Images>*

<Off>

<On>

Select Preview/Thumbnail/Details as the method for displaying les in a USB memory device.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored

Files Settings> <Default Display Settings> Select the method for displaying

Setting Menu List

584

Displays a preview image.

Displays thumbnail images.

Displays le names and dates in list form.

Select whether to display les in a USB memory device in ascending or descending order of le name or date.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored

Files Settings> <File Sort Default Settings> Select the order of les that are displayed

Select whether to display short or long text for le names that are stored in a USB memory device.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored

Files Settings> <File Name Display Format> Select <Short File Name> or <Long File Name>

Shortens a le name to as few as eight characters. To distinguish les that have similar names, numbers such as

"~1" or "~2" are added at the end of the le names.

Setting Menu List

585

Displays a le name up to 40 characters.

●The number of characters described above does not include the characters in le extensions, such as ".jpg."

Specify whether to enable or disable the functions of a USB memory device.

Select whether to permit storing scanned originals into a USB memory device. Restricting the Scan to USB

Function(P. 423)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to permit printing data from a USB memory device when it is attached to the machine.

Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 423)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

586

6FR9-09A

Specify whether to enable or disable Secure Print ( Printing via Secure Print(P. 269) ). Default settings are marked

with a dagger ( ).

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

10 to 30 to 240 (min.)

Setting Menu List

587

6FR9-09C

All the settings related to the address book are listed with descriptions.

Specify a PIN and require entering it to add new entries to or edit existing entries in the Address Book. Restricting

Use of the Address Book(P. 416)

Setting Menu List

588

6FR9-09E

Item Description

<User Management>(P. 590) You can congure the settings for managing users of the machine.

<Device Management>(P. 591) You can manage information about the hardware and operations, as well as various data

required when using the machine functions.

<License/Other>(P. 594) You can congure the settings related to the Remote UI and software available for the

machine.

<Data Management>(P. 596) You can congure settings to utilize data such as machine settings data or perform data

initialization.

<Security Settings>(P. 598) You can congure the settings related to the user authentication function, password, and

encryption.

<Initialize All Data/Settings> Restores all data including logs and setting values to their default settings. Initializing All

Data/Settings(P. 458)

Setting Menu List

589

6FR9-09F

All the settings related to user management of the machine are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked

with a dagger ( ).

<System Manager Information Settings>(P. 590)

<Department ID Management>(P. 590)

Specify the ID or PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network> and <Management

Settings>. ID is <System Manager ID> and PIN is <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an

Administrator. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 365)

Enter a number for the System Manager ID and PIN.

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.

Set the Department ID Management function to control access to the machine by using multiple IDs. Setting the

Department ID Management(P. 367)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

●You can select <Register/Edit> to register department IDs and edit the settings of the registered IDs.

●You can select <Count Mngt.> to check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date

on a department ID basis.

Setting Menu List

590

6FR9-09H

All the settings related to management of information for the hardware and operations, as well as about management

of data required when using the machine functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger ( ).

<Device Information Settings>(P. 591)

<Select Country/Region>(P. 591)

<Display Job Log>(P. 592)

<Use NFC>(P. 592)

<Scan w/Canon PRINT Business>(P. 593)

<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 593)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.

●Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

●Settings marked with "*3" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Device Information

Settings> Select <Device Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location ( Entering

Text(P. 133) ) <Apply>

<Select Country/Region> *1 *2

Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting

selected at initial power-on.

Setting Menu List

591

<Other>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Select Country/Region> Select

a country or region

Select whether to display the copying, printing, faxing, and scanning logs on the display of the machine and in the

Communication Management Report.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Display Job Log> Select <Off>

or <On> <OK> Restart the machine

<Use NFC> *3

Select whether to allow printing by touching an NFC-capable mobile device to the NFC mark on the machine's

operation panel.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Use NFC> Select <Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

592

Select whether to allow scanning from a mobile device using the Canon PRINT Business application.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the machine

Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the

machine.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the machine

Setting Menu List

593

6FR9-09J

All the settings related to the software and system options available for the machine as well as about Register License

are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Register License>(P. 594)

<Remote UI Settings>(P. 594)

<Update Firmware>(P. 595)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be imported or exported.

<Register License> *

Enter the license key for a system option that can be used on the machine. License Registration(P. 674)

<Remote UI Settings> *

Congure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web

browser.

Select whether to use the Remote UI ( Disabling Remote UI(P. 426) ). When using Remote UI, you can also

specify whether to use the TLS encrypted communication ( Conguring the Key and Certicate for

TLS(P. 391) ).

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Select <On> in <Use Remote UI> Select <Off> or <On> in <Use TLS> <Apply> <OK>

Restart the machine

Specify so that entry of a PIN is required for access to the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a

common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 373)

<Off >

Setting Menu List

594

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other> <Remote UI Settings> <Restrict

Access> <On> Enter the PIN <Apply> Enter the PIN (Conrm) <Apply>

<Update Firmware> *

Select how to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine. Updating the

Firmware(P. 455)

Setting Menu List

595

6FR9-09K

The settings for utilizing the machine settings and for initializing data are listed with descriptions. Default settings are

marked with a dagger ( ).

<Import/Export>(P. 596)

<Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.>(P. 597)

<Initialize Key and Certicate>(P. 597)

<Initialize Address Book>(P. 597)

<Initialize Menu>(P. 597)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be imported or exported.

<Import/Export> *

You can use a USB memory device to import and export data in the Address Book and various settings of the machine.

For more information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device, see

Using a USB Memory Device(P. 187) .

Import

<Yes> Enter the password <Apply>

Export

Enter the password <Apply> Enter the password (Conrm) <Apply>

If the <Address Book PIN> screen appears

●If a PIN has been set for the Address Book, the <Address Book PIN> screen appears during importing/

exporting. Enter the Address Book PIN and select <Apply>. Select <Skip> to cancel Address Book data

importing/exporting.

When import is executed

●The machine automatically restarts after the import process has nished.

Setting Menu List

596

Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey

Prog.> Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the machine

<Initialize Key and Certicate> *

Select to restore [Key and Certicate Settings] and [CA Certicate Settings] to the factory defaults. Initializing Key

and Certicate(P. 457)

<Initialize Address Book> *

Select to restore the Address Book settings to the factory defaults. Initializing Address Book(P. 458)

<Initialize Menu> *

Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,

or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 457)

Setting Menu List

597

6FR9-09L

All the settings related to the authentication function and encryption are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are

marked with a dagger ( ).

<Authentication/Password Settings>(P. 598)

<Encryption Settings>(P. 598)

<Verify System at Startup>(P. 599)

You can reinforce the security of the authentication function.

Congure the security functions for user authentication.

When a user has failed user authentication, specify whether to disable the user from temporarily logging in

to the machine (lockout). When <On> is selected, specify how many consecutive times failures are permitted

before lockout is activated and also the time required before a user can log in again after lockout.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 10 (time(s))

1 to 60 (min.)

<Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout> Select <On> in <Enable Lockout> Specify

each setting item <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

●This option is not applied to login using the department ID.

Congure a setting for disabling a weak encryption or the key and certication using a weak encryption.

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

Setting Menu List

598

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> Select <On>

in <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> Select <Off> or <On> in <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>

<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

When the machine starts or when an application (in Application Library) is executed, verication is performed to

determine that the system or application has not been tampered. If tampering is detected, the machine enters a state

to wait for rmware update. In this case, perform a rmware update operation from a computer. Updating the

Firmware(P. 455)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Verify System at

Startup> <On> <Yes> Restart the machine automatically

●If nothing is displayed even after a while, system recovery may be impossible. In this case, contact your local

authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

●If an application installed after shipping of the machine from the factory has been tampered, it needs to be

reinstalled on the machine.

Setting Menu List

599

Maintenance

Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 601

Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 603

Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 604

Cleaning the Platen Glass ............................................................................................................................. 605

Cleaning the Feeder ..................................................................................................................................... 606

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 609

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB) .................................................................................................................... 611

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 612

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 617

Adjusting Image Quality ................................................................................................................................... 618

Adjusting Gradation ..................................................................................................................................... 619

Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" ................................................................................................................ 624

Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility ............................................................................................ 625

Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 627

Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 629

Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 630

Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................................................ 635

Maintenance

600

Maintenance

6FR9-09R

This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.

◼Basic Cleaning

Regular Cleaning(P. 603)

◼Replacing Consumables

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 612) Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 617)

Replacement Parts(P. 635)

◼Adjusting and Managing the Machine

Maintenance

601

Adjusting Image Quality(P. 618) Viewing the Counter Value(P. 629)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 630)

Maintenance

602

Regular Cleaning

6FR9-09S

Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.

Where to Clean

Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots

Cleaning the Exterior(P. 604)

Feeder

Cleaning the Feeder(P. 606)

Internal xing assembly and transfer belt

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 609)

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 611)

Platen glass and the underside of the feeder

Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 605)

Maintenance

603

Cleaning the Exterior

6FR9-09U

Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good

condition.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were

received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are

automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.

2Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.

●Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.

●To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side(P. 106) .

3Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.

4Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

604

Cleaning the Platen Glass

6FR9-09W

Regularly wipe off the dust from the platen glass and the underside of the feeder to prevent smudges to be printed on

originals or printouts.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

●Turning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,

documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are

not deleted.

2Open the feeder.

3Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.

●Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

4Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.

5Gently close the feeder.

6Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

605

Cleaning the Feeder

6FR9-09X

Graphite powder or dust on the rollers inside the feeder or on the document feed scanning area may cause smudges

to appear on printouts. If this occurs or if a paper jam occurs frequently, clean the feeder. If the problem persists after

cleaning the feeder, perform automatic feeder cleaning.

Cleaning the Feeder(P. 606)

Automatic Feeder Cleaning(P. 608)

Cleaning the Feeder

1Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power outlet.

●Turning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,

documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are

not deleted.

2Open the original supply tray.

3Open the feeder cover.

4Wipe the rollers in the feeder.

●Wipe the rollers with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out. Then wipe with a dry cloth.

Maintenance

606

●If the rollers and surrounding areas are very dirty, clean them out. To do this, wet a cloth with water and

wring it out well, then wipe the dirty areas. Afterwards, wipe the areas with a soft and dry cloth.

5Close the feeder cover and original supply tray.

6Open the feeder.

7Wipe the document feed scanning area.

●Wipe with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out, and then wipe with a dry cloth.

8Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.

Maintenance

607

9Gently close the feeder.

10 Plug the machine back into the power outlet and switch it on.

Automatic Feeder Cleaning

Automatic feeder cleaning uses paper loaded in the feeder. Set 10 sheets of plain A4 or US Letter size paper in the

feeder before starting automatic cleaning. Placing Originals(P. 137)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.

3Select <Clean Feeder>.

4Select <Start>.

➠Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press to return to the

Home screen.

Maintenance

608

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly

6FR9-09Y

If the xing assembly is dirty, the printout may get smudged. There are two ways of cleaning the xing assembly

depending on how the paper is smudged. First perform <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>. If

this has no effect, then try <Clean Fixing Assembly>. Note that you cannot clean the xing assembly when the machine

has documents waiting to be printed. To clean the xing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set the

paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray before performing the following procedure. Loading Paper(P. 141)

Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)(P. 609)

Clean Fixing Assembly(P. 610)

●Prior to performing cleaning, make sure that there remains a sucient amount remaining in the toner

cartridges. Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 617)

Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)

●Cleaning will be more effective if it is performed about one hour after completion of the previous printing

session.

●You can also congure so that cleaning is automatically performed in effective timing. <Auto Clean Fixing

Assembly>(P. 498)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.

3Select <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>.

4Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <OK>.

5Select <Start>.

➠Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press to return to the

Home screen.

●When <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)> is complete, a sheet of blank paper is

ejected. If the symptom does not improve, then also perform <Clean Fixing Assembly>.

Maintenance

609

Clean Fixing Assembly

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.

3Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.

4Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <OK>.

5Select <Start>.

➠Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press to return to the

Home screen.

●When <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete, a sheet of paper with a printed pattern is ejected.

Maintenance

610

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)

6FR9-0A0

Dirt may adhere to the transfer belt inside the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate. To clean the transfer

belt, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the transfer belt when the machine has documents

waiting to be printed.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.

3Select <Clean ITB>.

4Select <Start>.

➠Cleaning starts. When a message appears stating that cleaning is complete, press to return to the

Home screen.

Maintenance

611

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

6FR9-0A1

A warning message appears in the display when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low or when printing

is no longer possible because of toner depletion. Note that the print quality may suffer if you continue printing without

resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges on the display ( Checking the

Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 617) ).

When a Message Appear(P. 612)

When Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 613)

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 614)

When a Message Appear

The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Depending on which

message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready or replace the

toner cartridge.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 614)

Replacement Parts(P. 635)

This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a

replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print

a large job.

When a message is displayed

●When copying or printing, you can continue printing the original.

●If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge when the machine is receiving a fax/I-Fax or

automatic report output is set, received faxes/I-Faxes and reports will be stored in memory so that

they do not appear faded after they are printed. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in

toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> to <On>. <Continue Print.

When Cart. Low>(P. 573)

Specify when a message is displayed

●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers

a message. <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>(P. 465)

This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a

replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print

a large job. This appears when <Action When Warning> is set to <Stop Printing> ( <Action When

Warning>(P. 466) ).

Maintenance

612

Displays the procedure for replacing a toner cartridge. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the toner

cartridge.

You can end a printing stoppage state and continue copying/printing.

●If a message is displayed when the machine is receiving a fax/I-Fax or automatic report output is set,

received faxes/I-Faxes and reports will be stored in memory so that they do not appear faded after they are

printed. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue

Print. When Cart. Low> to <On>. <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>(P. 573)

Specify when a message is displayed

●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers

a message. <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>(P. 465)

This message, which appears with the toner cartridge color(s), noties you that a toner cartridge has reached

the end of its lifetime, so printing cannot be performed.

Displays the procedure for replacing a toner cartridge. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the toner

cartridge.

When Printouts are Poor in Quality

If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the

nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed. Procedure for Replacing the Toner

Cartridge(P. 614)

Streaks Appear/Printing is

Uneven

Partially faded Uneven density White Spots Appear

Maintenance

613

Toner smudges and splatters appear Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Read the precautions in "Getting Started" provided with this product before replacing the toner cartridges. Manuals

and Their Contents(P. 676)

1Open the front cover.

2Pull out the cartridge tray.

3Pull the target toner cartridge straight up and out of the machine.

Maintenance

614

4Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the packing material.

1Pull the tab of the packing material on a at place.

2Pull out the toner cartridge.

5Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner

inside the cartridge.

●Do not touch the surface of the drum on the bottom of the toner cartridge.

6Install the toner cartridge.

Maintenance

615

●Each toner cartridge color has its own slot in the toner cartridge tray, and this tray is indicated with a

corresponding color label ( ). Place the toner cartridge into the slot that corresponds to its color.

●The bottom surface of the toner cartridge is exposed; therefore, be careful not to bump the toner

cartridge against the slot frame when inserting it into the slot.

7Push the toner cartridge tray back in, and close the front cover.

●Immediately after the front cover is closed, the quick adjustment ( Quick Adjust(P. 621) ) starts. To

perform adjustment for higher quality, perform full adjustment ( Full Adjust(P. 619) ).

LINKS

Replacement Parts(P. 635)

Maintenance

616

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables

6FR9-0A2

Use the procedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. It is particularly important to check

whether you need to have a new toner cartridge ready before starting a large print job.

<Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Cartridge Information> Checking the amount

remaining in the toner cartridges

●The displayed amount remaining in a toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ from the

actual amount.

LINKS

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 612)

Replacement Parts(P. 635)

Maintenance

617

Adjusting Image Quality

6FR9-0A4

If the print results or scanned images are not satisfactory such as low image quality, poor reproducibility, or print color

mismatch, try the adjustments below.

◼Auto Adjust Gradation

If the density or brightness of colors in printouts and originals are different, perform <Auto Adjust Gradation> to

improve color reproducibility. There are three types of adjustments: <Full Adjust>, <Quick Adjust>, and <Adjust Copy

Image>. Adjusting Gradation(P. 619)

◼Correct Print Color Mismatch

If the colors in printouts become blurry, perform <Correct Print Color Mismatch>. This problem may be caused by a

color mismatch. Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 624)

◼Black Text Processing for Color

You can make an adjustment such that black or nearly black text is reproduced in a color closely matching with the

original that was scanned in color. Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility(P. 625)

◼Adjust Print Position

You can adjust the print position when the printed image is skewed or part of the image is outside the print range.

Adjusting Print Position(P. 627)

Maintenance

618

Adjusting Gradation

6FR9-0A5

Gradation refers to the dark to light continuum of shades of a color. The more shades in the gradations of colors that

are printed, the more natural printouts seem. If color reproducibility becomes poor and the density and brightness of

printouts differs markedly from the originals, perform the appropriate adjustment (calibration). There are three types

of adjustments: "Full Adjust" for accurate adjustment, "Quick Adjust" for simple adjustment, and "Adjust Copy Image"

for gradation adjustment, especially for copying.

Full Adjust(P. 619)

Quick Adjust(P. 621)

Adjust Copy Image(P. 621)

●Frequent calibration may affect the lifetime of toner cartridges.

●When the remaining amount of toner in cartridges is low, performing calibration may result in disruption of

color balance. If this phenomenon actually occurs after calibration, it is recommended that you replace any

toner cartridges of low remaining amount. Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 617)

●The machine performs automatic adjustment (automatic calibration) in accordance with changes in the

usage condition or environmental conditions.

Full Adjust

This adjustment optimizes reproducibility for color printing. When the machine performs full adjustment, it obtains

information to optimize color reproducibility. The machine maintains this information until the next time you perform

full adjustment. To make a full adjustment, repeat the operation, "print out the adjustment image and scan it,"

multiple times. Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while performing some functions, including, scanning,

and printing.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Adjust

Gradation>.

3Select <Full Adjust>.

Maintenance

619

4Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <OK>.

5Conrm the procedure, and select <Start>.

➠An adjustment image is printed.

6Open the feeder after the screen displayed during printing disappears.

7Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.

●Place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black stripe toward the back side of the

machine.

8Gently close the feeder.

9Select <Start Scanning>.

➠The placed adjustment image is scanned, and then the second adjustment image is printed.

10 Open the feeder, remove the rst adjustment image, and then place the second

adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face down.

●In the same way as for the rst adjustment image, place the adjustment image with the print side facing

down and the black stripe toward the back side of the machine.

11 Gently close the feeder.

12 Select <Start Scanning>.

➠The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts.

13 When a message appears notifying that adjustment is complete, open the feeder,

and remove the adjustment image.

Maintenance

620

14 Gently close the feeder.

If the <Could not perform correction.> message is displayed

●Did you load the paper displayed in step 4 into the paper source?

●Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face down, with the black stripe toward the back side

of the machine?

●Has a paper jam occurred? For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual

website.

●Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge sucient? If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low,

it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge. Checking the Remaining Amount of

Consumables(P. 617)

●Is the transfer belt inside the machine dirty? Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 611)

Quick Adjust

This adjustment maintains the optimized status that was acquired by <Full Adjust>. If the result of this adjustment is

not satisfactory, perform <Full Adjust>. This adjustment may be automatically performed after you replace a toner

cartridge.

●Quick adjustment is not available while scanning or printing is performed.

●You can also congure so that a quick adjustment is automatically performed immediately after the machine

is turned ON or when a rst print job is performed. <Auto Correction Settings>(P. 491)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Adjust

Gradation>.

3Select <Quick Adjust>.

4Select <Start>.

➠The adjustment starts.

Adjust Copy Image

Use this adjustment when the appearance of copy is extremely different from that of the original. The adjustment

operation is to "print out the adjustment image and scan it." Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while

performing some functions such as scanning and printing.

Maintenance

621

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Adjust

Gradation>.

3Select <Adjust Copy Image>.

4Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <OK>.

5Conrm the procedure, and select <Start>.

➠An adjustment image is printed.

6Open the feeder after the screen displayed during printing disappears.

7Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.

●Place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black stripe toward the back side of the

machine.

8Gently close the feeder.

9Select <Start Scanning>.

➠The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts.

10 When a message appears notifying that adjustment is complete, open the feeder,

and remove the adjustment image.

11 Gently close the feeder.

Maintenance

622

If the <Could not perform correction.> message is displayed

●Did you load the paper displayed in step 4 into the paper source?

●Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face down, with the black stripe toward the back side

of the machine?

●Has a paper jam occurred? For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual

website.

●Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge sucient? If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low,

it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge. Checking the Remaining Amount of

Consumables(P. 617)

●Is the transfer belt inside the machine dirty? Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 611)

Maintenance

623

Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"

6FR9-0A6

Print color mismatch refers to a shift in the positions of colors that may occur when printing one image with multiple

toner cartridges. Print color mismatch can cause printouts to appear blurry. If print color mismatch occurs, perform

the following calibration procedure.

●Frequent calibration may affect the lifetime of toner cartridges.

●When the remaining amount of toner in cartridges is low, performing calibration may result in disruption of

color balance. If this phenomenon actually occurs after calibration, it is recommended that you replace any

toner cartridges of low remaining amount. Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 617)

●The machine performs automatic adjustment (automatic calibration) in accordance with changes in the

usage condition or environmental conditions.

●You can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON. <Auto

Correction Settings>(P. 491)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality>.

3Select <Correct Print Color Mismatch>.

4Select <Start>.

➠The adjustment starts.

Maintenance

624

Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility

6FR9-0A7

You can make an adjustment such that black or nearly black text is reproduced in a color closely matching with the

original that was scanned in color.

●This function will apply when copy or scan is performed with <Original Type> set to other than <Printed

Image>/<Photo>.

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying(P. 203)

Adjusting Image Quality(P. 307)

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality>.

3Select <Black Text Processing for Color>.

4Adjust the value.

●This adjustment value can be set independently in the feeder and platen glass.

Reproduces black or nearly black text in a color closely matching with the original.

Reproduces black text with enhanced clarity.

Maintenance

625

5Select <Apply>.

Maintenance

626

Adjusting Print Position

6FR9-0A8

If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable range, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print

position for each paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm in increments of 0.1

mm.

Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust

When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm." For

<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print

position in the up-to-down direction. For <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>,

specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. To shift in the reverse

direction, specify a value with a "-" sign.

<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically

(Back Side)>

<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust

Horizontally (Back Side)>

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality>.

3Select <Adjust Print Position>.

4Select the paper source.

●When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

5Select the combination of adjustment direction and printing side.

Maintenance

627

6Set an adjustment value.

7Select <Apply>.

Adjusting the Print Position for All Print Jobs

●You can use <Function Settings> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print position for

all print jobs, irrespective of the paper source. The print position can be adjusted in 0.5 mm increments

between -50.0 mm and +50.0 mm. <Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge>(P. 525)

Maintenance

628

Viewing the Counter Value

6FR9-0A9

You can check separate totals for the number of pages used for color printouts and black and white printouts. These

totals include faxes, reports, and lists, in addition to copies and printouts of data from computers.

<Check Counter> Check the number of pages printed

<101: Total 1>

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed.

<108: Total (Black & White 1)>

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white.

<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white.

<114: Total 1 (2-Sided)>

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed with 2-sided.

<123: Total (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in color.

<301: Print (Total 1)>

Displays the total number of pages printed.

<402: Copy + Print (Full Color/Small)>

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in color.

<501: Scan (Total 1)>

Displays the total number of pages scanned.

●The items displayed on the screen depend on your country or region.

●<Monitoring Service> enables communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item

enables information about the machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server

connected to the machine.

●<Check Dev. Cong.> enables you to check the optional units installed on the machine.

Maintenance

629

Printing Reports and Lists

6FR9-0AA

You can print reports and lists to check information such as the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>

and machine settings.

Conguring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists(P. 630)

Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID(P. 630)

Setting Reports on the Communication Results(P. 630)

Printing Lists of Settings(P. 632)

Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 633)

Conguring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists

You can perform 2-sided printing of reports and lists.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <Default Settings for Report

Output> <On> <Apply>

Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID

Department ID Management Report

When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each

<Department ID> by printing a Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can

better manage your paper and toner cartridge supplies.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Department ID Management Report> Check that

the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select

<Start>

Setting Reports on the Communication Results

You can print reports on the results of sending/receiving by e-mail, fax, and I-Fax, as well as results of saving to a

shared folder or FTP server. Some reports can be printed automatically while others are only printed when an error

occurs.

●If "Result" in a printed list contains "NG," you can check details of the error from a three-digit number

prexed with "#" displayed in the next to the result. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on

the online manual website.

Maintenance

630

●Reports printed for e-mail/I-Fax indicate the transmission result between the machine and the mail server,

not between the machine and the destination address.

Communication Management Report

You can check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents by printing a Communication

Management Report. The report can be printed automatically after every 40 transmissions, or you can print it

manually.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <Communication Management

Report> Congure report settings <Apply>

Select <On> to print the report automatically after every 40 transmissions, or <Off> if you do not want to print

the report automatically.

Select <On> to print sent and received reports separately, or <Off> to print both reports on one sheet.

Print the report manually

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Communication Management Report> Check that

the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select

<Start>

Fax TX Result Report

You can check the fax logs of sent documents by printing a Fax TX Result Report. The report can be printed

either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <Fax TX Result Report> Select <On> or <Only

When Error Occurs> Select <Off> or <On> <Apply>

Maintenance

631

When you select <On>, a part of a sent document can be included in the TX Result Report.

●Send jobs originating from the fax driver are omitted from this report.

E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report

You can check the e-mail and I-Fax logs of sent documents as well as documents saved to a shared folder or FTP

server by printing an E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a

transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report> Select

Communication result

●If an error occurs during transmission by e-mail/I-Fax or saving to a shared folder/FTP server, the

report does not show the error code. To check the error code, print a Communication Management

Report ( Communication Management Report(P. 631) ).

RX Result Report

You can check the logs of received fax and I-Fax documents by printing an RX Result Report. The report can be

printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a receiving error occurs.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <RX Result Report> Select <On> or <Only

When Error Occurs>

Printing Lists of Settings

You can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.

Address Book List

You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book as <Coded Dial>, <Favorites>, and <Group>

by printing an Address Book List.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Address Book List> Select the setting you want to

print out Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <Start>

Maintenance

632

User Data List/System Manager Data List

You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 460) ) as well as the content that has been

registered in the machine by printing a User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the

rmware version, the paper size and type registered in the machine, and the print settings of Communication

Management Report, TX Result Report, and RX Result Report.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data

List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and

select <Start>

●The User Data List does not include certain settings such as Network Settings and Management

Settings. To check all the settings items, print the System Manager Data List.

IPSec Policy List

You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec

Policy List.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <IPSec Policy List> Check that the size and type of

paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine

You can print the machine status report, the usage log of toner cartridges, and the list of fonts available in PCL or PS

mode.

Eco Report

You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report

includes tips that are useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Eco Report> Check that the size and type of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

●The amount of power consumption may vary depending on the environment and conditions where

the machine is used.

Maintenance

633

Consumables Status Report

You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size

and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

PCL Font List

You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <PCL Font List> Check that the size and type of

paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

PS Font List

You can check the list of fonts available in PS mode with a report.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <PS Font List> Check that the size and type of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

Cartridge Log Report

You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges with a report.

<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Cartridge Log Report> Check that the size and

type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

Maintenance

634

Replacement Parts

6FR9-0AC

This section describes the replacement parts (consumables) used by the machine. Purchase the replacement parts

from the authorized Canon dealer that you purchased the machine from. Follow the precautions when handling and

storing the replacement parts.

Genuine Consumables

Canon continuously develops technology innovations in Canon manufactured Toner,

Cartridge, and Parts, specically designed for use in Canon Multi-Functional machines.

Experience the benets of optimal print performance, print volume and high quality

outputs, achieved through Canon's new advanced technologies.Therefore, the use of

Canon genuine consumables is recommended for your Canon Multi-Functional

machines.

●To handle and store the replacement parts, observe precautions in "Getting Started" provided with this

product.

●You can check the current amount of replaceable parts remaining. Checking the Remaining Amount of

Consumables(P. 617)

●To maintain print quality, the machine performs automatic calibration in accordance with changes in the

environmental conditions. The machine may also perform automatic calibration when it is turned ON or

recovers from sleep mode. Calibration uses the toner, and accordingly it may result in a decrease of lifetime

of the toner cartridges.

●The color toner cartridges are used even in black and white printing. Therefore, much use of black and white

printing may also result in decrease in the remaining number of printable pages for each color.

●Specifying an auto shutdown time shorter than the default setting (4 hours) may shorten the life of the toner

cartridges.

Consumables

◼Toner Cartridge for Replacement

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner is recommended.

Canon Genuine Toner Weight

Canon Toner T09 Black

Canon Toner T09 Yellow

Canon Toner T09 Magenta

Canon Toner T09 Cyan

Approx. 2.2 kg

Maintenance

635

Be careful of counterfeit toners

●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner

may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any

malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner.

For more information, see global.canon/ctc.

●When replacing toner cartridges, see Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 612) .

Maintenance

636

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

Troubleshooting (FAQ) ................................................................................................................................ 638

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

637

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

6FR9-0AE

When a problem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

638

Appendix

Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 640

Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 642

Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 643

Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 644

Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 646

Going Digital ................................................................................................................................................ 648

So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 650

Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 652

Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 653

Feeder .......................................................................................................................................................... 656

Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 657

Cassette Feeding Module-AF ........................................................................................................................ 660

Copy Card Reader-F ...................................................................................................................................... 661

Fax Function ................................................................................................................................................. 662

Scan Function ............................................................................................................................................... 663

Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 664

Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 666

System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 668

Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 670

Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 671

Optional Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 672

System Options ............................................................................................................................................ 674

Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 676

Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 677

Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 678

Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 681

Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 682

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 690

Appendix

639

Appendix

6FR9-0AF

This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,

◼Machine Specications

See the following section(s) when you want to check the specications of the main unit and optional equipment,

network environment, print function, and so on.

Specications(P. 652)

◼Using Optional Equipment

See the following section(s) when you want to check what options are available to use this machine more conveniently

and more effectively.

Options(P. 671)

◼Referencing the Manual of This Machine

See the rst of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of

the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this

manual), see the second section.

Manuals and Their Contents(P. 676)

Using User's Guide(P. 677)

◼Others

See the following section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright

information.

Appendix

640

Third Party Software(P. 642)

Feature Highlights(P. 643)

Basic Windows Operations(P. 682)

Notice(P. 690)

Appendix

641

Third Party Software

6FR9-0AH

For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).

Appendix

642

Feature Highlights

6FR9-0AJ

This section describes tips for leveraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features

according to your intended purposes and operating environment.

Going Green and Saving Money(P. 644)

Improving Eciency(P. 646)

Going Digital(P. 648)

So Much More(P. 650)

Appendix

643

Going Green and Saving Money

6FR9-0AK

There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.

2-Sided Printing Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet

You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from

your computer, and even incoming faxes. Because you'll only

be using half the paper you would otherwise, you can cut

your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine 2-sided

printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on one sheet

of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single sheet,

which is both economical and environmentally friendly.

Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)

Printing from a Computer(P. 261)

<Receive/Forward>(P. 572) <Fax Settings> <Print on

Both Sides>

<Receive/Forward>(P. 572) <I-Fax Settings> <Print

on Both Sides>

To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages

onto one side of a sheet - 2 or 4 pages for copies,

and up to 16 pages for print jobs sent from your

computer. This is even more effective when used

together with 2-sided printing.

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet

(N on 1)(P. 208)

Printing from a Computer(P. 261)

Sleep Mode Paperless Faxing

Appendix

644

For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that

powers down a machine when nobody is using it has

become an essential feature. This machine will enter

sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to

sleep whenever you want. Press once to put the

machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake the

machine back into action.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 177)

Assume you need paper to fax? Those old paper printouts

you always make are a thing of the past. Send documents

by fax just as they are, created on your computer. It's

paperless, so it's fast. And, received documents are rst

stored in memory, allowing you to print out only those

needed and eliminating worry about paper getting used on

direct mailings, etc.

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 247)

Saving Received Documents into the Machine

(Memory Reception)(P. 240)

Appendix

645

Improving Eciency

6FR9-0AL

Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more ecient.

Address Book Frequently Used Settings in One Touch

Entering fax and e-mail addresses in the Address Book saves

you the inconvenience of entering them number-by-number,

letter-by-letter every time you have something to send. Display

the addresses you use most frequently with the <Favorites>

feature to quickly and easily send what you need to the people

who need it. You can save your Address Book data on your

computer and feel secure knowing that your important contact

information is backed up.

Registering Destinations(P. 179)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 442)

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 218)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 452)

Always making 2-sided copies. Always scanning in

the same format and to the same save

destination. Frequently used settings like these

can be registered to a single shortcut button. This

is convenient by allowing you to specify involved

operations all in a single touch.

Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 171)

Print Images Right Off Your USB Memory Device Remote Management with Remote UI

Appendix

646

Plug a USB memory device into the machine and you can

print images and documents directly, without using a

computer. You can even preview JPEG and other images

before you print, so there is no wasted paper. You can also

scan handwritten memos, etc. and save them directly to a

USB memory device. Convenient for carrying about.

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media

Print)(P. 272)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer,

all without having to go over to the machine. Congure

settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with

an intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface

that you'll master immediately. Save your time and

energy for things other than taking care of the

machine.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote

UI)(P. 429)

Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation

You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching

between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in

the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make

settings while viewing how settings are applied.

Printing from a Computer(P. 261)

Appendix

647

Going Digital

6FR9-0AR

Digitalizing a document enables editing using a computer as well as reducing cost and time by using e-mail.

Scan and E-Mail Scan and Share

E-mail scanned originals without even turning on

your computer. Just convert your scanned original

into an e-mail attachment right from the machine. If

you're one of those people who'd rather send a fax

than mess around with a computer, this feature is for

you.

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Say you've got a paper copy of a report for a company-wide

meeting. Scan it, convert it, and now everyone can see it.

It's saved directly in a shared folder on your network, so

there's no need to print out copies and pass them out. Once

you start talking about hundreds of pages of documents

that everyone needs, there's just no other way to go.

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Scan Only What You Need Searchable PDFs

Appendix

648

What if you're scanning a whole page of a newspaper but

all you're really interested in is a headline and a photo?

Use ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a

preview, and then have the scanner disregard the rest.

Otherwise you'll have to use an editing program to crop

out everything you don't need.

Using ScanGear MF(P. 326)

●Using your product to scan, print or otherwise

reproduce certain documents, and the use of

such images as scanned, printed or otherwise

reproduced by your product, may be

prohibited by law and may result in criminal

and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about

the legality of using your product to scan,

print or otherwise reproduce any particular

document, and/or of the use of the images

scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced,

you should consult in advance with your legal

advisor for guidance.

Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a

"searchable PDF." By scanning an original with both

text and images, text portions are converted by OCR

into text data. In addition to being able to search for

text information, you can also copy required portions

into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in

Microsoft Oce. Eliminate the need to type in

customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch.

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 286)

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)

(P. 323)

Add Images to a Work in Progress

Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned

images directly into documents you're working on. This way you can skip the

steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images

and then exporting them to the application you're really using.

Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 324)

Appendix

649

So Much More

6FR9-0AS

There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the oce, or even on the road.

Application Library to execute useful functions in

one-touch button operation

Using a smartphone/tablet

Application Library is a facility that makes it possible that

frequently used operations such as printing a usual

document and checking the consumables information

as well as convenient functions are registered in the

form of applications. You can execute these applications

in one-touch button operation from the Home screen.

Make the best use of Application Library for time

reduction and operational accuracy enhancement. For

more information, see the manual on Application

Library on the online manual website.

At times such as when you want to quickly print out a

proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a

business destination, or scan materials handed out at a

meeting using a smartphone, Canon PRINT Business

comes in handy. Even in environments without a wireless

LAN router, you can connect to the machine with a

mobile device wirelessly and directly.

PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of

possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this

age of speed.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 333)

Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print Keep Your Printouts Private

Appendix

650

Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or

cell phone, send your data, and out come your

printed documents. With this machine, Google

Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever

you want from wherever you want.

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 356)

Normally, when you print something from your computer, it

comes out of the printer right away. However, if you have

sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use

secure printing and no one will be able to print your

documents without entering your password on the machine's

operation panel. Don't let your condential documents lie

exposed on the tray for everyone to see.

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)

(P. 268)

Go Wireless Get Faxes Wherever You Go

No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've

got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings process

altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the

kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that

you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE

802.11b/g/n for stress-free wireless, and also supports WEP

and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 19)

Never worry about missing a fax when you're out of

the oce. Set a forwarding destination and any fax

that comes in on the machine will go right to you.

Better yet, make the forwarding destination the e-

mail address for your tablet or mobile.

Forwarding the Received Documents

Automatically(P. 242)

Appendix

651

Specications

6FR9-0AU

Specications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.

◼Machine Specications

Main Unit(P. 653)

Feeder(P. 656)

Available Paper(P. 657)

◼Specications of Optional Equipment

Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 660)

Copy Card Reader-F(P. 661)

◼Functional Specications

Fax Function(P. 662)

Scan Function(P. 663)

Printer Functions(P. 664)

Management Functions(P. 666)

◼Environment To Use the Machine

System Environment(P. 668)

Network Environment(P. 670)

Appendix

652

Main Unit

6FR9-0AW

●For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see " Available Paper(P. 657) ."

Type Desktop

Color Supported Full Color

Resolution for Reading 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Resolution for Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Number of Tones 256

Acceptable Originals Up to 215.9 mm × 297.0 mm

Maximum thickness of original: 20 mm or less

Copy Size/Copy Paper Paper Sizes

●Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm

●Min (Paper Drawer): 98.0 mm x 148.0 mm

●Min (Multi-Purpose Tray): 76.2 mm x 127.0 mm

Margin

Top:

●When copying via the platen glass

5 mm ± 2.0 mm

●When copying via the feeder

5 mm ± 3.0 mm

Left or Right:

●When copying via the platen glass

5 mm ± 2.0 mm

●When copying via the feeder

5 mm ± 3.0 mm

Paper Weight

●Paper Drawer: 60 g/m² to 200 g/m²

●Multi-Purpose Tray: 60 g/m² to 200 g/m²

Paper Type Available Paper(P. 657)

Warm-Up Time *1 After Powering ON

13.0 seconds or less

Returning from the Sleep mode

Appendix

653

6.1 seconds or less

First Copy Time

(A4)

●Full Color: Approx. 11.3 seconds

●Black-and-White: Approx. 9.8 seconds

Copy Speed *2

(A4)

●Full Color: 27.0 sheets/minute

●Black-and-White: 27.0 sheets/minute

Scanning Speed

(A4)

Full Color

3.62 seconds

Black-and-White

1.81 seconds

Magnication 25 % to 400 % (in 1 % increments)

Paper Feeding System/Capacity *3 Paper Drawer

250 sheets (80 g/m²)/250 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1

Multi-Purpose Tray

50 sheets (80 g/m²)/50 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1

Paper Output System/Capacity *3 Output Tray

150 sheets (75 g/m²)

Multiple Copies 999 sheets

Power Source AC 220 V - 240 V, 3.5 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power Consumption *1 Maximum Power Consumption

1,370 W or less

During Sleep Mode

●Approx. 0.7 W (USB connection)

●Approx. 0.7 W (wired LAN connection)

●Approx. 0.7 W (wireless LAN connection)

With the Main Power Turned OFF

0.3 W or less

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

C1127iF:

471 mm x 469 mm x 460 mm

C1127i:

451 mm x 469 mm x 460 mm

Weight Main Unit *4

Approx. 24.5 kg

Consumables

Replacement Parts(P. 635)

Appendix

654

Maximum Occupancy Space

(W x D x H)

C1127iF

544 mm × 1112 mm × 866 mm

C1127i

524 mm x 1112 mm x 866 mm

Memory Capacity RAM: 1 GB

Environmental Conditions Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °C

Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

*1May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

*2Copy/print speeds are measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper copied/printed with 100% copy/print

ratio to original on one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously copying/printing the same one page of

content on plain paper (copy speed is tested by copying on the platen glass). Copy/print speeds may vary depending on

paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.

The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of

a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous copying/printing.

*3May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.

*4The toner cartridges are not included.

Appendix

655

Feeder

6FR9-0AX

Original Feeding Mechanism Automatic 2-Sided Document Feeder

Original Size/Type Size of Originals

●Max : 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm

●Min : 139.7 mm x 128.0 mm

Weight of Originals

50 g/m² to 105 g/m²

Original Tray Capacity

(A4)

50 sheets (80 g/m²)

Original Scanning Speed

(A4)

Copying (300 dpi x 600 dpi, A4)

1-Sided Scanning:

●Full Color: 13.5 pages/minute

●Black-and-White: 27.0 pages/minute

2-Sided Scanning:

●Full Color: 27.0 pages/minute

●Black-and-White: 47.0 pages/minute

Copying (300 dpi x 300 dpi, A4) *

1-Sided Scanning:

●Full Color: 27.0 pages/minute

●Black-and-White: 27.0 pages/minute

2-Sided Scanning:

●Full Color: 50.0 pages/minute

●Black-and-White: 50.0 pages/minute

*May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

Appendix

656

Available Paper

6FR9-0AY

The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.

◼Supported Paper Sizes

: Available : Unavailable

Paper Sizes Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2

A4 *3*4*5

B5 *3

A5 *3*6

Legal (LGL) *3*4

Letter (LTR) *3*4*5

Statement (STMT) *3

Executive (EXEC)

Ocio *3*4

Ocio (Brazil) *3*4

Ocio (Mexico) *3*4

Letter (Government) *3*4

Legal (Government) *3*4

Foolscap/Folio *3*4

Foolscap (Australia) *3*4

Legal (India) *4

3x5inch

Envelope No.10 (COM10)

Appendix

657

Paper Sizes Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2

Envelope Monarch

Envelope C5

Envelope DL

Custom Paper Size *7 *8 *9

*1Includes the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF.

*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*3Allows you to print received fax documents.

*4Allows you to print received I-Fax documents.

*5Allows you to print reports or lists.

*6Landscape or portrait orientation is available.

*7The custom size ranging from 98.0 mm x 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm is available.

*8The custom size ranging from 76.2 mm x 127.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm is available.

*9The custom size ranging from 176.0 mm x 250.0 mm to 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm is available.

◼Supported Paper Types

Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.

: Available : Unavailable

Paper Type Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2

Plain 1 *3*4 61 g/m² to 74 g/m²

Plain 2 *3*4 75 g/m² to 82 g/m²

Plain 3 *3*4 83 g/m² to 90 g/m²

Plain 4 91 g/m² to 105 g/m²

Heavy 1 106 g/m² to 119 g/m²

Heavy 2 120 g/m² to 128 g/m²

Heavy 3 129 g/m² to 163 g/m²

Thin 1 *3 60 g/m²

Recycled 1 *3*4 61 g/m² to 74 g/m²

Appendix

658

Paper Type Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2

Recycled 2 *3*4 75 g/m² to 82 g/m²

Color *3*4 61 g/m² to 74 g/m²

Coated 1 100 g/m² to 120 g/m²

Coated 2 121 g/m² to 150 g/m²

Coated 3 151 g/m² to 200 g/m²

Labels

Envelope *5

*1Includes the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF.

*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*3Allows you to print received fax/I-Fax documents.

*4Allows you to print reports or lists.

*5When custom paper size is specied, <Envelope 1>/<Envelope 2> is displayed. If printing cannot be performed

properly with <Envelope 1> selected, change the selection to <Envelope 2>.

Appendix

659

Cassette Feeding Module-AF

6FR9-0C0

Paper Sizes ●Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm

●Min: 98.0 mm x 148.0 mm

Paper Weight 60 g/m² to 200 g/m²

Paper Drawers Capacity *550 sheets (80 g/m²)/640 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

437 mm x 469 mm x 136 mm

Weight Approx. 6.0 kg

*May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.

Appendix

660

Copy Card Reader-F

6FR9-0C1

Available Cards Magnetic

Card Readout Method Magnetic readout

Magnetic Card Reading Direction Face up

Store/Replay Replay

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

88 mm x 96 mm x 40 mm (excluding the attachment kit and cable)

Weight Approx. 200 g (including the attachment kit and cable)

Appendix

661

Fax Function

6FR9-0C2

Telephone Line Used *1 Public Switched Telephone Network, Facsimile Communication Network (PSTN)

Scan Line Density Normal

G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 3.85 line/mm

Fine

G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 7.7 line/mm

Superne

G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 15.4 line/mm

Ultrane

G3: 16 pels*2/mm x 15.4 line/mm

Transmission Speed *3 ●SuperG3: 33.6 kbps

●G3: 14.4 kbps

Compression Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG

Transmission Type SuperG3, G3

Max. Sending Original Sizes A4

Receiving Paper Sizes Available Paper(P. 657)

Transmission Times Approx. 2.6 seconds*4

*1Depending on your locale or your telephone connection, you may be unable to perform data communication. In this

case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

*2Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).

*3With the Automatic Fallback function.

*4Value obtained with Canon original test sheet of A4 size, standard ECM (JBIG) transmission.

Appendix

662

Scan Function

6FR9-0C3

Type Color Scanner

Original Scanning Size Scanning from Platen Glass

Same as "Acceptable Originals" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 653)

Scanning from Feeder

Same as "Original Size/Type" in "Feeder" Feeder(P. 656)

Resolution (Max) 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Scanning Speed Scanning from Platen Glass

Same as "Scanning Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 653)

Scanning from Feeder

Same as "Original Scanning Speed" in "Feeder" Feeder(P. 656)

Interface USB

USB2.0 High-Speed

Wired LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Protocol Supported *FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP), SMTP, TCP/IP, USB

Output Format *TIFF (MMR), JPEG (Single-Page), PDF

*Some formats are not supported depending on the function.

Appendix

663

Printer Functions

6FR9-0C4

◼UFR II Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 657)

Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 653)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, WSD

Resident Fonts None

Interface USB

USB2.0 High-Speed

Wired LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

◼PS Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 657)

Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 653)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) Adobe®PostScript®3TM

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, WSD

Appendix

664

Resident Fonts 136 Roman

Interface USB

USB2.0 High-Speed

Wired LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

◼PCL Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 657)

Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 653)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi (only for PCL6), 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, WSD

Resident Fonts 93 Roman

Interface USB

USB2.0 High-Speed

Wired LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

◼Memory Media Print Function

Printable File Formats ●JPEG (DCF/Exif 2.21 or earlier/JFIF)

●TIFF (JPEG/MH/MR/MMR compression)

●PDF

Appendix

665

Management Functions

6FR9-0C5

◼Authentication Functions

●The machine communicates with LDAP servers using LDAPv3.

●UTF-8 is the supported character encoding used when the text data is transmitted between the machine and an

LDAP server.

◼Firewall Settings

●Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.

●The packet lters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.

●Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specied.

◼IPSec

●IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.

Operating system

●Windows Vista

●Windows 7

●Windows 8

●Windows 8.1

●Windows 10

Connection mode Transport mode

Key exchange protocol

IKEv1 (main mode)

Authentication method

●Pre-shared key

●Digital signature

Hash algorithm (and key length)

●HMAC-SHA1-96

●HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)

Encryption algorithm (and key length)

●3DES-CBC

●AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)

Die-Hellman (DH)

●Group 1 (768 bits)

●Group 2 (1024 bits)

●Group 14 (2048 bits)

ESP

Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96

Encryption algorithm (and key length)

●3DES-CBC

●AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

Hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and key

length) AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

AH Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96

Appendix

666

●IPSec supports communication to a unicast address (or a single device).

●The machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.

◼Registration of Keys and Certicates

●If you install a key or CA certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:

Format ●Key: PKCS#12*1

●CA certicate: X.509 DER/PEM

File extension

●Key: ".p12" or ".pfx"

●CA certicate: ".cer" or ".pem"

Public key algorithm

(and key length)

●RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)

●DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)

●ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)

Certicate signature algorithm

●RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384*2, SHA-512*2, MD2, MD5

●DSA: SHA-1

●ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1

*1Requirements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.

*2RSA-SHA-384 and RSA-SHA-512 are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.

●The machine does not support use of a certicate revocation list (CRL).

◼Denition of "Weak Encryption"

When <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> is set to <On>, the use of the following algorithms is prohibited.

Hash MD4, MD5, SHA-1

HMAC HMAC-MD5

Common key cryptosystem RC2, RC4, DES

Public key cryptosystem RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA (512 bits/1024

bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)

●Even when <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.> is set to <On>, the hash algorithm SHA-1, which is used for

signing a root certicate, can be used.

Appendix

667

System Environment

6FR9-0C6

System Environment for WSD Scan ●Windows 8.1

●Windows 10

System Requirements for the Remote UI

Windows

●Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 and later

●Windows 10: Microsoft Edge

Mac OS

●Mac OS X 10.5 and later: Safari 5.0.6 and later

Android

●Chrome

●UC Browser

iOS

●Safari

●UC Browser

E-mail/I-Fax Forwarding Server Software ●Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2010

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2016

●Lotus DomiNo R7.0

●Sendmail 8.14.4

E-mail/I-Fax Receiving Server Software ●Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2010

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

●Microsoft Exchange Server 2016

●Lotus DomiNo R7.0

●Qpopper 4.0.19

File Servers Available as Destinations for

File Transmission

SMB

●Windows Vista SP2 / 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10

●Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 / Server 2008 / Server 2008 R2 SP1 / Server 2012 /

Server 2012 R2 / Server 2016

●Red Hat Linux 9

●Mac OS X 10.9 / 10.10 / 10.11 / 10.12

FTP

●Windows Vista SP2 / 7 / Server 2008 SP2 / Server 2008 R2 SP1: Internet Information

Services 7.5

●Windows 8 / 10 / Server 2012: Internet Information Services 8.0

●Windows 8.1 / Server 2012 R2: Internet Information Services 8.5

●Windows 10 / Server 2016: Internet Information Services 10.0

●Mac OS X 10.9 / 10.10 / 10.11 / 10.12

●Solaris 10

●Red Hat Linux 9

Appendix

668

Types of LDAP servers ●Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 with Active Directory

●Windows Server 2008 SP2 with Active Directory

●Windows Server 2012 with Active Directory

●Windows Server 2012 R2 with Active Directory

●Windows Server 2016 with Active Directory

●Lotus Notes DomiNo R7 and later

●eDirectory V8.8 SP7 and later

●Lotus DomiNo R8.5 and later

System Requirements for the Send

Function Setting Tool

●Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 and later

●Windows 10: Microsoft Edge

System Requirements for the User's

Guide

Windows

●Internet Explorer 9 and later

●Microsoft Edge

●Firefox

●Firefox ESR

●Chrome*2

macOS

●Safari

●Firefox

●Chrome*2

Linux

●Firefox

iOS

●Safari*2

Android

●Chrome*2

System Requirements for NFC Function ●Android 5.0 and later

*1Before changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.

*2Only when browsing the manual on the Internet.

Appendix

669

Network Environment

6FR9-0C7

◼Common Specications

Protocol Supported TCP/IP

●Frame type: Ethernet II

●Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10

Mobile Print

◼Wired LAN Specications

Interface Interface supporting 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)

◼Wireless LAN Specications

Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Transmission Scheme ●IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)

●IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)

●IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)

Frequency Range 2.412 GHz to 2.472 GHz

Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte 15.9 dBm

Communication Mode ●Infrastructure Mode

●Access Point Mode

Security (encryption method) Infrastructure Mode

●128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP

●WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

●WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

Access Point Mode

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

Appendix

670

Options

6FR9-0C8

Installing options on the machine enables you to use more features.

◼Knowing What Types of Options are Available

Optional Equipment(P. 672)

System Options(P. 674)

◼Looking for Optional Equipment by Purpose

Adding a Paper Drawer

Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 672)

Sending Faxes Manually, Making or Receiving Phone Calls

HANDSET KIT 3/TELEPHONE 6 KIT(P. 672)

Using the Authentication Function to Manage Users by Department

Copy Card Reader-F(P. 672)

Appendix

671

Optional Equipment

6FR9-0C9

The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional equipment described below. Optional

equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.

Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 672)

HANDSET KIT 3/TELEPHONE 6 KIT(P. 672)

Copy Card Reader-F(P. 672)

Cassette Feeding Module-AF

Installing this cassette feeding module enables you to load paper of a different

size than that of paper loaded in the standard paper drawer. This surely reduces

the time and labor for paper replacement.

HANDSET KIT 3/TELEPHONE 6 KIT

This is a handset that can be connected to the machine. Use the handset when

you use the machine as a telephone. Also, use the handset when you send or

receive faxes manually.

Copy Card Reader-F

This is a card authentication system that enables you to perform the login process of Department ID Management by

using a control card instead of entering a department ID. You can log in to the machine by inserting a control card and

log off by removing it.

Card slot

Insert the control card into the card slot when the login screen is displayed. Remove the control card from

the card slot after using the machine.

Appendix

672

Control card

You can use the control card shown below. Hold the card the front side up and insert in the direction

indicated on the card.

Appendix

673

System Options

6FR9-0CA

The machine performance can be enhanced even more by installing system options.

Barcode Printing Kit(P. 674)

Send PDF Security Feature Set(P. 674)

License Registration(P. 674)

Barcode Printing Kit

This option enables you to generate barcodes in various formats. Note that if you want to print barcodes, PCL must be

enabled. For information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual).

Send PDF Security Feature Set

You can enhance the security of PDF les with the Send PDF Security Feature Set. This option enables you to add a

digital signature to PDF les or to create encrypted PDF les when scanning originals.

License Registration

To activate certain system options, you need to obtain a license key and register the key to the machine.

◼Obtaining a License Key

You can obtain a license key by using a web browser. Access the License Management System (http://

www.canon.com/lms/license/) and follow the procedure. As a part of the procedure, you are required to enter the

following numbers.

License Access Number

Check the license access number provided on the License Access Number Certicate that is included in the

package of the option.

Serial Number of the Machine

Check the serial number of the machine from the operation panel.

◼Registering a License Key

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 124)

2Select <Management Settings>.

●If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 135)

Appendix

674

3Select <License/Other> <Register License>.

4Conrm the message on the screen, and select <OK>.

5Enter the license key using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>.

➠Registration starts. Wait until the <Installation is complete. Changes will be effective after the main power

is turned OFF and ON.> message is displayed.

●If the <The feature required for installation is not present.> message is displayed, enable the functions

that are required to activate the option and register the license key again.

6Select <Close>.

7Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 120)

Appendix

675

Manuals and Their Contents

6FR9-0CC

The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Getting Started Read this manual rst. This manual describes basic operations in an easy-to-

understand manner.

C1127iF / C1127i *

C1127iF *

User's Guide (This Manual) This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed

using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a

keyword to search for pages on a specic topic. Using User's Guide(P. 677)

Send Setting Guide This manual describes how to congure settings and prepare for sending

scanned images by e-mail and saving scanned images to shared folders.

* The reference manual differs depending on your country or region.

Appendix

676

Using User's Guide

6FR9-0CE

The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the

functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are

looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify

how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.

◼Screen Layout of User's Guide

This section describes the screens conguring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons. Screen

Layout of User's Guide(P. 678)

◼Viewing User's Guide

This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and

the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information

contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 681)

◼Specifying How the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks

You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to t to the device you use to

view the User's Guide.

How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for

Search the contents

●You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the

screen.

Search by keyword

●Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing

the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter

phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for

multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see

Search(P. 680) .

Appendix

677

Screen Layout of User's Guide

6FR9-0CF

The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.

Top Page

Appears when User's Guide is started.

Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.

Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each

click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each

click on switches between hiding and showing the display.

Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.

Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other

information.

Click to display the previous or following topic.

[Notice]

Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.

Appendix

678

Topic Page

Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.

Navigation

See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.

Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web

browser.

●When you click the icon, the current page may go dark and a pop-up window may appear. To return to

the page, click [Close] in the pop-up window.

Appendix

679

Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.

Click to return to the page top.

Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page

you are looking for.

[Enter keyword(s) here]

Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages

containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for

pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.

Search result

Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the

page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.

●The specied keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.

Appendix

680

Viewing User's Guide

6FR9-0CH

This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and

cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See

also these instructions.

Marks

Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and

other information are indicated using the marks below.

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,

and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items

carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or

property.

Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a

procedure.

Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.

Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual

Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:

Type Example

Keys on the operation panel

Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer/Energy Settings>

Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]

Computer Screens Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the C1127iF. Depending on the model or

operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the

actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.

Illustrations Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the C1127iF. The illustrations of the

toner cartridge are those for the Canon Toner T09.

Appendix

681

Basic Windows Operations

6FR9-0CK

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682)

Enabling [Network discovery](P. 682)

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 683)

Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 684)

Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 684)

Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 685)

Checking the Computer Name(P. 686)

Checking the Printer Port(P. 687)

Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 688)

Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 689)

When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 689)

●Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.

◼Displaying the Printer Folder

Windows Vista

[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start] select [Devices and Printers].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 10

[] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].

Windows Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].

◼Enabling [Network discovery]

Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.

Windows Vista

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under

[Network discovery].

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]

select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Appendix

682

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]

[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 10

[] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced

sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network

discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

◼Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server

1Open Windows Explorer.

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].

2Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].

●To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for

computers.

➠Shared printers are displayed.

Appendix

683

◼Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen

If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CD-

ROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual.

The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]

Windows 10

Click [Ask me anything] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

Windows Server 2016

Click [ ] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

◼Printing a Test Page in Windows

You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.

1Load A4 size paper in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 143)

2Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682)

3Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

Appendix

684

4Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.

➠The test page is printed.

◼Checking the Bit Architecture

If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.

1Display [Control Panel].

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Proceed to step 2.

2Display [System].

Appendix

685

Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012

Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Click [ ] [Settings] [System] select [About].

Windows Server 2008

Double-click [System].

3Check the bit architecture.

For 32-bit versions

[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.

For 64-bit versions

[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.

◼Checking the Computer Name

1Display [Control Panel].

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 10

Click [ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel].

2Display [System].

Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2016

Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].

Appendix

686

Windows Server 2008

Double-click [System].

3Check the computer name.

◼Checking the Printer Port

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

Appendix

687

3In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.

If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address

●If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer are on the

same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard

TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

◼Checking Bidirectional Communication

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 682)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is

selected.

Appendix

688

◼Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected

If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click , , , or in the system tray to display the

SSID of the connected wireless LAN router.

◼When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App

Windows 8/Server 2012

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you

use [Print].

Windows 10

Tap or click [Print] on the application The driver that you use [Print].

●If you print a document or send a fax using this method, only a limited number of functions are available.

●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to

the desktop and perform the required operations. This message appears when the machine is set to display

the user name when printing documents, sending faxes or similar instances.

Appendix

689

Notice

6FR9-0CL

◼IPv6 Ready Logo

The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2

established by the IPv6 Forum.

◼Product Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending

Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008

Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless

network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).

Model Name Power consumption of the product in networked standby

C1127iF / C1127i 3.0 W or less

●The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from

the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the

measurement.

◼E-Waste Rules

India only

This product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the E-Waste (Management) Rules,

2016. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., to an authorized collection site

for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could

have a possible negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous

substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of

this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information regarding return

and recycling of WEEE products, please visit https://in.canon/en/consumer/web/e-waste or write to us at

cipl.ewaste@canon.co.in

Also, this product complies with the "E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016" and prohibits use of lead, mercury,

hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations

exceeding 0.1 % by weight and 0.01 % by weight for Cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule II of

the Rule.

Appendix

690

◼WEEE and Battery Directives

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE

Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this

indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a

concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when

you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible

impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated

with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural

resources.

For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,

approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-

europe.com/battery.

◼Environmental Information

Reducing your environmental impact while saving money

Power Consumption and Activation Time

The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set

in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can

print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.

The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.

If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please

consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.

Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.

Energy Star ®

The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy ecient

models, which help to minimise environmental impact.

Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benets and

the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.

Paper types

This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certied to an environmental stewardship

scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media

down to a weight of 64g/m².

Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.

Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)

Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of

valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.

The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends

that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental

impact of your work with this product at all times.

◼Disclaimers

●The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

●CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL

NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR

EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

Appendix

691

●If you are unable to view the manual in PDF format, download Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Adobe Systems

website (https://get.adobe.com/reader/).

◼Copyright

Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.

◼Trademarks

Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Safari, Mac, macOS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge and Excel are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria

Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.

This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.

UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions.

Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;

6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Appendix

692

Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other

countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

All brand names and product names appearing on this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of their

respective owners.

V_191204

Appendix

693

This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,

Version 1.1.

This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:

http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

-----------------------------------------------------------

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007

-----------------------------------------------------------

PREAMBLE

The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide

development of collaborative font projects, to support the font

creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to

provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and

improved in partnership with others.

The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and

redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The

fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,

redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved

names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,

however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The

requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to

any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

DEFINITIONS

"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright

Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may

include source les, build scripts and documentation.

"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the

"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software

components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).

"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,

deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the

components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting

the Font Software to a new environment.

"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical

writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

PERMISSION & CONDITIONS

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,

modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the

Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

694

1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in

Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.

2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,

redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy

contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be

included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or

in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or

binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.

3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font

Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the

corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the

primary font name as presented to the users.

4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font

Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any

Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the

permission.

5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,

must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be

distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to

remain under this license does not apply to any document created using

the Font Software.

TERMINATION

This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are

not met.

DISCLAIMER

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT

OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

695

- 1 -

Third-Party Services

If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions below.

When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)

through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may

not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies

longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,

lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or

ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify

or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.

- 2 -

The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions

Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding

license conditions.

Table of Software

Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the

License:

See Page

Adobe PostScript 3 3

Adobe PDF Scan Library 10

expat 13

HarfBuzz 14

libjingle 15

Lua 16

LuaSocket 17

Lune 18

MD4 19

Net-SNMP 20

OpenSSL 28

- 3 -

Adobe PostScript 3

Portions include software under the following terms:

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.

______________________________________________________________________________________

The Apache Software License, Version 1.1

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following

acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party

acknowledgments normally appear.

4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products

derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact

apache@apache.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,

without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE

FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

- 4 -

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY

WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software

http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see

<http://www.apache.org/>.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY

WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

______________________________________________________________________________________

- 5 -

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by

Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and

this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other

materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University

of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated

documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the

rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to

permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of

the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE

USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise

to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X

Consortium.

______________________________________________________________________________________

NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON

March 27, 2003

- 6 -

Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron

XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the

"License"). You may obtain a copy of

the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations

under the License.

The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are

Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are

available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp

The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:

https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its

contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote

- 7 -